state of new jersey - ogrenbids.com projects/delanco conformed s… · state of new jersey...

SPECIFICATION

NEW FACILITY

Delanco Motor Vehicle Commission Delanco, Burlington County, N.J.

DPMC PROJECT #T0548-00

STATE OF NEW JERSEY Honorable Chris Christie, Governor

Honorable Kim Guadagno, Lt. Governor

DEPARTMENT OF THE TREASURY Ford M. Scudder, State Treasurer

NEW JERSEY MOTOR VEHICLE COMMISSION Raymond P. Martinez, Chief Administrator

DIVISION OF PROPERTY MANAGEMENT AND CONSTRUCTION Christopher Chianese, Director

NV5 – ARCHITECTURE, PC 7 CAMPUS DRIVE, SUITE 300, PARSIPPANY, NJ 07054-4495

Date: May 2, 2017 – “Conformed Documents”

Volume 2 of 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS Delanco MVC

TOC- 1

NEW MVC FACILITY

DELANCO MOTOR VEHICLE COMMISSION

DELANCO, BURLINGTON COUNTY, NEW JERSEY

DPMC PROJECT: # T0548-00

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1

PART I

TITLE

Instructions to Bidders and General Conditions 1 thru 83

List of drawings LOD-1 thru LOD-3

PART II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sec. No. Title

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 SUMMARY

01 22 20 UNIT PRICES

01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION

01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS

01 56 39 TEMPORARY TREE & PLANT PROTECTION

01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01 78 23 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 16 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

02 82 13 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT – ROOFING AND

EXTERIOR MATERIALS

02 83 13 LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION

02 84 33 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF POTENTIAL HAZARDOUS MATERIAL

CONTAINING INTACT BUILDING MATERIALS

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 30 10 CAST-IN-PLACE SITE WORK CONCRETE

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY


TOC- 2

DIVISION 5 - METALS

05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING

05 31 00 STEEL DECKING

05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 16 00 SHEATHING

06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION

07 27 26 FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS

07 42 43 COMPOSITE WALL PANELS

07 52 16 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS

MEMBRANE ROOFING

07 71 00 ROOF SPECIALTIES

07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES

07 84 00 FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS

07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS

08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08 15 00 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DOORS

08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

08 42 29 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

08 44 13 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

08 45 23 FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANEL SKYLIGHT ASSEMBLIES

08 52 00 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE

08 80 00 GLAZING

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD

09 30 00 TILING

09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

09 51 40 ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILING

09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

09 65 19 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

09 66 23 RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING

09 68 13 TILE CARPETING

09 91 23 PAINTING

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10 14 00 INTERIOR SIGNAGE

10 14 19 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE

10 15 00 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10 21 00 EQUIPMENT SCREENS


TOC- 3

10 26 00 WALL PROTECTION

10 28 00 TOILET ACCESSORIES

10 44 13 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS

10 50 50 METAL LOCKERS

10 75 00 FLAGPOLES

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

12 21 13 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

12 70 00 MODULAR SYSTEMS FURNITURE

VOLUME 2

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (FIRE PROTECTION)

21 05 33 HEAT TRACING FOR SPRINKLLER PIPING

21 10 00 WATER BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

22 00 10 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS

22 00 50 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (PLUMBING)

22 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

22 05 33 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION

22 11 13 WATER DISTRIBUTION

22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 11 18 PEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 13 13 SANITARY SEWER

22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

22 14 13 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

22 63 13 FUEL GAS PIPING

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 00 10 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

23 00 30 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT

23 00 50 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (MECHANICAL)

23 05 19 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING

23 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION

23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

23 09 00 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS

23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING

23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING

23 25 00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT

23 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS


TOC- 4

23 31 13 METAL AND NONMETAL DUCTS

23 31 14 PRE-MANUFACTURED EXTERIOR DUCTING

23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

23 36 00 VAV TERMINAL UNITS

23 41 00 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 00 10 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

26 00 30 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT

26 00 50 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL)

26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 05 30 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 05 35 RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS CABLING

26 05 36 CABLE TRAYS

26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 09 44 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

26 12 50 SERVICE ENTRANCE MODIFICATIONS

26 24 16 PANELBOARDS

26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES

26 41 13 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

26 51 00 LIGHTING FIXTURES

26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

27 15 06 COMMUNICATIONS AND SECURITY CABLING

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 31 21 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

31 10 00 SITE CLEARING

31 20 00 EARTH MOVING

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING

32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING

32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES

32 93 00 PLANTS

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION REPORT

APPENDIX B CONSTRUCTION PROJECT SIGN

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (FIRE PROTECTION) Delanco MVC

210010- 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 21

SECTION 210010 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 21.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for Fire

Protection/Sprinkler system installations. It is intended to supplement Division 1 sections.

Any conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for clarification.

B. This Contractor shall also include the following specification sections as part of Division 21

contract requirements:

1. Section 230010 – General Mechanical Requirements

2. Section 230030 – Electrical Requirements For Equipment

3. Section 230519 – Meters and Gages for Mechanical Piping

4. Section 230523 – General Duty Valves for Mechanical Piping

5. Section 230529 – Hangers and Supports for Mechanical Piping and Equipment

C. Commissioning: This project will be commissioned. This includes a third party commissioning

agent. All fire protection equipment will be included. Refer to the commissioning

specification for requirements relating to fire protection work.

END OF SECTION 210010

1HEAT TRACING FOR SPRINKLER PIPING Delanco MVC

210533- 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 21

SECTION 210533 - HEAT TRACING FOR SPRINKLER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sprinkler piping heat tracing for freeze prevention.

1. Self-regulating, parallel resistance.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and

accessories for each type of product indicated.

1. Schedule heating capacity, length of cable, spacing, and electrical power requirement for

each electric heating cable required.

B. Shop Drawings: For electric heating cable. Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to

other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric heating cables to include in operation and

maintenance manuals.

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.


210533- 2

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace electric heating cable that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.

1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SELF-REGULATING, PARALLEL-RESISTANCE HEATING CABLES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable

product by one of the following:

1. BH Thermal Corporation.

2. Chromalox, Inc.; Wiegard Industrial Division; Emerson Electric Company.

3. Delta-Therm Corporation.

4. Easy Heat Inc.

5. Nelson Heat Trace.

6. Raychem; a division of Pentair

7. Thermon Manufacturing Co.

8. Trasor Corp.

9. Or approved equal

B. Heating Element: Raychem XL-Trace Self-Regulating Heating Cable: Pair of parallel No. 16

AWG, tinned stranded copper bus wires embedded in crosslinked conductive polymer core,

which varies heat output in response to temperature along its length. Terminate with

waterproof, factory-assembled nonheating leads with connectors at one end, and seal the

opposite end watertight. Cable shall be capable of crossing over itself once without

overheating.

C. Electrical Insulating Jacket: Flame-retardant polyolefin.

D. Cable Cover: polyolefin outer jacket with UV inhibitor

E. Maximum Operating Temperature (Power On): 150 deg F

F. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Maximum Heat Output: 5 W/ft.

2. Piping Diameter: 1” NPS

3. Volts: 120

4. Phase: 1

5. Hertz: 60

2.2 CONTROLS

A. Pipe-Mounting Thermostats for Freeze Protection:


210533- 3

1. Remote bulb unit with adjustable temperature range from 30 to 50 deg F.

2. Snap action; open-on-rise, single-pole switch with minimum current rating adequate for

connected cable.

3. Remote bulb on capillary, resistance temperature device, or thermistor for directly

sensing pipe-wall temperature.

4. Corrosion-resistant, waterproof control enclosure.

5. Raychem: C910-485 to monitor and alarm low and high temperatures. Provide with dry

contact alarm for connection to the building energy management system.

6. Provide ground-fault equipment protection for all equipment.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape, heat-conductive putty, cable ties, silicone end

seals and splice kits, and installation clips all furnished by manufacturer, or as recommended in

writing by manufacturer.

B. Warning Labels: Refer to Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment."

C. Warning Tape: Continuously printed "Electrical Tracing"; vinyl, at least 3 mils (0.08 mm)

thick, and with pressure-sensitive, permanent, waterproof, self-adhesive back.

1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150

mm): 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum.

2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) or Larger:

1-1/2 inches (38 mm) minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electric heating cables for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Ensure surfaces and pipes in contact with electric heating cables are free of burrs and

sharp protrusions.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Install the following types of electric heating cable for the applications described:

1. Sprinkler pipe freeze protection: Self-regulating, parallel-resistance heating cable.


210533- 4

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install electric heating cable across expansion, construction, and control joints according to

manufacturer's written recommendations using cable protection conduit and slack cable to allow

movement without damage to cable.

B. Electric Heating Cable Installation for Freeze Protection for Piping:

1. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before insulation is

installed.

2. Install electric heating cables according to IEEE 515.1.

3. Install insulation over piping with electric cables according to Division 22 Section

"Plumbing Insulation."

4. Install warning tape on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating

cables.

5. Provide controller with alarm. Raychem model C910-485.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

D. Protect installed heating cables, including nonheating leads, from damage.

E. Provide ground-fault equipment protection for all equipment.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Perform tests after cable installation but before application of coverings such as

insulation, wall or ceiling construction, or concrete.

1. Test cables for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing.

2. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current

simultaneously.

B. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal

insulation on pipe-mounting cables.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


WATER BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS Delanco MVC

211000- 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 21

SECTION 211000 – WATER BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fire-suppression sprinklers, piping, and equipment for the following

building systems:

1. Wet-pipe, fire-suppression sprinklers, including piping, valves, specialties, and automatic

sprinklers.

B. Total system design and installation is the responsibility of this contractor. All work shall be in

compliance with these specifications, the drawings, and NFPA 13 and 24. Where there are

conflicts between the specifications and NFPA 13 & 24, NFPA 13 & 24 shall govern. The

drawings and specifications are diagrammatic and show the intent of the design. Actual

configuration, layout, quantities, etc is the responsibility of this contractor.

C. A flow test has been performed and is provided at the end of this specification for reference.

D. Sample hydraulic calculations have been performed by the engineer to confirm a fire pump is

not needed. Contractor to perform their own calculations. Pipe sizes may be changed from what

is shown on the drawings provided there is still a 10% safety margin.

E. Location of heads is diagrammatic and may not show complete coverage. This contractor shall

review the architectural drawings and determine exact location, spacing, and number of heads

required to provide proper coverage to meet the requirements of NFPA 13. This may include

additional heads at soffits, under ducts, and in concealed spaces. Pipe path is also shown

diagrammatic. This contractor shall coordinate the installation of all piping with the other

trades also installing work in same spaces. No piping shall be run exposed unless specifically

stated on the drawings or where approved by the Owner or Architect. This includes sprinkler

test and drain piping.

F. Except in the mechanical rooms all piping shall be concealed as indicated on the drawings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.


211000- 2

B. Working Plans: Documents, including drawings, calculations, and material specifications

prepared according to NFPA 13 for obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design sprinkler piping according to the following and obtain approval from authorities having

jurisdiction:

1. Include 10 percent margin of safety for available water flow and pressure.

2. Include losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

3. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: As follows:

a. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

b. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

c. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

d. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

e. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.

4. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design shall be as listed in the latest

version of NFPA 13 or as follows whichever is higher.

a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.

b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.

5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler shall be as listed in the latest version of NFPA

13 or as follows whichever is lower.

a. Office Space: 225 sq. ft.

b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft.

c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.

d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.

e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with 175-psig minimum

working-pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Maximum velocity in any sprinkler pipe shall be 20 feet per second.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for sprinkler piping.

2. Grooved joint couplings and fitting shall be referred to on drawings and product

submittals, and be identified by the manufacturer’s listed model or series designation.

3. Pipe hangers and supports.

4. Piping seismic restraints.

5. Valves, including specialty valves, accessories, and devices.

6. Alarm devices. Include electrical data.

7. Fire department connections. Include type; number, size, and arrangement of inlets; caps

and chains; size and direction of outlet; escutcheon and marking; and finish.

8. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting,

finish, and other pertinent data.


211000- 3

9. Hose connections, including size, type, and finish.

B. Fire-Hydrant Flow Test Report: See last page of this section.

C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that

have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Include hydraulic calculations.

1. Sprinklers shall be referred to on drawings and product submittals, and be specifically

identified by the manufacturer’s listed model or series designation. Trade names and

other abbreviated listings are not allowed.

D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with

performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and

Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for

Underground Piping."

E. Maintenance Data: For each type of sprinkler specialty to include in maintenance manuals

specified in Division 1.


A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by

a qualified professional engineer. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed

for installations of fire-suppression piping that are similar to those indicated for this Project in

material, design, and extent.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by

product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire

Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with other requirements indicated.

1. All grooved couplings, and fittings, valves and specialties shall be the products of a

single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved

components.

2. All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date stamped

for quality assurance and traceability.

D. Sprinkler Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with

the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."


211000- 4

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting steel cabinet and hinged cover, with space

for a minimum of twelve spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include the number of

sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and wrench for sprinklers. Include separate cabinet with

sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,

including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate location of piping in the ceiling space with other trades. Refer to 23 0010

requirements for coordination drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Specialty Valves and Devices:

a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

b. Victaulic Company.

c. Viking Corp.

d. Or approved equal

2. Water-Flow Indicators and Supervisory Switches:

a. Potter Electric Signal Co.

b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

c. System Sensor, Inc.

d. Viking Corp.

e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

f. Or approved equal

3. Sprinkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings:

a. Victaulic Co. of America.

b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc

c. Grinnell Corp


4. Fire Department Connections:

a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.

b. Grinnell Corp.

c. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

d. Smith Industries, Inc.; Potter-Roemer Div.

e. Or approved equal

5. Sprinklers:

a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.


211000- 5

b. Victaulic Company.

c. Viking Corp.


6. Valves:

a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co.

b. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div.

c. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.

d. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.

e. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.

f. Victaulic Co. of America.

g. Or approved equal

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining

materials.

2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell end and plain

end.

1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray-iron standard

pattern.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron gland, rubber gasket,

and steel bolts and nuts.

B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell end and plain end.

1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray-iron standard pattern

2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

C. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with factory- or field-formed, radius-cut-

grooved ends according to AWWA C606.

1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:

a. Manufacturers:

1) Victaulic Co. of America

2) Anvil International

3) Grinnell

4) Or approved equal

b. Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD matching

ductile-iron-pipe OD. Basis of Design: Victaulic AWWA Fittings.

c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: AWWA C606, gasketed fitting matching ductile-

iron-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching ductile-iron-pipe

and fitting grooves, FlushSeal elastomer gasket with center leg, and ASTM A449

electroplated steel bolts and nuts. Basis of Design: Victaulic Series 31.

d. Grooved-End-Pipe Transition Coupling: UL 213 and AWWA C606, gasketed

fitting with end matching ductile-iron-pipe OD and end matching steel-pipe OD.

Include ductile-iron housing with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads and with key

matching ductile-iron-pipe groove and key matching steel-pipe groove, FlushSeal


211000- 6

elastomer gasket listed for use with housing, and ASTM A449 electroplated steel

bolts and nuts. Basis of Design: Victaulic Series 307.

2.4 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Threaded-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or

ASTM A 795, hot-dip galvanized where indicated with factory or field-formed threaded ends.

1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1.

2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.

3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4.

4. Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or

ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe hot-dip galvanized where indicated.

Include ends matching joining method.

5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865, hot-dip galvanized-steel pipe where indicated.

B. Plain-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795

hot-dip galvanized-steel pipe where indicated.

1. Locking-Lug Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with retainer lugs that require one-

quarter turn to secure pipe in fitting.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Anvil International, Inc.

2) Viking

3) Grinnell

4) Or approved equal.

2. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, and ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11.

3. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.

C. Grooved-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or

ASTM A 795, hot-dip galvanized where indicated, with factory or field-formed, square-cut or

roll grooved ends.


a. Manufacturers:

1) Victaulic Co. of America.


3) Grinnell


b. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD

matching steel-pipe OD. Short-pattern, with flow equal to standard pattern fittings.

Basis of Design: Victaulic FireLock.

c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern, unless

otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron

housing with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves,[ prelubricated] rubber

gasket listed for use with housing, and ASTM A449 electroplated steel bolts and

nuts.

1) Rigid Type: Coupling housings with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads shall

be used to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance

with NFPA-13. Couplings shall be fully installed at visual pad-to-pad offset

contact. Couplings that require exact gapping of bolt pads at specific torque

ratings are not permitted. Victaulic Style 107H/107N (Quick-Vic™).


211000- 7

Installation ready rigid coupling for direct stab installation without field

disassembly.

2) Flexible Type: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief

are required. 2” (DN50) through 8” (DN0200), Victaulic Style 177 (Quick-

Vic™), Installation ready flexible coupling; or Victaulic Style 75 or 77

standard flexible couplings.

D. Plain-End, Schedule 10 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795, Schedule 10 in NPS 5

(DN 125) and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10 (DN 150 to

DN 250).

1. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, and ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11.



a. Manufacturers:

1) Victaulic Co. of America.


3) Grinnell


b. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD

matching steel-pipe OD. Short-pattern, with flow equal to standard pattern fittings.

Basis of Design: Victaulic FireLock.

c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern, unless

otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron

housing with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated rubber

gasket listed for use with housing, and ASTM A449 electroplated steel bolts and

nuts.

1) Rigid Type: Coupling housings with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads shall

be used to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance

with NFPA-13. Couplings shall be fully installed at visual pad-to-pad offset

contact. Couplings that require exact gapping of bolt pads at specific torque

ratings are not permitted. Victaulic Style 107H/107N (Quick-Vic™).

Installation ready rigid coupling for direct stab installation without field

disassembly.

2) Flexible Type: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief

are required. 2” (DN50) through 8” (DN0200), Victaulic Style 177 (Quick-

Vic™), Installation ready flexible coupling; or Victaulic Style 75 or 77

standard flexible couplings.

2.5 CPVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F 442/F 442M and UL 1821, SDR 13.5, for 175-psig (1200-kPa) rated

pressure at 150 deg F (62 deg C), with plain ends. Include "Listed" and "CPVC Sprinkler Pipe"

markings.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Lubrizol BlaseMaster

b. Harvel

c. Tyco

d. Spears Flame Guard



211000- 8

2. CPVC Fittings: UL-listed, for 175-psig (1200-kPa) rated pressure at 150 deg F

(62 deg C), socket type. Include "Listed" and "CPVC Sprinkler Fitting" markings.

a. NPS 3/4 to NPS 1-1/2 (DN 20 to DN 40): ASTM F 438 and UL 1821,

Schedule 40.

b. NPS 2 to NPS 3 (DN 50 to DN 80): ASTM F 439 and UL 1821, Schedule 80.

3. Adhesive: ASTM F 493, solvent cement recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer

and made for joining CPVC sprinkler pipe and fittings. Include cleaner or primer

recommended by manufacturer of pipe and fittings.

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Assembly shall be copper alloy, ferrous, and insulating materials with ends matching piping

system.

B. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated assembly, designed for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum

working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C). Include insulating material that isolates dissimilar

materials and ends with inside threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

C. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 175-psig (1200-kPa)

minimum working-pressure rating as required for piping system.

D. Dielectric Flange Insulation Kits: Components for field assembly shall include CR or phenolic

gasket, PE or phenolic bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining and

threaded ends and 300-psig (2070-kPa) working-pressure rating at 225 deg F (107 deg C).

F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with

combination of plain, threaded, or grooved ends and 300-psig (2070-kPa) working-pressure

rating at 225 deg F (107 deg C).

2.7 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS

A. Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile-iron or cast-iron type; or AWWA C153, ductile-

iron, compact mechanical-joint type. Include cement-mortar lining and seal coat according to

AWWA C104 and glands, rubber gaskets, and bolts and nuts according to AWWA C111.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1.

C. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4.

D. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.

E. Steel, Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865.

F. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, ASME B16.9, or ASME B16.11.

G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.

H. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 536, ductile iron; with

dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved according to AWWA C606. Short-

pattern, with flow equal to standard pattern fittings. Basis of Design: Victaulic FireLock.


211000- 9

I. Stainless Steel, Press-Seal Fittings: FM-approved, 300-psig pressure rating; with steel housing,

EPDM O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with Schedule 10S, plain-end, stainless steel pipe.

Include UL 45-listed fitting manufacturer's pressure-sealing tools.

J. Cast-Copper-Alloy Fittings: ASME B16.18.

K. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Flexible connectors shall have materials suitable for system fluid. Include 250-psig (1725-kPa)

minimum working-pressure rating and ends according to the following:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.

3. Option for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Grooved for use with grooved-end-pipe

couplings.

B. Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered with bronze wire

braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded to hose.

C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing

covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.

D. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel,

inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges,

welded to hose.

2.9 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for pipe-flange gasket

materials and welding filler metals.

B. Grooved Joint Lubricants: Lubricate gaskets in accordance with the manufacturer’s published

installation instructions, using lubricant compatible with the gasket elastomer and fluid media.

Basis of Design: Victaulic Vic-Lube.

C. Ductile-Iron, Keyed Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, for ductile-iron pipe dimensions.

Include ASTM A 536, ductile-iron housing, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts and nuts.

D. Ductile-Iron, Flanged Joints: AWWA C115, ductile-iron or gray-iron pipe flanges, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts and nuts.

E. Transition Couplings: AWWA C219, sleeve type, or other manufactured fitting the same size

as, with pressure rating at least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined.

2.10 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Valves" for gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves not

required to be UL listed and FM approved.


211000- 10

2.11 FIRE-PROTECTION-SERVICE VALVES

A. General: UL listed and FM approved, with minimum 175-psig nonshock working-pressure

rating. Valves for grooved-end piping may be furnished with grooved ends instead of type of

ends specified.

B. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: UL 262; cast-bronze, threaded ends; solid wedge; OS&Y;

and rising stem.

C. Indicating Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Smaller: UL 1091; butterfly or ball-type, bronze body with

threaded ends; and weatherproof integral indicating device. Basis of Design: Victaulic Series

728.

1. Indicator: Visual.

2. Indicator: Electrical 115-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch.

3. Indicator: Electrical 125-V ac, prewired, two-circuit, supervisory switch.

D. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, taper wedge, OS&Y,

and rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings and flanged or grooved ends.

Basis of Design: Victaulic Series 771H.

E. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2 and Larger: UL1091, ductile iron body with electroless nickel coated

ductile iron disc, pressure responsive seat, and stainless steel stem. (Stem shall be offset from

the disc centerline to provide complete 360-degree circumferential seating.) Valve shall have an

extended neck, with weatherproof actuator housing and two SPDT supervisory switches. Basis

of Design: Victaulic Style 705.

F. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: UL 312 or MSS SP-80, Class 150; bronze body with

bronze disc and threaded ends.

G. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap, with

bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze-disc ring and flanged ends.

H. Spring-Assisted Check Valves, NPS 2 and Larger: UL 312, ductile-iron body with stainless

steel spring and shaft for vertical or horizontal installation, and grooved ends. Basis of Design:

Victaulic Series 717.

I. Split-Clapper Check Valves, NPS 4 and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body with rubber seal,

bronze-alloy discs, and stainless-steel spring and hinge pin.

2.12 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 175-psig working pressure, designed for vertical installation,

with ductile-iron body and grooved ends or cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved

seat with O-ring seals, and single-hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass,

drain, electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line

attachment with strainer. Valve internal components shall be replaceable without removing the

valve from the installed position. Basis of Design: Victaulic Series 751.

1. Option: Grooved-end connections for use with keyed couplings.

2. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves, and separate from main drain piping.


211000- 11

2.13 SPRINKLERS

A. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:

1. UL 199, for applications except residential.

B. Sprinkler body shall be die-cast, with a hex-shaped wrench boss integrally cast into the

sprinkler body to reduce the risk of damage during installation. Wrenches shall be provided by

the sprinkler manufacturer that directly engage the wrench boss. Basis of Design: Victaulic

Company.

C. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature

classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

D. Sprinkler types shall be as scheduled on the drawings

E. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome-plated, bronze, and painted.

F. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.

G. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting

applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with

sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

2. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, two piece, with 1-inch vertical adjustment.

3. Ceiling Mounting: Plastic, white finish, one piece, flat.

4. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

5. Sidewall Mounting: Plastic, white finish, one piece, flat.

H. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

I. Escutcheons and guards shall be listed, supplied, and approved for use with the sprinkler by the

sprinkler manufacturer.

J. In lieu of rigid pipe offsets or return bends for sprinkler drops, the Victaulic VicFlex™

Multiple-Use Flexible Stainless Steel Sprinkler Drop System may be used to locate sprinklers as

required by final finished ceiling tiles and walls. The drop system shall consist of a braided type

304 stainless steel flexible tube, zinc plated steel 1” NPT Male threaded nipple for connection to

branch-line piping, and a zinc plated steel reducer with a 1/2" or 3/4" NPT female thread for

connection to the sprinkler head. The drop shall include a UL approved Series AH2 braided

hose with a bend radius to 2” to allow for proper installation in confined spaces. The hose shall

be listed for [(4) bends at 31” length] [(5) bends at 36” length] [(6) bends at 48” length] [(6)

bends at 60” length] [(7) bends at 72” length]. Union joints shall be provided for ease of

installation. The flexible drop shall attach to the ceiling grid using a one-piece open gate Series

AB1 bracket. The bracket shall allow installation before the ceiling tile is in place. The braided

drop system is UL listed and FM Approved for sprinkler services to 175 psi (1206 kPa)

2.14 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTINGS

A. Specialty Fittings: UL listed and FM approved; made of steel, ductile iron, or other materials

compatible with piping.


211000- 12

B. Press-Seal Fittings: UL 213, stainless steel housing with EPDM O-rings and pipe stop.

C. Locking-Lug Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with locking-lug ends.

D. Mechanical-T Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with pressure-responsive gasket, bolts,

and threaded or locking-lug outlet.

E. Mechanical-Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with pressure-responsive gaskets,

bolts, and threaded or locking-lug outlets.

F. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, with threaded inlet, threaded outlet, and seals; adjustable.

G. Sprinkler, Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded

inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.

H. Sprinkler, Branch-Line Test Fittings: UL-listed, brass body; with threaded inlet and capped

drain outlet and threaded outlet for sprinkler.

I. Sprinkler, Inspector's Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron housing; with threaded inlet

and drain outlet and sight glass.

2.15 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Wall-Type, Fire Department Connection: UL 405, 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum pressure

rating; with corrosion-resistant-metal body with brass inlets, brass wall escutcheon plate, brass

lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains, and brass lugged swivel connections. Include inlets

with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads,

outlet with pipe threads, extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and

escutcheon plate with marking similar to "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."

1. Type: Exposed, projecting, with two inlets and round escutcheon plate.

2. Finish: Polished chrome-plated

B. At the low point near each fire department connection, install a 90-degree elbow with drain

connection to allow for system drainage to prevent freezing. Basis of Design: Victaulic #10-DR.

or equal.

2.16 ALARM DEVICES

A. General: Types matching piping and equipment connections.

B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarms: UL 753, mechanical-operation type with pelton-wheel operator

with shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction and 10-inch diameter, cast-

aluminum alarm gong with red-enamel factory finish. Include NPS 3/4 inlet and NPS 1 drain

connections. Basis of Design: Victaulic Series 760 or approved equal

C. Water-Flow Indicators: UL 346; electrical-supervision, vane-type water-flow detector; with

250-psig pressure rating; and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include two

single-pole, double-throw, circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V

ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent

false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed. Basis of Design: System

Sensor or approved equal.


211000- 13

D. Pressure Switches: UL 753; electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard feature.

Include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and design that operates on rising

pressure and signals water flow. Basis of Design: System Sensor or approved equal.

E. Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double throw; with normally

closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.

Provide for all valves in the system. Basis of Design: System Sensor or approved equal.

2.17 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Pressure Gages: UL 393, 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter dial with dial range of 0 to 250 psig.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Flow test information is attached at the end of this section.

3.2 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use welded joints with galvanized steel pipe.

B. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same as or higher

than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized, standard-

weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and

grooved joints or use galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast- or

malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

D. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Use ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe and fittings and

restrained joints.

E. Sprinkler Feed Mains and Risers: Use the following:

1. NPS 6 and Smaller: Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end

fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.

2. NPS 3 and above: Schedule 10 steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, grooved-end

fittings; and grooved joints.

F. Sprinkler Branch Piping: Use the following:


211000- 14

1. Sprinkler-Piping Option: Mechanical-T bolted-branch-outlet fittings, NPS 2 and smaller,

may be used downstream from sprinkler zone valves.

2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends, cast- or malleable-

iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.

3. NPS 2 and Smaller: Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end

fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.

4. NPS 2 and Smaller: CPVC Pipe: ASTM F 442/F 442M and UL 1821, SDR 13.5, for

175-psig (1200-kPa) rated pressure at 150 deg F (62 deg C), with plain ends. Include

"Listed" and "CPVC Sprinkler Pipe" markings.

3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply:

1. Fire-Protection-Service Valves: UL listed and FM approved for applications where

required by NFPA 13.

a. Shutoff Duty: Use OS&Y type gate valves with tamper switches.

2. General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FM-approved valves are not

required by NFPA 13.

a. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.

b. Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, or butterfly valves.

3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint

construction.

B. Ductile-Iron-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use ductile-iron pipe with radius-cut-grooved ends;

ductile-iron, grooved-end fittings; and ductile-iron, keyed couplings. Assemble joints with

couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written

instructions.

C. Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut or roll-grooved ends and

Schedule 30 or thinner steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; and steel,

keyed couplings. Assemble joints with couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to

coupling manufacturer's written instructions. Use gaskets listed for dry-pipe service for dry

piping. A factory-trained field representative (direct employee) of the mechanical joint

manufacture shall provide on-site training for contractor's field personnel in the proper use of

grooving tools and installation of grooved piping products. The factory-trained representative

shall periodically review the product installation and ensure best practices are being followed.

Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.

D. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use UL-listed tool and procedure and

follow forming equipment manufacturer's written instructions. Drill pilot hole in copper tube,

form branch for collar, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into formed-

collar outlet.

E. Press-Seal-Fitting Joints: Use UL-listed tool and procedure and follow fitting manufacturer's

written instructions. Include use of specific equipment, pressure-sealing tool, and accessories.


211000- 15

F. Locking-Lug-Fitting, Twist-Locked Joints: Follow fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Dissimilar-Piping-Material Joints: Construct joints using adapters or couplings compatible with

both piping materials. Use dielectric fittings if both piping materials are metal. Refer to

Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for dielectric fittings.

3.6 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Coordinate new service with the water company. Tap fee to be paid by the Owner. Connect the

new service pipe to the main in the street and extend to the building as indicated on the site

drawings.

B. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping of size and in location indicated for service

entrance to building. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for exterior piping.

C. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated

at connection to water-service piping.

D. Install shutoff valves, meter, backflow preventer, check valve, pressure gage, drain, and other

accessories at connection to water service in compliance with NFPA 13.

3.7 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTION

A. Connect sprinkler piping to building interior water distribution piping. Refer to Division 22

Section "Water Distribution Piping" for interior piping.

B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated

at connection to water distribution piping.

C. Install shutoff valves, meter, backflow preventer, check valve, pressure gage, drain, and other

accessories at connection to water service in compliance with NFPA 13.

3.8 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping

installation.

B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general

location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from

authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating

from approved working plans.

C. Install underground service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24 and with restrained joints.

Install a minimum of 48” below finished grade.

D. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions

in pipe sizes.


211000- 16

E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. Unions are not required on

flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.

F. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and

larger connections.

G. Unions and flanges for servicing and disconnect are not required in installations with grooved

mechanical joint couplings. (The couplings shall serve as disconnect points.)

H. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized

and located according to NFPA 13.

I. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

J. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to sprinkler risers

when sprinkler branch piping is connected to sprinkler risers.

K. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves.

Drain to floor drain or outside building.

L. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

M. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials and installation.

N. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake

damage.

O. Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. Construct

rigid piping joints, unless otherwise indicated.

P. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at each sprinkler test connection. Include

pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seated globe valve,

arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install

where they will not be subject to freezing.

3.9 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install specialty sprinkler fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.10 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Valves" for installing general-duty valves. Install fire-protection

specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13, manufacturer's

written instructions, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Gate Valves: Install fire-protection-service valves supervised-open, located to control sources

of water supply except from fire department connections. Provide permanent identification

signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of

check valves in potable-water supply sources.


211000- 17

D. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including

bypass check valve and retard chamber drain-line connection.

3.11 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS

A. General: Use sprinklers according to the following applications:

1. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent, recessed, flush, and concealed sprinklers, as

indicated.

2. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.

3. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright; pendent, dry-type; and sidewall, dry-type

sprinklers.

4. Special Applications: Use extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-response

sprinklers where indicated.

5. Sprinkler Finishes: Use sprinklers with the following finishes:

a. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome-plated in finished spaces

exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax

coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.

b. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.

c. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.

d. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.

3.12 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in patterns indicated.

B. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical panels and tiles.

C. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry-

type sprinklers with water supply from heated space.

D. Do not install any sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or show a visible loss of fluid.

Never install any sprinkler with a cracked bulb.

E. The sprinkler bulb protector shall be removed by hand. Do not use any tools or devices that

could damage the bulb.

3.13 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water supplies to sprinklers. Include backflow preventers.

B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain

or outside building.

C. Connect piping to specialty valves, specialties, fire department connections, and accessories.

D. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.

3.14 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION


211000- 18

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in

NFPA 13 and in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification."


A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping according to NFPA 13, "System Acceptance" Chapter.

B. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to demonstrate

compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.

C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.16 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. Remove and replace sprinklers having paint other than

factory finish.

3.17 PROTECTION

A. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion. Do not charge with water until

permanent heat is on in the building.

3.18 COMMISSIONING

A. Comply also with the commissioning specification.

B. Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories are installed and operate

correctly.

C. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.

D. Verify that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified are replaced

with new, correct type.

E. Verify that sprinklers are correct types, have correct finishes and temperature ratings, and have

guards as required for each application.

F. Verify that potable-water supplies have correct types of backflow preventers.

G. Verify that fire department connections have threads compatible with local fire department

equipment.

H. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler piping with water.

I. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.

J. Adjust operating controls and pressure settings.

K. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.


211000- 19

3.19 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate equipment, specialties, and accessories. Review operating and maintenance

information.

B. Schedule demonstration with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

3.20 FLOW TEST

A. Recently completed flow test is provided below.



211000- 20

BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS Delanco MVC

220010- 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 22

SECTION 220010 - BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. This Contractor shall also adhere to the following specification sections as if they were part of

Division 22:

1. Section 230010 – Basic Mechanical Requirements

2. Section 230030 – Electrical Requirements For Equipment

3. Section 230553 – Identification for Mechanical Piping and Equipment

4. Section 230519 – Meters and Gages for Mechanical Piping

5. Section 230523 – General Duty Valves for Mechanical Piping

6. Section 230529 – Hangers and Supports for Mechanical Piping and Equipment


BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (PLUMBING) Delanco MVC

220050- 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 22

SECTION 220050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (PLUMBING)

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application

with fire protection installations as follows:

1. Piping materials and construction

2. Miscellaneous metals

3. Painting and finishing

4. Sleeves and seals

a. Sleeves

b. Escutcheons

5. Joint sealers

6. Fire stop systems

7. Anchor bolts

8. Concrete and masonry work

9. Earthwork

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,

pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,

unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied

spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by

building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions

and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.

Examples include installations within unheated shelters.


220050- 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For all specified materials and products.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage

for electrical materials and equipment.

C. Firestop: For each firestop system show construction conditions, relationships to adjoining

construction, dimensions, description of materials and finishes, component connections,

anchorage methods, hardware and installation procedures, plus the following:

1. Firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction that confirms compliance with requirements for each condition.

2. Refer to Division 7, Thermal and Moisture Protection, for additional requirements

related to Firestop Systems.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural

Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain and protect existing building services, which transit the area affected by selective

demolition. Provide temporary utility services to affected areas.

B. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by excavation operations.

C. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities near excavation areas. If utilities are

indicated to remain, support and protect services during excavation operations.

D. Remove existing underground utilities indicated to be removed.

1. Uncharted or Incorrectly Charted Utilities: Contact utility owner immediately for

instructions.

2. Provide minimum of 48-hour notice to owner and/or Architect/Engineer prior to utility

interruption.

E. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions

within the limits permitted by the joints sealer manufacturer. Do not apply joint sealers to wet

substrates.


220050- 3

F. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining method

requirements.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.


A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system

contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless

thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face

or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping

system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

1. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-

duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for

refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for

wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

F. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.

2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

G. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer..


220050- 4

2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with

ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.

c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div.

d. JCM Industries.

e. Smith-Blair, Inc.

f. Viking Johnson.

g. Or approved equal.

2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.

3. Underground Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type

coupling.

4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's

Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-

cement-joint end.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent

dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include

brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.

E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Non-pressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173

with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal

band on each end.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

b. Fernco, Inc.

c. Mission Rubber Company.

d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.

e. Or approved equal.


A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-

joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working

pressure at 180 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.


220050- 5

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Eclipse, Inc.

d. Epco Sales, Inc.

e. Hart Industries, International, Inc.

f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

h. Or approved equal.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig

minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Epco Sales, Inc.

d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.


E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-

face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic

washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Central Plastics Company.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.


2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig

minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic

lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Calpico, Inc.

b. Lochinvar Corp.

c. Victaulic

d. Or approved equal.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic

lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Perfection Corp.

b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.

d. Victaulic Co. of America



220050- 6

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS METALS AND LUMBER

A. Miscellaneous metal shall be as follows:

1. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A 36.

2. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.

3. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.

4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded.

5. Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required.

B. Miscellaneous lumber shall be as follows:

1. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number

3 Common or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or

Number 3 boards complying with SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in

accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19

percent.

2. Construction Panels: Plywood panels; APA C-D PLUGGED INT, with exterior glue;

thickness as indicated, or if not indicated, not less than 15/32 inches.

2.6 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

A. Refer to Division 8 Sections for material requirements related to Access Doors and Panels.

2.7 PAINTING

A. Refer to Division 9, Painting, for material requirements related to Painting and Finishing

2.8 SLEEVES

A. Provide sleeves where required to protect conduit and cable penetrations. Each sleeve shall

extend through its respective foundation, floor, or wall and shall be cut flush with each surface

unless otherwise required.

1. Sleeve diameter shall allow for installation of specified sealant or seals.

2. All sleeves shall be coordinated with general construction work and secured in place

B. Sleeves through floor slabs or exterior aboveground masonry walls: ASTM A53, Type E,

Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel pipe finished with smooth ends.

C. Sleeves through below grade foundations: Cast iron or ductile-iron pipe finished with smooth

ends.

D. Sleeves through exterior below grade ‘basement’ or tunnel walls: Mechanical sleeve seal as

specified below.

E. Sleeves through interior walls, partitions or suspended ceilings: Galvanized-steel sheet, 0.0239-

inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.


220050- 7

F. Floor sleeves shall extend 1 inch above the finished floor. Sleeve shall provide 1/2" space

between floor sleeves and passing conduit and shall be caulked with waterproof sealant or fire

sealant where required.

2.9 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space

between pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers:


b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Metraflex Co.



2. Sealing Elements: interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and

number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.10 JOINT SEALERS

A. Refer to Division 7 Sections for material requirements related to Joint Sealants.

B. Joint fillers and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates

under conditions of service and application. Colors shall be as selected by the Architect from

manufacturer's standard colors.

2.11 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

A. Refer to Division 7, Thermal and Moisture Protection, for material requirements related to

Firestop Systems

2.12 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely

fit around conduit and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: Polished chrome-plated with set screw.

C. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: Polished chrome-plated with concealed hinge and set screw.

D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

2.13 GROUT


220050- 8

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, non-corrosive,

nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 3000-psi , 28-day compressive strength.

3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.14 CONCRETE

A. Refer to Division 3 Concrete for materials requirements related to Concrete work.

2.15 ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Contractor shall provide and set in place at the time bases are poured, all necessary anchor bolts

as required for the various equipment specified herein, to be furnished by him under these

Specifications. Anchor bolts must be of the hook type and of the proper sizes and length to suit

the apparatus. The bolts shall be set in pipe sleeves of approximately twice the bolt diameter

and as long as the imbedded length of the bolt.

B. When the Equipment is set in its proper position, the bolt sleeves and the space between the

rough foundations, bases or curbs of the Equipment shall be completely filled with one inch of

non shrinking cement grout

2.16 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Division 31, Earth Work, for materials requirements related to Earth Work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 sections specifying

piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated

unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Piping Installation:

1. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment

rooms and service areas. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space

for ceiling panel removal.

2. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at

right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless

specifically indicated otherwise.

3. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

4. Install piping at indicated slopes. Install piping free of sags and bends.


220050- 9

5. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

6. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

7. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the

following:

a. New Piping:

1) Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-

pattern type.

2) Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-

plated finish.

3) Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.

4) Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

5) Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type.

6) Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces:

7) Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces:

8) Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces:

D. Pipe Sleeves:

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. Permanent sleeves are not required for

holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

2. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor

and roof slabs.

3. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board

partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

4. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve

fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

5. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

a. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

1) Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.

2) Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions.

3) Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane

waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section

of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level.

b. Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

c. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and

pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and

location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and

installation.

6. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space

between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

a. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

b. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.


220050- 10

c. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble

mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve.

Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and

make watertight seal.

d. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for

sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size

to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing

mechanical sleeve seals.

1) Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing

elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of

sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space

between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause

sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

e. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop

materials. Refer to Division 07.

f. Patch and/or seal all openings or penetrations made in fire rated floors, ceilings or

partitions after work has been installed. The material used for sealing the

openings shall have a fire rating equal to or greater than the rating of the floor,

ceiling or partition material. All fire sealant material shall be U.L. classified and

approved by the Architect/Engineer.

g. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

h. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for

roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections

specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube

end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using

lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"

Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.


220050- 11

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and

welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings

according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.

3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.

4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and

socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Non-pressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

6. PVC to ABS Non-pressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138

Appendix.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or

paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to

pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION – COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are

not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and

components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.

Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations.

Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope

3.4 EARTHWORK


220050- 12

A. Provide all labor, equipment and services required for underground or underslab systems

excavation and backfill. Coordinate work with the work of other trades.

B. Refer to Division 31, Earth Work, for requirements related to Earth Work.

3.5 ERECTION OF SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and

elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."

C. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location,

alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

D. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to

view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install

fasteners without splitting wood members.

E. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.6 ANCHORS

A. Direct all pipe motion to expansion joints by heavy clamps and/or structural steel sections

clamped or welded to structural members as required and/or as shown on drawings. Points at

which anchors are located and secured shall be approved by the Engineer so that no structural

members shall be unduly strained. Where possible, anchor points shall be on members running

parallel to the piping being anchored.

3.7 CONCRETE WORK

A. Refer to Division 3 Concrete for installation requirements related to concrete work.

B. Provide all labor, equipment and services required for indoor and/or outdoor concrete work

related to piping installations in conformance with ACI (American Concrete Institute)

guidelines and practices.

3.8 CONCRETE BASES AND ANCHOR BOLTS

A. General: Provide and set in place at the time the foundations, bases, or curbs are poured, all

anchor bolts required for the equipment specified. Anchor bolts shall be of the type and proper

sizes and length to suit the application and concrete thickness.

B. Verify the location of all anchor bolts for the equipment furnished and supervise the work

while foundations, bases, or curbs are poured.

C. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to new or existing concrete base or substrate as indicated,

according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions.


220050- 13

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in

both directions than supported unit and 4 inches high.

2. New Concrete Base: Pour new base integral with new floor slab, or else roughen existing

concrete surface and install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of

the base, unless otherwise indicated, to connect new concrete base to new or existing

concrete floor. Use L-hook type anchor bolts imbedded the full slab depth.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be

embedded. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported

equipment

3.9 ERECTION OF SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

D. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor

materials and equipment.

E. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or

will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without

splitting wood members.

F. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads

G. Direct all conduit or equipment motion to expansion joints by heavy clamps and/or structural

steel sections clamped or welded to structural members as required and/or as indicated. Points

at which anchors are located and secured shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer such that

no structural members shall be unduly strained. Where possible, anchor points shall be on

members running parallel to the piping being anchored

3.10 JOINT SEALER APPLICATION

A. Refer to Division 7, Thermal and Moisture Protection, for installation requirements related to

Firestop Systems



Firestop Systems

3.12 PAINTING AND FINISHING


220050- 14

A. Painting of systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior

Painting" and "Exterior Painting.".

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and

procedures to match original factory finish.


GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Delanco MVC

220523-1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 22

SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Bronze ball valves.

2. Bronze swing check valves.

3. Lubricated plug valves.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections

only.

2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags

and schedules.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Non-rising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.


220523-2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.

3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

4. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.

5. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use

handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Lead Free silicon bronze (ASTM listed) valves shall be made with corrosion-resistant materials.

Manufacturer shall provide third party certification tested in accordance with EN ISO 6509

regarding dezincification corrosion resistance and stress corrosion cracking.

C. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system

pressures and temperatures.


220523-3

D. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

E. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.

2. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10

plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.

F. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the following features:

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material that

meets UL 2043 approved for inside air plenum, and protective sleeve that allows

operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation and memory

stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied. Butterfly Valves: With

extended neck.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

NIBCO NIB-SEAL (-NS suffix in figure no.), handle extension or approved

equal.

G. Valve-End Connections:

1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Hammond Valve.

2. Milwaukee Valve Company.

3. NIBCO INC.

4. Stockham

5. Victaulic Company

6. Or approved equal.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. All valves shall be “no-lead” certified.

B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig

d. Body Design: Two piece.

e. Body Material: Bronze (NSF 61 UL Compliant)

f. Ends: Threaded.


220523-4

g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

h. Stem: Bronze.

i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

j. Port: Full (no exceptions)

2. Acceptable Full Port Valves: NIBCO Model T/PC-585-66-LF (-NS) with NIBCO Copper

x Male adapters; figure no. 604 or PC604 Press x Male adapters. or the Victaulic Style

No. 721 and 726 with grooved ends; and Series P589 with Vic-Press ends.

2.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.

b. CWP Rating: 200 psig

c. Body Design: T pattern

d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded or soldered.

f. Disc: Bronze (metal) Disc: NBR, PTFE, or TFE. (non-metal)

2. Acceptable Valves: Milwaukee Valve 509 or 1509, NIBCO Model T-413-Y-LF with

NIBCO Copper x Male adapters; figure no. 604, Stockham B-316Y

2.5 LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES

A. Class 125, Regular-Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends or Flanged Ends

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type II.


c. Body Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication-

sealing system.

d. Pattern: Regular

e. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove.

2. Acceptable Valves: Flowserve Nordstrom 142 or 143

2.6 BALANCING VALVES

A. Calibrated Manual Balancing Valves: Adjustable, “Y” pattern with two readout ports and

memory setting indicator. (Globe valve, plug valve, or ball valve type will not be accepted)

1. Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong

b. Tour & Andersson, Inc.

c. Nexus


2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze, Y-pattern body with adjustment knob and threaded ends.

Constructed with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings. Valves to have differential

pressure read-out ports across seat area. Read-out ports to be fitted with internal EPT

inserts and check valves. Valve bodies to have 1/4” NPT tapped drain/purge port.


220523-5

Valves to have memory stop feature to allow valve to be closed for service and then

reopened to set point without disturbing balance position. All valves to have calibrated

nameplates to assure specific valve settings. Valves shall be designed for positive shut-

off. (Armstrong CBV-S & CBV-T or Tour & Anderson STAD/STAS).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove

special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and

handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made

accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper

size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is

suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.


A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:


220523-6

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves. OS&Y where indicated on the plans.

2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) or grooved type.

3. Throttling Service: “Y” pattern balancing valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves

with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends or soldered

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Grooved or Flanged ends except where

threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Grooved Flanged ends.

4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends

6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

3.5 GAS VALVES

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: threaded ends.

2. Ball Valves: two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and larger

1. Plug valves

3.6 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.

3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125 bronze or nonmetallic disc.


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING Delanco MVC

PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 22

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and

equipment:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Metal framing systems.

4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

5. Fastener systems.

6. Pipe stands.

7. Equipment supports.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fire-

suppression piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and

Supports."

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined

weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.



1.5 SUBMITTALS




3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.

4. Pipe positioning systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and

installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.

2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.

3. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers specified.

1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.

2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.

3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.

5. Empire Industries, Inc.

6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.

7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.

8. Grinnell Corp.

9. GS Metals Corp.

10. MIRO Industries

11. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

12. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

13. PHS Industries, Inc.

14. Pipe Shields, Inc.

15. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.

16. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

17. Tolco Inc.


2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3

"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped. All metal to be galvanized.



C. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels

and other components.

B. Coatings: Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc.

b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.

c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.

d. MKT Fastening, LLC.

e. Powers Fasteners.

f. Or approved equal.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened

portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported

loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

b. Empire Industries, Inc.

c. Hilti, Inc.

d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.

e. MKT Fastening, LLC.

f. Powers Fasteners.

g. Or approved equal.

2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel

shapes.



2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to individual piping specifications for specific requirements of the type of hangers and

supports to utilize.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems

and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Galvanized Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of

noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to

DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

3. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated

stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

4. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to

DN 750).

5. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100

to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

6. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100

to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-

bolt to retain pipe.

7. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900), if vertical adjustment is required, with steel

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.



F. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy

loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping

installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping

installations.

G. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

H. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

I. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not




J. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.

K. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and

waste piping for plumbing fixtures.

3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building

structure.

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for

grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze

pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual

pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.

Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support

together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less

than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.

Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste

piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures"

for plumbing fixtures.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and

other accessories.

H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.



K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger

and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from

movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum

pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

N. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attaching clamps and spacers to piping and insulation.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. Maintain continuous insulation and

vapor barrier.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch

(1.22 mm) thick.

5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.5 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment

supports.



B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance

and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.


HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING Delanco MVC

220533 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 22

SECTION 220533 - HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing piping heat tracing domestic hot-water-temperature

maintenance.

1. Self-regulating, parallel resistance.


1. Division 21 Section "Heat Tracing for Fire-Suppression Piping."

1.3 SUBMITTALS


accessories for each type of product indicated.

1. Schedule heating capacity, length of cable, spacing, and electrical power requirement for

each electric heating cable required.

B. Shop Drawings: For electric heating cable. Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to

other work.



D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric heating cables to include in operation and


E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


220533 - 2




intended use.

1.5 WARRANTY


replace electric heating cable that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.

1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SELF-REGULATING, PARALLEL-RESISTANCE HEATING CABLES



B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. BH Thermal Corporation.

2. Chromalox, Inc.; Wiegard Industrial Division; Emerson Electric Company.

3. Delta-Therm Corporation.

4. Easy Heat Inc.

5. Nelson Heat Trace.

6. Pyrotenax; a division of Tyco Thermal Controls.

7. Raychem; a division of Pentair Thermal.

8. Thermon Manufacturing Co.

9. Trasor Corp.


C. Heating Element: Pair of parallel No. 16 AWG, nickel-coated stranded copper bus wires

embedded in crosslinked conductive polymer core, which varies heat output in response to

temperature along its length. Terminate with waterproof, factory-assembled nonheating leads

with connectors at one end, and seal the opposite end watertight. Cable shall be capable of

crossing over itself once without overheating.

D. Electrical Insulating Jacket: Flame-retardant polyolefin.

E. Cable Cover: Tinned-copper and polyolefin outer jacket with UV inhibitor.

F. Maximum Operating Temperature (Power On): 150 deg F

G. Capacities and Characteristics:


220533 - 3

1. Maximum Heat Output: 5 W/ft..

2. Piping Diameter: Varies, refer to drawings

3. Number of Parallel Cables: 1

4. Volts: 120V.

5. Phase: 1

6. Hertz: 60

7. Full-Load Amperes:

8. Minimum Circuit Ampacity:

9. Maximum Overcurrent Protection:

2.2 CONTROLS

A. Electronic Controller for Domestic Hot-Water-Temperature Maintenance: Raychem HWAT-

ECO electronic controller

1. Flexible temperature control of hot water temperature.

2. Lowers maintain temperature during low use hours to save energy.

3. Pipe temperature monitoring with high temperature alarm.

4. Building management system interface.

5. Microprocessor based.

6. Minimum of four separate schedules.

7. Minimum 24-hour battery carryover.

8. On-off-auto switch.

9. 365-day calendar with 20 programmable holidays.

10. Relays with contacts to indicate operational status, on or off, and for interface with

central HVAC control system workstation.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape, heat-conductive putty, cable ties, silicone end

seals and splice kits, and installation clips all furnished by manufacturer, or as recommended in

writing by manufacturer.

B. Warning Labels: Refer to Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment."

C. Warning Tape: Continuously printed "Electrical Tracing"; vinyl, at least 3 mils (0.08 mm)

thick, and with pressure-sensitive, permanent, waterproof, self-adhesive back.

1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150

mm): 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum.


220533 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electric heating cables for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Ensure surfaces and pipes in contact with electric heating cables are free of burrs and

sharp protrusions.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Install the following types of electric heating cable for the applications described:

1. Temperature Maintenance for Domestic Hot Water: Self-regulating, parallel-resistance

heating cable.

2. Install on all domestic hot water piping from the outlet of the water heater to the furthest

fixture and all branch piping within 8 ft of any fixture.

3. This shall include the three (M&W) gang toilet rooms in the Agency Services Building

and the M&W toilet rooms in the RTFH Building.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Heat trace to only be installed on copper pipes. No PEX shall be used for traced hot water

piping.

B. Install electric heating cable across expansion, construction, and control joints according to

manufacturer's written recommendations using cable protection conduit and slack cable to allow

movement without damage to cable.

C. Electric Heating Cable Installation for Snow and Ice Melting on Roofs and in Gutters and

Downspouts: Install on roof and in gutters and downspouts with clips furnished by

manufacturer that are compatible with roof, gutters, and downspouts.

D. Electric Heating Cable Installation for Temperature Maintenance for Domestic Hot Water:

1. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before insulation is

installed.

2. Install insulation over piping with electric heating cables according to Division 22

Section "Plumbing Insulation."

3. Install warning tape on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating

cables.

E. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

F. Protect installed heating cables, including nonheating leads, from damage.


220533 - 5

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."


A. Testing: Perform tests after cable installation but before application of coverings such as

insulation, wall or ceiling construction, or concrete.

1. Test cables for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing.

2. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current

simultaneously.

B. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal

insulation on pipe-mounting cables.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


PLUMBING INSULATION Delanco MVC

220700 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 22

SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials:

a. Flexible elastomeric.

b. Mineral fiber.

2. Insulating cements.

3. Adhesives.

4. Lagging adhesives.

5. Sealants.

6. Factory-applied jackets.

7. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.

8. Field-applied jackets.

9. Tapes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

1. ASJ: All Service Jacket

2. FSK: Foil Scrim Kraft

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and

jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation.

2. Detail application of field-applied jackets.

3. Detail application at linkages of control devices.

4. Detail field application for each equipment type.


220700 - 2


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-

response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,

by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label

insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with

appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and

equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop

Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-

applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after

installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have

satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.


220700 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be

applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

D. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell foam or expanded rubber tubular materials with both a

moisture seal and a reinforced elastic foam PSA lap seal closure system complying with ASTM

C 534, type 1, Grade 1.

1. Products: Subject compliance with requirements, provide from the following or

approved equal.

a. Armacell LLC

b. K-Flex USA

c. RBX Corporation


2. Acceptable Product: www.armacell.com Armacell LLC Model “Lap Seal”.

E. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.

c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.


F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply

with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket requirements

are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ Jacket

complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties

similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal

conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-

applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.

b. Johns Manville; Microlite.

c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.

d. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.


http://www.armacell.com/


220700 - 4

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,

Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

2.3 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with

insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F

4. Color: White.

5. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following.

a. Johns Manville; Zeston.

b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.

c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.


2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

3. Color: White

4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,

unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and

supply covers for lavatories.

5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.


220700 - 5

2.6 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,

complying with ASTM C 1136.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;


C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive.

Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other

conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and

specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required

for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.


220700 - 6

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of

strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.

Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to

maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar

to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:


220700 - 7

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Manholes.

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush

with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at

least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions and provide UL rated fire

rated sealing of the penetration.

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from

same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular

surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is

uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt

each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with

adhesive.


220700 - 8

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe

insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe

diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,

valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with

insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same



diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating

cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and

replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable

insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor

barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.

Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe

insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for

above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the

mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation

facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION."

Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,

and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the

connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing

sealant.

3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate

openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as

pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive

to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:


220700 - 9

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when

available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet

insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow

valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to

surface being insulated.

3.7 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten

bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple

longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation

material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.




adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections

of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation

materials with wire or bands.



220700 - 10


available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to

valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation.


3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks

and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the

finish bead along seam and joint edge.

3.9 FINISHES

A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material:

Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting

Sections.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket

material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of

insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-

applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of

inspection shall be limited to two location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the

"Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion

adequate to determine compliance.

2. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing

field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent

of inspection shall be limited to three locations of pipe/fitting of each type.


220700 - 11

B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements.

3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for

each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,

selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Underground piping.

2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.12 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water, Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water::

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.

b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

2. NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:



B. Storm water and Overflow, Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:



C. Service: Rainwater conductors and horizontal drains.

1. Insulation Material: Mineral fiberglass, with jacket.

2. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

3. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.

a. Pipe 2” to 4” – 1” thick.

b. Pipe 5” to 8” – 1½” thick.

c. Pipe 10” and up – 2” thick.

4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

5. Finish: None.


FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Delanco MVC

221113- 1

DPMC #T0548-00

DIVISION 22

SECTION 221113 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for

water service and fire-service mains.

B. Utility-furnished products include water meters and detector check valves that will be furnished

by NJ American Water, ready for installation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of

field assembly, and components, signed and sealed by a NJ Licensed Engineer.


D. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with requirements of New Jersey American Water (NJAW). Include tapping of

water mains and backflow prevention.

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping.


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.

3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.


221113- 2

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.

2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-

point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when

outdoor storage is necessary.

C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift.

Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or

rigging points.

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and

handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural

capacity of floor when storing inside.

F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.


A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only

after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements

indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than 2 days in advance of proposed interruption of service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Owner's written

permission.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with utility company as required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot

end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard

pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,

and steel bolts.


221113- 3

B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end

unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard

pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

2.2 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PE, ASTM Pipe: ASTM D 2239, SIDR No. 5.3, 7, or 9; with PE compound number required to

give pressure rating not less than 200 psig.

1. Insert Fittings for PE Pipe: ASTM D 2609, made of PA, PP, or PVC with serrated male

insert ends matching inside of pipe. Include bands or crimp rings.

2. Molded PE Fittings: ASTM D 3350, PE resin, socket- or butt-fusion type, made to match

PE pipe dimensions and class.

B. PE, AWWA Pipe: AWWA C906, DR No. 7.3, 9, or 9.3; with PE compound number required to

give pressure rating not less than 200 psig.

1. PE, AWWA Fittings: AWWA C906, socket- or butt-fusion type, with DR number

matching pipe and PE compound number required to give pressure rating not less than

200 psig.

2.3 GATE VALVES

A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:

1. Nonrising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with cast-iron or bronze

double-disc gate, bronze gate rings, bronze stem, and stem nut.

1) Standard: AWWA C500.

2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig.

3) End Connections: Mechanical joint.

4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.

2. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or

ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.



3) End Connections: Mechanical joint.


3. Nonrising-Stem, High-Pressure, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:


221113- 4

a. Description: Ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or ductile-iron gate,

resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.



3) End Connections: Push on or mechanical joint.


4. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with cast-iron double disc,

bronze disc and seat rings, and bronze stem.


2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig

3) End Connections: Flanged.

5. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with bronze or gray- or

ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, and bronze stem.




B. UL/FMG, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:

1. UL/FMG, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post, bronze seating

material, and inside screw.

1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved.



2. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Iron body and bonnet and bronze seating material.




C. Bronze Gate Valves:

1. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Bronze body and bonnet and bronze stem.



221113- 5


3) End Connections: Threaded.

2. Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Class 125, Type 1, bronze with solid wedge, threaded ends, and

malleable-iron handwheel.

1) Standard: MSS SP-80.

2.4 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies:

1. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.


b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve

with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and

type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.

c. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one

raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.

B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section,

adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering

"WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5

inches in diameter.

1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate

deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.

C. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench,

extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial/placement of

valve.

2.5 FIRE HYDRANTS

A. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants:

1. Description: Freestanding, with one NPS 4-1/2 and two NPS 2-1/2 outlets, 5-1/4-inch

main valve, drain valve, and NPS 6 mechanical-joint inlet. Include interior coating

according to AWWA C550. Hydrant shall have cast-iron body, compression-type valve

opening against pressure and closing with pressure.

a. Standard: AWWA C502.

b. Pressure Rating: 250 psig

c. Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire

department. Include cast-iron caps with steel chains.

d. Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon, 1-1/2 inches point to flat.


221113- 6

e. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valve by turning operating nut to left or

counterclockwise.

f. Exterior Finish: Yellow-gloss enamel paint, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping-system common

requirements.


A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated

in water main.

B. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

C. Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 645.

D. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 54” below grade.

E. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping

systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.

1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building-water-piping systems are

installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material.

Make connections to building-water-piping systems when those systems are installed.

F. Sleeves are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

G. Mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for

Plumbing."

H. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction.

Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.


A. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint

construction.

B. Make pipe joints according to the following:


221113- 7

1. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and

AWWA M41.

2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194.

3. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut-groove pipe. Assemble joints with grooved-

end, ductile-iron-piping couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling

manufacturer's written instructions.

4. PE Piping Insert-Fitting Joints: Use plastic insert fittings and fasteners according to

fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

5. PVC Piping Gasketed Joints: Use joining materials according to AWWA C900.

Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or

ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials,

with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common

Work Results for Plumbing" for joining piping of dissimilar metals.

3.5 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION

A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and

restrained-joint types that may be used include the following:

1. Concrete thrust blocks.

2. Locking mechanical joints.

3. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands.

4. Bolted flanged joints.

5. Heat-fused joints.

6. Pipe clamps and tie rods.

B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches.

Include anchorages for the following piping systems:

1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600.

2. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23.

3. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24.

C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed

ferrous anchorage devices.


A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each

underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

B. UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in

vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.

C. MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.


221113- 8

3.7 WATER METER INSTALLATION

A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to utility company's written instructions.

3.8 CONCRETE VAULT INSTALLATION

A. Install precast concrete vaults according to ASTM C 891.

3.9 FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION

A. General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor with

restrained joints or thrust blocks, and support in upright position.

B. Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants: Install with valve below frost line. Provide for drainage.

C. AWWA Fire Hydrants: Comply with AWWA M17.

D. UL/FMG Fire Hydrants: Comply with NFPA 24.


A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks

have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to

stabilize system. Use only potable water.

B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours.

1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold

at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and

hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints.

Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed

limits.

C. Prepare reports of testing activities.

3.11 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for non-

metallic underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over

piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3.12 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been

altered, extended, or repaired before use.


221113- 9

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if

method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in

NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty

water does not appear at points of outlet.

3. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if

method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in

AWWA C651 or do as follows:

a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50

ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.

b. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine

remains in water coming from system.

c. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.

B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.


DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Delanco MVC

221116 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 22

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and

specialties inside the building.

2. Specialty valves.

3. Flexible connectors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following products:

1. Dielectric fittings.

2. Piping, fittings, and solder

B. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

C. All grooved couplings, and fittings, valves and specialties shall be the products of a single

manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.




221116 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting

materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

5. Grooved End Fittings: Wrought copper ASME B16.22 or cast bronze ASME B16.18,

manufactured to copper-tubing sizes. (Flaring of tube or fitting ends to accommodate

alternate sized couplings is not permitted.) Basis of Design: Victaulic Copper-

Connection.

6. Grooved-Joint Couplings for Copper-Tubing: Copper-tube dimensions. Include ferrous

housing sections cast with offsetting, angle-pattern, bolt pads, EPDM-HP rubber gaskets

suitable for hot and cold water, and ASTM A449 electroplated steel bolts and nuts.

Installation-Ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly. Basis of Design:

Victaulic Style 607H.

a. Gaskets shall be UL classified in accordance with ANSI / NSF-61 for potable

water service.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or

ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type

unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-

duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

E. Grooved Joint Lubricants: Lubricate gaskets in accordance with the manufacturer’s published

installation instructions, using lubricant compatible with the gasket elastomer and fluid media.

Basis of Design: Victaulic Vic-Lube.


221116 - 3


A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping"

for general-duty metal valves.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for

drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.


A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined.

2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.

3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


following:

1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

2. Flexicraft Industries.

3. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.

4. Metraflex, Inc.


B. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel

wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used

in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Under-building-slab and underground domestic water service to the Road Test Field House

shall be:

1. PE, ASTM Pipe: ASTM D 2239, SIDR No. 5.3, 7, or 9; with PE compound number

required to give pressure rating not less than 160 psig.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping shall be the following:


221116 - 4

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed

joints.

E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L with wrought copper solder-joint fittings; and

soldered joints or grooved couplings, and fittings.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L with wrought copper solder-joint fittings; and

soldered joints.

2. PEXa. Refer to spec 221118.

3. Copper shall be used for domestic hot water piping where heat traced.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic

water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to

layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

Insulate with 1” thick closed cell foam, lay in a 6” bed of sand and cover with 6” of sand.

C. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

D. Install domestic water piping with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.

E. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants

unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

F. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

G. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and

coordinate with other services occupying that space.

H. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

I. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

J. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher

than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

K. Install piping free of sags and bends.

L. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

M. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and

specialty.


221116 - 5


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.


damaged.

D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"

"Brazed Joints" Chapter.

E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and

fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Ductile-Iron-Piping Grooved Joints: Cut groove end of pipe. Assemble coupling with housing,

gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join ductile-iron pipe and grooved-end fittings according to

AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe, cut-grooved joints. A factory-trained field representative

(direct employee) of the mechanical joint manufacture shall provide on-site training for

contractor's field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools and installation of grooved

piping products. The factory-trained representative shall periodically review the product

installation and ensure best practices are being followed. Contractor shall remove and replace

any improperly installed products.


A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves

for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or

equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures.

Use ball for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Install drain valves for equipment at base of

each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.

1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.

2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.

3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.


221116 - 6


A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping

and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44,

pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

F. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's

written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping.

D. Extend and connect domestic water piping to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing

fixture Sections for connection sizes.

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection.

3.8 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in

floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.


221116 - 7

B. Install cast-iron sleeve at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number

of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section 220553 for

identification materials and installation.

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having

jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or

inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound

and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate

report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and

unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or

concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating

pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test

source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute

defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until

satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


221116 - 8

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

3. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during

installation.

4. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

5. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.12 CLEANING

A. Cleaning and flushing of new piping shall be done by phase. Do not connect new pipe to active

piping systems until all flushing and cleaning has been done. Provide temporary pipe

connection and flushing pump.

B. Clean and disinfect potable and domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if

methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or

AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm

(50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200

ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from

system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE



1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Do not use gate valves.


221116 - 9

2. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.


PEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

221118 - 1

Delanco MVC

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 22

SECTION 221118 – PEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. PEX aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the

building.

2. Specialty valves.

B. Related Section:

1. Division 22 Section 221116 Domestic Water Piping

2. Division 2 Section for water-service piping outside the building from source to the point

where water-service piping enters the building.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product submittal data and installation instructions.

1. Tubing and fittings

2. Hanger spacing

3. Dielectric fittings.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide installation drawings indicating tubing layout, manifold locations (if

indicated to be used on the construction drawings), plumbing fixtures supported and schedules

with details required for installation of the system.

C. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples of tubing.

D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Test Reports: Upon request, submit test reports from recognized testing laboratories.

2. Certificates: Submit the following:

a. Manufacturer’s certificate that products comply with specified requirements.

b. Certificate indicating that the installer is authorized to install the manufacturer’s

products.


221118 - 2

Delanco MVC

E. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Warranty documents specified herein

2. Operation and maintenance data


A. Installer Qualifications: Use an installer with demonstrated experience on projects of similar

size and complexity and possessing documentation proving successful completion of PEX

plumbing installation training by the PEX tubing manufacturer.

B. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals: Provide domestic potable system that complies with

requirements of the following:

1. International Code Conference (ICC) – International Plumbing Code (IPC). ICC

Evaluation Service (ES) Evaluation Report No. ESR 1099

2. National Standard Plumbing Code (NSPC)

3. HUD Material Release No. 1269

C. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

D. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

E. Certifications: Provide letters of certification as follows:

1. Installer is trained by the PEX tubing manufacturer to install the PEX potable water

distribution system.

2. Installer will use skilled workers holding a trade qualification license or equivalent, or

apprentices under the supervision of a licensed trades professional.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid

construction delays.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with

identification labels intact.

C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental

conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

1. Store PEX tubing in cartons or under cover to avoid dirt or foreign material from being

introduced into the tubing.

2. Do not expose PEX tubing to direct sunlight for more than 30 days. If construction delays

are encountered, provide cover to portions of tubing exposed to direct sunlight.


221118 - 3

Delanco MVC

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN - Hot and Cold Potable Water Distribution Tubing

A. The basis of design is a PEX-a tubing system that has fittings with the same internal diameter as

the tubing. Fittings that have a smaller internal diameter shall not be used.

B. Manufacturer:

1. Uponor: Contact: 5925 148th Street West, Apple Valley, MN 55124; Toll free (800)

321-4739, (952) 891-2000; Fax: (952) 891-2008; website: www.uponor-usa.com

2. Rehau

3. HeatLink


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Tubing

1. Material: Crosslinked polyethylene (PEX) manufactured by PEX-a or Engel method.

2. Type: Uponor/Wirsbo AQUAPEX

3. Material Standard: Manufactured in accordance with ASTM F876 and ASTM F877 and

tested for compliance by an independent third party agency

4. Standard grade hydrostatic design and pressure ratings from PPI

5. Fire-rated assembly listings in accordance with ANSI/UL 263

a. UL Design No. L557 — 1-hour wood frame floor/ceiling assemblies

b. UL Design No. K913 — 2-hour concrete floor/ceiling assemblies

c. UL Design No. U372 — 1-hour wood stud/gypsum wallboard wall assemblies

d. UL Design No. V444 — 1-hour steel stud/gypsum wallboard wall assemblies

6. Minimum Bend Radius (cold bending): No less than six times the outside diameter. Use a

bend support as supplied by the PEX tubing manufacturer for tubing with a bend radius

less than stated.

7. Nominal Inside Diameter: Provide tubing with nominal inside diameter, in accordance

with ASTM F876 as indicated.

a. ⅜ inch [9.53mm]

b. ½ inch [12.7mm]

c. ¾ inch [19.05mm]

d. 1 inch [25.4mm]

e. 1¼ inch [31.75mm]

f. 1½ inch [38.1mm]

g. 2 inch [50.8mm]

h. 3 inch [ ]

B. Fittings

1. Same internal diameter as the tubing.

2. Material: Fitting assembly is manufactured from material listed in paragraph 5.1 of

ASTM F1960.

3. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM F1960.

4. Type: PEX-a cold expansion fitting.

http://www.uponor-usa.com/


221118 - 4

Delanco MVC

a. Assembly consists of the appropriate ProPEX insert with a corresponding ProPEX

Ring.

C. Manifolds

1. Material

a. Type L copper body with UNS 3600 series brass ProPEX outlet connections

b. Engineered Plastic (EP) body with ProPEX outlet connections

2. Manifold Type

a. Uponor ProPEX 1" Copper Manifold

b. Uponor engineered plastic (EP) Manifold

3. All manifolds manufactured with the appropriate-sized ProPEX fittings on the manifold

supply inlets.

D. Accessories

1. Angle stops and straight stops that are compatible with PEX tubing may supplied by the

PEX tubing manufacturer.

2. Bend supports designed for maintaining tight radius bends are supplied by the PEX

tubing manufacturer.

3. ProPEX expander tool to install the ASTM F1960 compatible fittings shall be supplied

by the PEX tubing manufacturer.

4. The tubing manufacturer shall provide clips and/or PEX rails for supporting tubing runs.

5. All horizontal tubing hangers and riser clamps shall be epoxy-coated material.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements

1. Standard grade hydrostatic pressure ratings from Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI) in

accordance with TR-3 as listed in TR-4. The following three standard-grade hydrostatic

ratings are required.

a. 200°F (93°C) at 80 psi (551 kPa)

b. 180°F (82°C) at 100 psi (689 kPa)

c. 73.4°F (23°C) at 160 psi (1,102 kPa)

2. Certification of flame spread/smoke development rating of 25/50 in accordance with

ASTM E84 provided the installation meets one of the following requirements.

a. Tubing spacing is a minimum of 18 inches apart for the following sizes.

1) ⅜ inch [9.53mm]

2) ½ inch [12.7mm]

3) ⅝ inch [15.88mm]

4) ¾ inch [19.05mm]

b. Tubing is wrapped with ½” fiberglass insulation with a flame spread of not more

than 20 and a smoke-developed rating of not more than 30 and a nominal density

of 4.0 to 4.5 pcf. Tubing can run with three tubes separated by zero inches and then

18 inches between the next group of three tubes for the following sizes.

1) ⅜ inch [9.53mm]

2) ½ inch [12.7mm]

3) ⅝ inch [15.88mm]

4) ¾ inch [19.05mm]


221118 - 5

Delanco MVC

5) 1 inch [25.4mm]

6) 1¼ inch [31.75mm]

7) 1½ inch [38.1mm]

8) 2 inch [50.8mm]

B. Performance Requirements: To provide a PEX tubing hot and cold potable water distribution

system, which is manufactured, fabricated and installed to comply with regulatory agencies and

to maintain performance criteria stated by the PEX tubing manufacturer without defects,

damage or failure.

1. Comply with ANSI/NSF Standard 14.

2. Comply with ANSI/NSF Standard 61.

3. Show compliance with ASTM F877.

4. Show compliance with ASTM E119 and ANSI/UL 263 through certification listings with

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

a. UL Design No. L557 — 1 hour wood frame floor/ceiling assemblies

b. UL Design No. K913 — 2 hour concrete floor/ceiling assemblies

c. UL Design No. U372 — 1 hour wood stud/gypsum wallboard wall assemblies

d. UL Design No. V444 — 1 hour steel stud/gypsum wallboard wall assemblies

2.4 WARRANTY

A. Provide a limited warranty for 25 years for Uponor/Wirsbo AQUAPEX® tubing and Wirsbo

hePEX™ tubing and ProPEX® Fittings when installed by an Uponor-trained contractor and

certified plumbing professional.

2.5 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Flexible pipe loops shall be provided to allow for pipe expansion in the hot water and hot water

recirculation piping.

2.6 PLENUM CEILING SPACES

A. Plenum ceilings are being used on this project. The pipe shall be field insulated, and when

tested with standard un-insulated fittings per CAN/ULC-S102.2-03 or ASTM E84, the system

consisting of wrapped or coated pipe and bare fittings shall have a Flame Spread Classification

of less than 25 and Smoke Development rating of less than 50.

2.7 VALVES

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping"

for general-duty metal valves.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for

drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.


221118 - 6

Delanco MVC



1. Same size as pipes to be joined.

2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.

3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic

water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to

layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,

inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in

Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and

Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.

C. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

D. Install domestic water piping with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.

E. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants

unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

F. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

G. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and

coordinate with other services occupying that space.

H. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

I. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

J. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher

than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

K. Install piping free of sags and bends.

L. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

M. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and

specialty.


221118 - 7

Delanco MVC

N. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements in

Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.

O. Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, installation

instructions, design drawings and the Uponor Professional Plumbing Installation Guide.

P. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of the PEX potable water system. Do

not proceed with installation of the PEX potable water system until unacceptable conditions are

corrected.

3.2 PEX TUBING INSTALLATION

A. Install PEX tubing in accordance with the tubing manufacturer's recommendations and as

indicated in the installation handbook.

B. Do not install PEX tubing within 6 inches [152 mm] of gas appliance vents or within 12 inches

[305 mm] of any recessed light fixtures.

C. Do not solder within 18 inches [457 mm] of PEX tubing in the same waterline. Make sweat

connections prior to making PEX connections.

D. Do not expose PEX tubing to direct sunlight for more than 30 days.

E. Ensure no glues, solvents, sealants or chemicals come in contact with the tubing without prior

permission from the tubing manufacturer.

F. Use grommets or sleeves at the penetration for PEX tubing passing through metal studs.

G. Protect PEX tubing with sleeves where abrasion may occur.

H. Use strike protectors where PEX tubing penetrates a stud or joist and has the potential for being

struck with a screw or nail.

I. Use tubing manufacturer-supplied bend supports where bends are less than six times the outside

tubing diameter.

J. Minimum horizontal supports are installed not less than 32 inches between hangers in

accordance with model plumbing codes and the installation handbook.

K. PEX riser installations require epoxy-coated riser clamps installed at the base of the ceiling per

floor.

L. A mid-story support is required for riser applications.

M. Pressurize PEX tubing with air in accordance with applicable codes or in the absence of

applicable codes to a pressure of 25 psi (173 kPa) above normal working pressure of the system.

N. Comply with safety precautions when pressure testing, including use of compressed air, where

applicable. Do not use water to pressurize the system if ambient air temperature has the

possibility of dropping below 32°F (0°C).


221118 - 8

Delanco MVC

O. Ensure compliance of one- and two-hour rated through penetration assemblies in accordance

with ASTM E814.


A. Perform pressure testing for all tubing.

B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Provide manufacturer’s field service consisting of product use

recommendations and one visit for inspection of product installation in accordance with manu-

facturer’s instructions.


A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves

for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or

equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures.

Use ball for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Install drain valves for equipment at base of

each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.

1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping

and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation. Follow PEX

manufacturer’s recommendations for support spacing.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Install hangers for PEX tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 1” and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1-1/4 to 3” 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

Note: Hanger spacing can be increased to 8 ft when using Uponor “U” shaped metallic support

channel.

D. Install supports for vertical PEX tubing every 10 feet.

E. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's

written instructions.


221118 - 9

Delanco MVC

3.6 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in

floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section 220553 for

identification materials and installation.



B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having

jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to


3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or

inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound

and that piping is full of water.


altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate

report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and

unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or

concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating

pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test

source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute

defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until


6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


221118 - 10

Delanco MVC

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Cleaning and flushing of new piping shall be done by phase. Do not connect new pipe to active

piping systems until all flushing and cleaning has been done. Provide temporary pipe

connection and flushing pump.

B. Clean and disinfect potable and domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if

methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or

AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm

(50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200

ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from

system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used

in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building service piping, NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of

the following:

1. Type K Copper

C. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping shall be the following:

1. Cross-linked polyethylene (PEX-a) tubing with 1” thick closed cell foam insulation

D. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller shall be:

1. Cross-linked polyethylene (PEX-a) tubing

2. Copper. Refer to 221116


221118 - 11

Delanco MVC

3. Domestic hot water piping, where heat traced shall be copper type L.

3.11 VALVE SCHEDULE



1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Do not use gate valves.

2. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.


DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

221119 - 1

Delanco MVC

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 22

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Backflow preventers.

2. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves.

3. Strainers.

4. Wall hydrants.

5. Drain valves.

6. Water hammer arresters.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise

indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




intended use.


221119 - 2

Delanco MVC

B. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic

domestic water piping components.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1

through 9."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Ames Co.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.


2. Standard: ASSE 1015.

3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Size same a pipe size where installed.

5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow.

8. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller;

outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-

1/2 and larger.

b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

B. Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers


following:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

b. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.


d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.



3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.

4. Size

5. Body: Bronze with union inlet.


221119 - 3

Delanco MVC

2.2 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:


following:

3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a

comparable product by one of the following:

a. Armstrong International, Inc.

b. Cash Acme.

c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

d. Honeywell Water Controls.

e. Legend Valve.

f. Leonard Valve Company.

g. Powers; a Watts Industries Co.

h. Symmons Industries, Inc.

i. Taco, Inc.

j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

k. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

l. Or approved equal.


5. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).

6. Type: Thermostatically controlled water mixing valve.

7. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

8. Connections: Threaded[ union] inlets and outlet.

9. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-

control handle.

10. Tempered-Water Setting: 105F

11. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: .5 gpm per LAV, refer to plumbing fixture

schedule.

12. Valve Finish: Rough bronze

B. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves <Insert drawing designation if any>:



the following:


following:

a. Cash Acme.


c. Honeywell Water Controls.

d. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.

e. Leonard Valve Company.

f. Powers; a Watts Industries Co.

g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

i. Or approved equal.


221119 - 4

Delanco MVC

3. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled water tempering valve.

4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

6. Temperature Control: Adjustable.

7. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.

8. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.

9. Tempered-Water Setting: 105 F

10. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: .5 gpm per LAV, refer to plumbing fixture

schedule.

2.3 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants



the following:


following:

a. Josam Company.

b. MIFAB, Inc.

c. Prier Products, Inc.

d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

g. Woodford Manufacturing Company.

h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

j. Or approved equal.

3. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for self-draining wall hydrants.

4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).

5. Operation: Loose key.

6. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp.

7. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1 (DN 20 or DN 25).

8. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.

9. Box: Deep, flush mounting with cover.

10. Box and Cover Finish: refer to drawings

11. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.

12. Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.

2.4 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves


221119 - 5

Delanco MVC



the following:


following:

a. MIFAB, Inc.

b. PPP Inc.

c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.

d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.




4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum.

5. Body: Bronze.

6. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint.

7. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint.

8. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not

chrome finished.

B. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves



the following:


following:

a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

b. Wade

c. Tyler

d. MIFAB


3. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum, trap makeup

connection.

4. Size: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum.

5. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, metal-bellows type with pressurized

metal cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A

through F.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Josam Co.

b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Specification Drainage Operation.



221119 - 6

Delanco MVC

B. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with replaceable seat disc complying with ASME A112.18.1M for

compression-type faucets. Include NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet, of design

suitable for pressure of at least 125 psig; integral, nonremovable, drainable hose-connection

vacuum breaker; and garden-hose threads complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet.

1. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.

2. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.

3. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.

4. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.

5. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle.

6. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.

7. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.

8. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

C. Fixture Supply Valves: Supply kits shall include chrome plated brass stops with full turn brass

stem, (no plastic) chrome plated copper risers and shallow bell brass flange. Inlet shall be ½

inch. Outlet shall be 3/8 inch. Supply kit shall be as manufactured by McGuire. Supply kit

shall be certified by CSA or other recognized testing authority and bear manufacturer and

testing mark. Stop to be certified to 200 psi line pressure.

D. P-Traps: P-Traps shall be chrome plated cast brass body with cleanout, with 17 gauge seamless

tubular wall bend, cast brass slip nuts. (No reducing washers), with shallow bell brass flange.

P-Traps shall be equivalent to McGuire Premier Line. Traps shall be certified by CSA or other

recognized testing authority and shall bear manufacturer and testing mark.

E. Sink Insulation Kits: Seamless Pre-wrapped all cast brass ground joint swivel P-Trap kit

furnished with McGuire cast brass ground joint swivel P-trap with cleanout, seamless supply

riser tube covers, supply angle stop covers and angle stop wheel handle covers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining

materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to

other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with

authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe

diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or

under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

C. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets

and with shutoff valve on outlet.


221119 - 7

Delanco MVC

1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.

2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

D. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

E. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a

minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for

proper flow.

F. Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down

toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.

G. Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of

1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping and specialties.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or

sign on or near each of the following:

1. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies.

2. Dual-check-valve backflow preventers.

3. Manifold, thermostatic, water-mixing-valve assemblies.

4. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.

5. Trap-seal primer systems.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety

and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to

identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Test each double-check backflow-prevention assembly and double-check, detector-

assembly backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's

reference standard.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified

above.


221119 - 8

Delanco MVC

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.


FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS Delanco MVC

221313-1

SECTION 221313 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes gravity-flow, nonpressure and force main, pressure sanitary sewerage

outside the building, with the following components:

1. Gravity and pressure piping.

2. Cleanouts.

3. Precast concrete manholes.


A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 46 PSI.

B. Force-Main, Pressure-Piping Pressure Rating: At least equal to system operating pressure but

not less than 100 psig.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For manholes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and

covers.

B. Material cut-sheets for pipe, fittings, and cleanouts.

C. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Provide materials and products in accordance with Delanco Sewerage Authority details and

minimum requirements.

2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Gravity PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, with bell-

and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pressure pipe shall be schedule 80 PVC or SDR 26.


221313-2

2.3 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for

joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and

corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Sleeve Materials:

1. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.

2. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe

materials being joined.

C. Shielded, Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length,

corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening

mechanism on each end.

D. Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell

of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.


a. Fernco Inc.

b. Logan Clay Products Company (The).

c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

d. Delanco Sewerage Authority approved equivalent.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and

round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot

connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.


a. Josam Company.

b. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc.

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe.

e. Watts Industries, Inc.

f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div.

g. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

h. Delanco Sewerage Authority approved equivalent.

2. Top-Loading Classification: Heavy duty.

3. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe

and fittings.


221313-3

2.5 MANHOLES

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced

concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

1. Diameter: 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section,

as required to prevent flotation.

3. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (100-mm)

minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base

section with integral floor.

4. Riser Sections: 5-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness, and of length to provide depth

indicated.

5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is

indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.

6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber.

7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole

walls, for each pipe connection.

8. Steps: <Aluminum Alloy Federal Specification QQ-A-200/8 with drop step design>,

wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral

slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12 inch (300-mm) intervals.

Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 48 inches

(1200 mm).

9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter

matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

10. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-mm) total thickness,

to match diameter of manhole frame and cover.

11. Manhole Frames and Covers: To be heavy duty, conforming to A.S.T.M. latest A-48

class 30-B Ferrous; 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 8-inch ( 203-mm) riser with 3-1/2-inch-

(89-mm-) minimum width flange and 25-3/4-inch- (654-mm-) diameter cover. Include

indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to

"DELANCO SEWERAGE AUTHORITY SANITARY SEWER."

2.6 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.

2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.

3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.

4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: NJDOT Class B, minimum..

1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.

2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa), deformed steel.


221313-4

C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement

design mix, NJDOT Class B. Include channels and benches in manholes.

1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of

vertical sides to eight-tens of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform

radius and slope.

2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.

D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, NJDOT Class B.

1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.

2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa), deformed steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and

arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping

layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.

Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken

continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,

and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements,

and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch

connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes

and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slopes indicated.

2. Install piping with 48-inch (1220-mm) minimum cover.

3. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.

F. Install force-main, pressure piping according to the following:

1. Install piping 48-inch minimum cover.

2. Install PVC pressure piping according AWWA M23 or ASTM D 2774 and

ASTM F 1668.


221313-5

G. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.

Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of

incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.2 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-

gasket joints.

2. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type, flexible couplings.

B. Join force-main, pressure piping according to the following:

1. Join PVC pressure piping according AWWA M23 for gasketed joints.

2. Join dissimilar pipe materials with pressure-type couplings.

3.3 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.

D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.

Set tops 3 inches (76 mm) above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil

pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions

to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.

1. Use heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.

1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove

section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye

fitting, plus 6-inch (150-mm) overlap, with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete

with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).


221313-6

3.6 CLOSING ABANDONED SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS

A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in

place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may

result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:

1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch thick, concrete or masonry bulkheads.

B. Abandoned Structures: Excavate around structure as required and use either procedure below:

1. Remove structure and close open ends of remaining piping.

2. Remove top of structure down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Provide holes on

bottom of structure to promote drainage. Fill with stone, sand, or structural fill.

C. Backfill to grade according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.

Inspect after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion

of Project.

1. Submit separate report for each system inspection.

2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.

b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or

cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.

c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.

d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.

e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are

within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or

repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.

2. Test completed piping systems according to Delanco Sewerage Authority requirements.

3. Schedule tests and inspections by Delanco Sewerage Authority with at least 48 hours'

advance notice.

4. Submit separate report for each test.

5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to Delanco Sewerage Authority

requirements and the following:


221313-7

a. Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal./inch of nominal pipe size per mile of

pipe, during 24-hour period.

b. Close openings in system and fill with water.

c. Purge air and refill with water.

d. Disconnect water supply.

e. Test and inspect joints for leaks.

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within

allowances specified.


SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Delanco MVC

221316 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 22

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Special pipe fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

D. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working

pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable

of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum

Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures" and the International Building Code.


221316 - 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, hangers, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.



B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic

piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping;

"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and

"NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

C. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall be marked with collective trademark of the cast iron soil

pipe institute.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS





materials.

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service Weight class.

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber and the ASTM C1563.

C. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron

Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and be listed by NSF International.

Manufacturers:

1) Charlotte Pipe and Foundry

2) AB&I Foundry

3) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.



221316 - 3

2.4 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant

fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: : ASTM C 1277 and the CISPI 310, with

stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and

ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

2. Heavy-Duty, ASTM C1540 Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel

shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

Manufacturers:

1) ANACO.

2) Husky

3) Charlotte Pipe and Foundry

4) Mission Rubber Co.

5) Tyler Pipe.


C. All couplings for hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall conform to CISPI 310 and be

certified by NSF International.


A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste,

and vent patterns.

B. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:

1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated


C. Piping shall be UL listed for use in plenum ceilings.

2.6 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS

A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type,

reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and

corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

1. Sleeve Materials:

a. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.

b. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.

c. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe

materials being joined.


221316 - 4

B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-

length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and

tightening mechanism on each end.

C. Rigid, Unshielded, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type reducing- or

transition-type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-

resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

D. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at

least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.

1. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard

2. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.

3. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

E. Manufacturers:

a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.

b. Fernco, Inc.

c. Logan Clay Products Company (The).

d. Mission Rubber Co.

e. NDS, Inc.

f. Plastic Oddities, Inc.

g. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

h. Mission Rubber Co.

i. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div.

j. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc.

k. Or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION



A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, vent, soil and waste piping (except in return air plenums and where exposed)

shall be any of the following.

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings and sovent stack fittings couplings; and hubless-

coupling joints.

3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, Shielded, Rigid, unshielded, nonpressure

pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.


221316 - 5

C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; with gasketed joints.

2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and

hubless-coupling joints.

3. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, Shielded, Rigid, unshielded, nonpressure

pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.


A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work

Results for Plumbing."

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building

sanitary sewers.

C. Install underground, ductile-iron, special pipe fittings according to AWWA C600.

D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe

penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to

make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22

Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

E. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make

installation watertight.

F. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"

Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

G. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate

branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used

on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,

double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side

with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not

change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and

reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction

of flow is prohibited.

H. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to

grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping

upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of

lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past

each joint as completed.

I. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless

otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and

smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.


221316 - 6

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

J. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab

is without membrane waterproofing.

K. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.

L. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

M. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by



A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common

Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

C. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.

D. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.

E. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.


A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls

for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:



c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.



4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping

and Equipment."

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.


221316 - 7

E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum

rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)

rod.

2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.

3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)

rod.


5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm)

rod.

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

H. Install hangers for PVC and PE piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and



rod.


3. NPS 4 and 5 (DN 100 and 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.



rod.

I. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).

J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than

required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,

and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2

(DN 65) and larger.


221316 - 8


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to


B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction

or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:


altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report

for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent

piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed

before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside

leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with

water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15

minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop.

Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps

filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-

stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into

piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer

inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain

constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect

plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until


6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris

and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.


221316 - 9

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-

based latex paint.


FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING Delanco MVC

221413 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 22

SECTION 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Special pipe fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

D. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working-

pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.


221413 - 2



B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic

piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-

sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

C. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall be marked with collective trademark of the cast iron soil

pipe institute.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



materials.

2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be

marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and be listed

by NSF International.

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber and the ASTM D 1563.

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.3 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall be marked

with collective trademark of the cast iron soil pipe institute.

B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant

fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

1. Heavy-Duty, ASTM C 1540 Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel

shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

2. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310, with

stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and

ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

a. Manufacturers:

1) ANACO.

2) Husky

3) Mission Rubber Co.

4) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.



221413 - 3

C. All couplings for hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall conform to CISPI 310 and be

certified by NSF International.


A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. (No Cellular Core Allowed)

B. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:

1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated


2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION



A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground storm drainage piping shall be any one of the following:


2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and

coupled joints.

3. Solid Core PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

C. Underground storm drainage piping shall be one of the following:


2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and

coupled joints.

3. Solid Core PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.


A. Storm sewer and drainage piping outside the building are specified in Division 33 Section

"Storm Utility Drainage Piping."

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm

sewers.

C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe

penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to


221413 - 4

make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22

Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

D. Install wall-penetration fitting system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.

Make installation watertight.

E. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"

Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

F. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and

long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of

standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of

drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

G. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to

grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping

upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of

lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past

each joint as completed.

H. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3

(DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4

(DN 100) and larger.

2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

I. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab

is without membrane waterproofing.

J. Install PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665.

K. Install underground PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

L. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by



A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common

Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron

Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

C. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Calked Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.

D. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast

Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.


221413 - 5

E. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.


A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:



c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.



4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping

and Equipment."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum

rods.

E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and



rod.



rod.



rod.

6. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for fittings

is limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).

F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

G. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:


rod.



rod.



rod.


221413 - 6

H. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).

I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting

to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.

D. Connect force-main piping to the following:

1. Storm Sewer: To exterior force main or storm manhole.

2. Sump Pumps: To sump pump discharge.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to


B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in

absence of published procedures, as follows:


altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report

for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage

piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed

before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. Close

openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-

foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of

inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until


5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.


221413 - 7

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris

and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.


FUEL GAS PIPING Delanco MVC

226313 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 22

SECTION 226313 - FUEL GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fuel gas piping, specialties, and accessories within the building.

1.3 GAS SERVICE

A. A new service shall be extended to the Agency Services Building. On the discharge side of the

meter a branch pipe shall be extended, underground, to the new Road Test Field House.

Provide an isolation valve in the tap of the main pipe.

B. This contractor shall coordinate the new service with:

James Nickson

PSEG Construction- Industrial & Commercial

1800-832-0076 option 4 ext 3602

[email protected]


A. Gas System Pressures: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is 2.0 psig, and is reduced to

secondary pressure of 0.5 psig or less.

B. Design values of fuel gas supplied for these systems are as follows:

Natural Gas

1. Nominal Heating Value: 1000 Btu/cu. Ft.

2. Nominal Specific Gravity: 0.6.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



226313 - 2

1. Specialty valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection

data of selected models.

2. Pressure regulators. Include pressure rating, capacity, and settings of selected models.

B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance

requirements.

C. Maintenance Data: For natural gas specialties and accessories to include in maintenance

manuals specified in Division 1.


A. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "National Fuel Gas Code."

B. UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL's "Gas and Oil Equipment Directory" if

specified to be UL listed.

C. NFPA 54 – National Fuel Gas Code, for gas piping materials and components, gas piping

installations, and inspection, testing, and purging of gas piping systems.

D. International Mechanical Code and International Fuel Gas Code.


A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquids from drips in existing gas

piping. Handle cautiously to avoid spillage and ignition. Notify fuel gas supplier. Handle

flammable liquids used by Installer with proper precautions and do not leave on premises from

end of one day to beginning of next day.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others

unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide

temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:


226313 - 3

1. Polyethylene Type II, Grade 3 PE 2306, ASTM D1248 and D2513:

a. Central Plastics.

b. Oil Creek Plastics.

c. Charter Plastics.


2. Appliance Connector Valves:

a. American Valve.

b. Brass Craft Manufacturing Co.

c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.

d. Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div.



3. Gas Valves

a. Crane Valves.

b. Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div.

c. Nibco, Inc.

d. Red-White Valve Corp.



4. Line Pressure Regulators:

a. American Meter Co.

b. Fisher Controls International, Inc.

c. Maxitrol Co.

d. National Meter.




materials.

2.3 UNDERGROUND PLASTIC GAS PIPE

A. General:

1. All polyethylene pipe, tube and fittings furnished under this specification shall conform

to all applicable provisions and requirements of the latest revision of the US Department

of Transportation Pipeline Safety Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Part 192, “Transportation

of Natural or other gases by pipeline:

2. Minimum Federal Safety Standards, and, by inclusion, all appropriate standards

referenced therein.

B. Materials:

1. Polyethylene compounds utilized in the manufacture of products furnished under this

specification shall have a grade of PE24 or PE34, and minimum cell classification of

PE213363 or PE334464, as defined in ASTM D3350.

2. In conformance with ASTM D2513, they shall have a PPI recommended hydrostatic

design basis (HDB) of 1250 psi (PE2406) or 1600 psi (PE3408) at a temperature of

73.4°F (23°C).


226313 - 4

3. In addition, this HDB shall be substantiated by showing that extrapolation of the stress

regression curve is linear to the 438,000 hour intercept in accordance with ASTM D2837.

C. Pipe and Tubing:

1. Pipe and Tubing furnished under this specification shall be manufactured using

compounds complying with the requirements of Section II, above, and all appropriate

requirements of Part 192 of the Minimum Federal Safety Standards.

2. Dimensional characteristics (including outside diameter, wall thickness, toe-in, ovality

and length) and performance characteristics (including chemical resistance, sustained

pressure, elevated temperature service, burst pressure/apparent tensile strength, joining,

squeeze-off and outdoor storage stability) shall conform to the requirements of ASTM

D2513 including applicable annexes.

3. Pipe and tubing may be supplied in either coils or straight lengths.

D. Fittings:

1. Polyethylene fittings furnished under this specification shall be manufactured using

compounds complying with the requirements of Section II, above and all appropriate

requirements of Part 192 of the Minimum Federal Safety Standards.

2. Socket type fittings shall comply with ASTM D2683.

3. Butt fusion fittings shall comply with ASTM D3261.

4. Electro fusion fittings shall comply with ASTM F1055.

5. Plastic mechanical fittings shall comply with ASTM F1924.

6. Mechanical fittings produced from metallic or materials other than plastics listed in

Section II shall be approved only after submission of appropriate test data and service

histories indicating their acceptability for the intended service.

7. In addition, all mechanical fittings shall be categorized for pull out resistance as stated in

ASTM D2513 and identified as to the appropriate category.

8. Plastic valves shall meet the requirements of ANSI standard B16.40.

9. In all cases, the specifications and requirements for the fittings supplied shall comply

with the appropriate sections of Part 192 of the Minimum Federal Safety Standards or

NFPA 58 LP Gas Code.

E. Marking:

1. Pipe and Tubing shall be marked in accordance with ASTM D2513.

2. Marking shall be legible and remain legible under normal handling and installation

practices.

3. Indent marking may be utilized provided (1) the marking does not reduce the wall

thickness to less than the minimum value for the pipe or tubing, (2) it has been

demonstrated that these marks have no effect on the long term strength of the pipe or

tubing and (3) the marking will not provide leakage channels when approved elastomeric

gasket compression fittings are used to make joints.

4. Fusion fittings shall be marked on the body or hub.

5. Marking shall be in accordance with ASTM D2513 or the standard to which the fitting is

manufactured.

6. Mechanical fittings shall be marked in accordance with the fitting standard to which it is

manufactured or Part 192 of the Minimum Federal Safety Standard Section 192.63.

F. Workmanship:


226313 - 5

1. Pipe, tubing and fittings shall be homogenous throughout and free of visible cracks,

holes, foreign inclusions, blisters, dents, or other injurious defects.

2. The pipe, tubing, and fittings shall be as uniform as commercially practicable in color,

opacity, density, and other physical properties.

G. Quality Control:

1. Quality Control shall be in accordance with the requirements given in ASTM D2513

including applicable annexes.

H. Fusion Qualification:

1. The manufacturer of pipe, tubing, or fittings supplied under this specification shall

establish and certify heat fusion procedures for the joining of the materials supplied in

accordance with the applicable section of (CFR) Title 49, Part 192 “Transportation of

Natural or Other Gases by Pipeline:

2. Minimum Federal Safety Standards” paragraph 192.283.

3. Qualified fusion procedures, with appropriate supporting data, shall be furnished to the

purchaser upon request.

4. Suitable generic fusion procedures are included in PPI TR-33, Generic Butt Fusion

Joining Procedure for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pipe.

I. Below ground:

1. Underground pipe shall be high quality polyethylene Type II, Grade 3, PE2306, ASTM

D1248.

2. The color shall be orange.

3. All fittings and connectors shall be joined by heat socket fusion.

4. Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions.

5. Lay pipe in trench minimum of 24” below grade on 6” bed of sand or pea gravel.

Backfill with sand or pea travel.

6. Provide plastic warning tape 12” above pipe.

7. When rising out of the ground, use plastic steel transition pieces as manufactured by

Central Plastics, Dura-line, or Gastite or approved equal.

2.4 PIPES, TUBES, FITTINGS, AND JOINING MATERIALS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type E or S; Grade B; Schedule 40; black.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with

threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

2. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

3. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

4. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel.

5. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to

ASME B1.20.1.

6. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.


8. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.


226313 - 6

2.5 PROTECTIVE COATING

A. Scotchrap Pipe Primer: Quick drying, non-sag rubber base primer that permeates pits and

irregularities on the metal and prepares the surface for tape application.

B. Scotchrap Tape: Black in color, 20 mils thick, ASTM-D-1000 all weather corrosion protection

tape.

2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy.

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug connector.


A. Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.

B. Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.

C. Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and IAS listed.

D. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head,

ball type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel

disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2-psig minimum pressure rating.

E. Gas Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and IAS-listed bronze body and 125-psig

pressure rating.

2.8 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. Description: Single stage and suitable for fuel gas service. Include steel jacket and corrosion-

resistant components, elevation compensator, and atmospheric vent.

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.

2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and

according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

3. Line Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80 with 10-psig inlet pressure rating, unless

otherwise indicated.

4. Appliance Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18. Regulator may include vent limiting

device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory or field-installed, corrosion-resistant screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping.

C. Maxitrol Series 325 with 12A09 or 12A39 automatic vent limiting devices shall be used when

the total load for a regulator is less that 580 MBH and a separate vent is not desired.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


226313 - 7

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel gas to premises or section of piping.

Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all

equipment is turned off in affected piping section.

B. Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "Prevention of Accidental Ignition" Paragraph.


A. Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than

system pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fuel Gas Piping, 0.5 to 5 psig: Use the following:

1. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: NPS 3/4 steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded

joints or Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing

2. NPS 3/4 to NPS 2: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints or

Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing.

3. Larger Than NPS 2: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.

C. Underground Fuel Gas Piping: Polyethylene plastic with heat fusion joints and fittings. For

potion of steel pipe partially below grade the pipe shall be protected with Scotchrap Pipe Primer

and Scotchrap Tape.

D. Transitions from steel to plastic shall be done with a prefabricated sleeve and transition fitting

as manufactured by Elster or approved equal.

1. http://www.elster-perfection.com/assets/downloads/GasRisersTransFittings_Singles.pdf


A. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 to 5 psig: Gas stop or gas valve.

B. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve.

C. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve or general-duty valve.

3.4 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. Provide pressure regulators at each appliance or group of appliances to reduce the pressure from

building distribution pressure to 7 in w.c. or as specifically required by the installation

instruction for each particular appliance.

B. Run the vent for the regulators to the outside per the requirements of NFPA 54.



installation requirements.

http://www.elster-perfection.com/assets/downloads/GasRisersTransFittings_Singles.pdf


226313 - 8

B. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit

constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to

outside and terminate with screened vent cap.

1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to

approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as

plenums. Do not locate valves above ceilings.

2. In Floors: Do not embed piping in or below concrete slabs.

3. In Floor Channels: Gas piping may be installed in floor channels, subject to approval of

authorities having jurisdiction. Channels must have cover and be open to space above

cover for ventilation.

4. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from

physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls.

a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls.

5. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in "Protective

Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in masonry walls, subject to approval of


6. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes

or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or

elevator shafts.

a. Exception: Accessible above-ceiling space specified above.

C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets

of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install

where condensate would be subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.

Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and

same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for

removal of plug or cap.

D. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or

floors, and in floor channels, unless indicated to be exposed to view.

E. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.

F. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side

down.

G. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

H. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each

piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

I. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated

valve.

J. Install pressure gage downstream from each line pressure regulator.

K. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent

to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-


226313 - 9

resistant insect screens in large end. Minimize venting through the roof, give a priority to

venting through the exterior wall.

L. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and

floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Section 15050 for special sealers and materials.


A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint

construction.


A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.

B. Support all piping on the roof with Miro roller-bearing supports.

C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum

rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of fuel gas piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream

from and within 72 inches of each appliance. Install union downstream from valve.

D. Provide flexible connector pipe and quick connect device for all appliances that must be moved

for servicing.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as

practical to inlet of each appliance using gas.

F. This Contractor shall be responsible for the entire gas service, distribution piping and final

connections to all gas using devices. Final connections are required even for equipment

provided by others.

3.9 PIPE PROTECTION

A. All underground steel pipe shall be protected from corrosion. Utilize a Scotchrap Pipe Primer.

Let dry then wrap with Scotchrap 51 tape as instructed by the manufacturer.


226313 - 10

3.10 UNDERGROUND GAS PIPE

A. All underground gas pipe shall be Polyethylene plastic.

B. Provide transition fittings and connection methods as suggested by the manufacturer of the

polyethylene plastic pipe. Follow the manufacturer’s installation instructions or the guidelines

for “Underground Installation of Polyethylene Pipe” which can be downloaded from the web

site; www.plasticpipe.org

3.11 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or

sign on or near each service meter, pressure regulator, and specialty valve.

1. Text: In addition to name of identified unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform

operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and

warn of hazards and improper operations.

2. Provide labels on the piping every 25 feet and in every room, which ever is less

identifying the pipe as “GAS” and pressure: IE “2-PSI”. Provide engraved plastic-

laminated sign at the main service indicating the distribution pressure. Refer to 15190 for

requirements on the type of labeling to use.

3.12 PAINTING

A. Paint exterior service meters pipe, pressure regulators, and specialty valves. Paint all other gas

pipe exposed to the weather. (This includes all exposed piping on the roof.) Clean all surfaces

free from dirt, grease, rust, and loose paint. Prime then paint with two coats of industrial

enamel.

1. Color: Gray


A. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to ANSI Z223.1, Part 4 "Inspection, Testing, and

Purging," and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are

obtained.

C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of service meters, pressure regulators, valves, and

specialties.

E. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators.

F. Verify that specified piping tests are complete.

3.14 ADJUSTING


226313 - 11

A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety

devices.

3.15 PRESSURE TESTING

A. Prior to backfilling and enclosing of piping in building the piping shall be leak tested as

described in the National Fuel Gas Code NFPA #54. The test medium shall be air or an inert

gas such as nitrogen. OXYGEN SHALL NEVER BE USED. The test pressure shall be 5 psig.

Leakage points shall be located by means of an approved combustible gas detector or soap and

water. OPEN FLAMES OR OTHER METHODS WHICH COULD PROVIDE A SOURCE

OF IGNITION SHALL NOT BE USED. Repair leaks and retest.

B. Contact Engineer or Owner’s representative to inform them of installation schedule and to

witness pressure testing of piping. Provide copy of signed test report to the Engineer.


GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Delanco MVC

230010 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 230010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Divisions 21, 22,

and 23.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for Mechanical,

Plumbing, and Fire Protection system installations. It is intended to supplement Division 1

sections. Any conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for

clarification.

B. Furnish and install all work indicated and specified in accordance with these specifications and

accompanying contract drawings. This shall include all required labor, materials, equipment,

programming, testing, and supervision.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following definitions used in mechanical and electrical sections are in addition to those

listed in Supplementary General Conditions:

1. Provide: Shall mean "furnish and install" indicated work

2. Install: Installation of item and all necessary related work to provide fully operational

devices.

3. Furnish: Procurement and delivery to jobsite of equipment for installation.

4. Remove: Disconnect and take from existing location, including accompanying sealant,

supports, anchors, and associated materials, and remove from the site for legal disposal

or recycling, or store and protect for reinstallation when noted.

5. Replace: Remove and provide new.

6. Re-install: Install existing item in same or new location as indicated. Provide all

necessary hardware, supports, extension of existing services, etc as required.

7. Herein: shall mean the contents of a particular section where this term appears.

8. Indicated: Indicated on contract drawings.

9. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,

unpainted storage areas without ceilings, chases and shafts, attics, ceiling plenums,

unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.


230010 - 2

10. Exposed Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished

occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

11. Exposed Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient


12. Concealed Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical

contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in walls or shafts.

13. Concealed Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather

conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

14. Listed or labeled shall mean as defined in NFPA 70 Article 100, by a Testing Agency

acceptable to Authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ) and marked for intended use.

15. Piping: Includes pipe, fittings, valves, hangers, and other accessories which comprise a

system.

16. Wiring: Conduit, fittings, wire, junction and outlet boxes, switches, and items necessary

or relating to such wiring.

17. Work: The labor, equipment, and materials required as part of the project.

18. Trades: refers to those specifically skilled in the work performed under a particular

section of this contract.

1.4 CONTRACTOR

A. The term Contractor as used throughout this Division of the Specifications shall be understood

to mean the single Prime Contractor or firm awarded the single Contract for the project.

References to various other contractor entities (i.e. ‘Sub-‘, ‘Mechanical’, ‘Plumbing’,

‘Electrical’, ‘Automation’, ‘BAS’, etc) shall be understood to mean a sub-contractor to the

Prime Contractor; if applicable.

1.5 DRAWINGS

A. The Mechanical work is generally indicated on the Mechanical, Plumbing and/or Fire

Protection drawings, but additional related information and details may appear on other project

drawings, and these shall become a part of each Contract. All project drawings are intended to

be complimentary.

1. Refer to the Architectural drawings, when applicable, for information such as locations

of fire rated assemblies, ceiling types and heights, chase dimensions, structural steel

dimensions, etc.

2. The Architectural Drawings and details shall govern the location and arrangement of

equipment, mounting heights, and similar conditions within finished spaces.

3. Notify the Architect of any discrepancies between any of the drawings and/or the

specifications.

B. The Drawings are diagrammatic in nature and indicate the general configuration of the work.

All work that will be required for the actual installation is not necessarily indicated due to the

scale of the drawings. Coordinate the actual installation of all work with all other building

system components and other Contractors, and provide all necessary coordination, offsets,

accessories, materials, etc. as part of the work.


230010 - 3

1.6 TRUE INTENT

A. The Drawings and Specifications are intended to describe a complete operating system. All

labor, material or equipment, which is not specified or indicated but is necessary for the

operation and completion of a properly operating system, according to the true intent of the

Specifications and Drawings and as interpreted by the Architect/Engineer, shall be furnished as

a part of the Contract, as though it were specifically detailed and described.

B. Coordinate and assign work such that all work and materials are provided and coordinated

between all subcontractors and suppliers to provide complete and operational systems. The

specification format, section numbers and drawing numbering or nomenclature is not intended

to assign work within the Contract.

1.7 EXAMINATION OF THE SITE

A. Bidders shall carefully examine specifications and drawings, visit the site of proposed work and

observe all existing conditions and limitations and include any work required due to the

existing conditions and limitations.

B. Request clarifications from the Architect/Engineer regarding discrepancies between existing

conditions and drawings and specifications prior to bidding. Submission of a bid shall

indicate that bidder is familiar with existing conditions to be met in execution of the work and

has included such work in his bid.

C. Failure to visit and inspect the existing conditions shall not be a valid reason for authorization

of a change order.

1.8 DIMENSIONS, GRADES AND SURVEYS:

A. Dimensions, grades, elevations and locations shown on the Drawings are approximate. Verify

all lines, grades and dimensions prior to starting the work. All necessary measurements,

surveys, lines, grades, and elevations are the responsibility of the Contractor. Verify all lines

and grades with the local controlling agency, AHJ or other party where required.

1.9 PERMITS, FEES AND CODES:

A. Perform all work in compliance with the codes, laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of

federal, state, or local Authorities Having Jurisdiction over the premises. All such codes, laws,

ordinances, rules and regulations are hereby incorporated and made a part of these

specifications.

B. Work shall be done in accordance with, but not limited to, the applicable sections of the latest

edition and supplement to the following Codes and Standards:

1. ANSI American National Standard Institute

2. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

3. FM Factory Mutual Systems

4. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

5. NFPA National Fire Protection Association


230010 - 4

a. 13 - Sprinkler Systems

b. 50 - National Electric Code

c. 54 - National Fuel Gas Code

d. 90A - Installation of Air-conditioning and Ventilating systems

e. 91 - Blower and Exhaust Systems

6. UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

7. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association

8. IBC International Building Code

9. IMC International Mechanical Code

10. IPC International Plumbing Code

11. All relevant sub-codes adopted by the local AHJ.

C. The drawings and specifications are not intended to conflict with the above documents. Request

clarifications from the Architect/Engineer regarding discrepancies between relevant codes and

the drawings and specifications prior to bidding. Submission of a bid shall indicate that bidder

is familiar with the applicable code requirements and has included such work in the bid.

D. All work performed on this project and all equipment furnished for this project shall be in

conformance with the regulations and requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act

(OSHA). The Contractor is solely responsible for compliance with OSHA regulations. All

purchased equipment shall be designed, manufactured, and furnished with the necessary

accessories to meet OSHA requirements. All construction facilities, including ladders,

platforms, guard rails, safety features, etc. shall meet OSHA requirements.

1.10 DAMAGES

A. Contractor is responsible to repair or replace damage caused by employees to the site, building

or building mechanical/electrical systems during the execution of the work. Repairs or

replacement shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer and Owner.

B. The above paragraph applies to damages which occur to existing conditions (portions of the

building in place before renovations) or new work installed during the progress of the project.

1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All materials and equipment shall be new, and shall conform to the grade, quality and standards

specified.

1. Where required by applicable bidding requirements and Division 1 sections, materials

and equipment shall meet applicable USA steel certifications and/or shall be

manufactured in the USA.

B. All equipment shall be limited to products regularly produced for the intended service, in

accordance with manufacturer’s engineering data, rating, and literature. Major items of

equipment shall be manufactured for the intended purpose in commercial practice and shall

have the manufacturer’s name, address and catalog number affixed in a prominent place.

C. Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions for type and

capacity of equipment used. Manufacturer’s instructions shall be considered part of the


230010 - 5

specifications. Type, capacity and application of equipment shall be suitable and shall operate

satisfactorily for the purpose intended.

D. Equipment used as the basis-of-design as indicated on the Drawings defines the general space

requirements, weights and related services (electrical services, piping connections, etc.).

Provide equipment of similar size, requirements and clearances which shall not necessitate

revisions to the building construction or other trades. If revisions are required due to

substitution the Contractor shall pay all costs for any required revisions. No revisions shall be

made without Architect/Engineer’s written approval.

1.12 PERFORMANCE OF EQUIPMENT

A. All materials, equipment and systems specified or required for the completion of the work,

shall be completely satisfactory and acceptable in operation, performance, and capacity. No

approval, either written or verbal, of any drawings, descriptive data of samples of such

material, equipment and/or appurtenances, shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to

provide systems in complete working order at the completion of the work.

B. Any material, equipment, or appurtenances, which does not comply with the drawings and/or

specification requirements, or which is not new, or which is damaged prior to acceptance by the

Architect/Engineer, shall be removed and replaced with acceptable materials, equipment and/or

appurtenance or put in acceptable working condition, to the satisfaction of the

Architect/Engineer.

C. All equipment and systems shall be electrically and mechanically correct. All equipment and

systems shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration as determined by the

Architect/Engineer. Eliminate any objectionable noise or vibration produced and transmitted to

occupied portions of the building by any system or equipment, to the satisfaction of the

Architect/Engineer and Owner.

1.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. All Cutting and Patching shall be completed in accordance with Division 1, Cutting and

Patching section.

B. Existing Construction: Cut and patch building construction as required for the installation of

new work. All cutting and openings shall be approved by the Architect.

1. Patching: All patching of existing surfaces shall match the existing construction finish.

2. Supports: All openings made in existing floors, walls, roof decks, etc. shall be supported

in a manner approved by the Architect/Engineer to maintain the structural integrity of the

construction. The Contractor shall provide lintels in all masonry wall openings and

structural steel angle framed openings for all roof and floor penetrations. Submit

drawings depicting each framed opening and lintel size, type, and location to the

Architect/Engineer for review and acceptance.

C. General: All cutting and patching shall be done by mechanics experienced in their respective

lines of work.


230010 - 6

1. All cutting shall minimize damage to adjacent surfaces. If damage occurs the Contractor

shall replace or repair the damaged materials with new materials in a manner approved

by the Architect/Engineer.

2. When necessary to cut and remove portions of any walls, floors, ceilings, roof or site

work to perform the work, Contractor shall perform cutting and fitting, remove all excess

material, and patch or replace all damaged construction in a manner approved by the

Architect/Engineer.

3. No cutting shall be done which may affect the building structurally or architecturally.

Any damage incidental to cutting or other causes in the performance of this Contract

shall be made good by replacement or repairs. Cutting shall be done only with the prior

approval of the Architect.

4. Patch all openings left in existing walls, floors and ceilings when obsolete materials are

removed. Match adjacent construction and finishes.

D. Patch and/or seal all openings or penetrations made in fire rated floors, ceilings or partitions

after work has been installed. The material used for sealing the openings shall have a fire

rating equal to or greater than the rating of the floor, ceiling or partition material. All fire

sealant material shall be U.L. classified and approved by the Architect/Engineer.

1.14 RUBBISH REMOVAL AND CLEAN-UP

A. Periodically, and at the completion of the work, remove from the building and site all rubbish

and accumulated materials, and leave the workplace in a clean, orderly and acceptable

condition. Provide dumpsters, trash containers, hauling and approved disposal fees associated

with the work.

B. Clean all installed materials and equipment of paint splashes, grease stains, dust, finger marks,

and all other unsightly marks prior to substantial completion inspection.

1.15 TESTS AND CERTIFICATIONS

A. The following requirements are supplementary to test requirements specified in individual

equipment or systems Sections.

1. Written notice of test date shall be given to Architect/Engineer and other parties at least

72 hours prior to tests.

2. Concealed work shall remain uncovered until required tests have been completed

3. Conduct preliminary test of equipment as soon as conditions permit. Make changes,

adjustments, or replacements based on test results prior to final acceptance tests.

4. Conduct performance and operating tests for each system or equipment in presence of

the Architect/Engineer. Coordinate testing with the manufacturer’s representative and/or

AHJ when required.

5. Furnish labor, material, and instruments and include all other costs in connection with

tests.

6. Obtain certificates of approval and/or acceptance in compliance with regulations of AHJ.

Work shall not be complete until such certificates have been delivered to the



230010 - 7

B. Contractor shall certify after testing that all systems and equipment operate safely, efficiently,

and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and the intent of the drawings and

specifications.

1.16 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect work and materials against dirt, water, chemicals, plaster or damage. All openings in

stored or installed materials (pipes, ductwork, conduit, etc.), shall be sealed to exclude dirt,

sand, and other foreign substances. Any damaged materials shall be removed and replaced

regardless of the cause of the damage.

B. Protect all surfaces against damage from welding, cutting, burning, soldering or similar

construction functions. Special care shall be directed to exposed finished masonry, metal or

wood surfaces, painted surfaces, finished flooring, and finished ceilings.

C. Any damage caused by Contractor’s neglect or by the elements due to the Contractor’s neglect,

either to existing work, or to his work shall be repaired or replaced in a manner approved by the

Architect/Engineer.

D. Clean all materials and equipment to remove all paint, grease, oil, scale, rust, dirt, mud, dust,

sand, and other foreign material prior to substantial completion inspection. Remove traces of

any cleaning materials. Clean the interior of all cabinets, fixtures and equipment and remove

dust, dirt and debris.

1.17 QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP

A. All work shall be installed in a first class, neat and workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled

in the trade involved. The quality of workmanship shall be subject to the approval of the

Architect/Engineer. Any work of inferior quality and/or workmanship shall be corrected in a

manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.

1.18 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Various products are used as the Basis-of-Design for systems and equipment and are specified

by a manufacturer's name and model number. Unless otherwise indicated, other manufacturer's

products may be submitted for consideration as a substitution in accordance with the

requirements set forth in Instructions to Bidders and/or Division 1 sections, and as follows.

1. The Architect/Engineer shall be the sole judge as to the acceptance of a product that is

submitted for acceptance as a substitution.

2. The proposed substitute shall include all labor and materials required to install and

operate the equipment in accordance with the original design concept, including the cost

of any changes to work under this section, or other sections or Contracts, such as; access

openings, equipment pads, supports, pipe or duct connections, motors, controls, electrical

and control wiring.

3. Contractor shall verify that substitute equipment will fit into the designated spaces,

verify that dimensions provide adequate space for the equipment and allow clearances

for connections and servicing, and verify acceptance of any additional costs from other


230010 - 8

Contractors resulting from the substitute product, prior to submission to the

Architect/Engineer for acceptance.

1.19 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 "Submittals".

B. Prepare and submit a Submittal Schedule which shall include a list of products to be submitted

and indicate the product manufacturer, model, and date the information will be submitted to the

Architect/Engineer. The schedule shall be submitted within two weeks after notice-to-proceed

and prior to the submission of individual product submittals.

C. After acceptance of the Submittal Schedule, submit Shop Drawings and Submittals and obtain

acceptance of the Architect/Engineer before any equipment is ordered or work is accomplished.

Verify the required number of copies of each submittal to be submitted.

1. Submittals shall be in the form of clearly legible manufacturers printed catalogs, CAD-

generated drawings, pamphlets, technical data, test information, and installation

instructions. Clearly indicate the location, service and function of each particular item.

Identification shall be made in ink with specific model numbers highlighted and

accessories highlighted.

2. Submittals shall be completely referenced and identified. Descriptive information and

data shall be complete. Submittals which only show partial or general information will

not be acceptable and will be returned.

3. Shop Drawings and Submittals which are prepared by sub-contractors and vendors shall

be checked and coordinated by the Contractor prior to submission to the

Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall check these drawings and submittals with respect to

measurements, materials, identifications, and details so as to make certain that they

conform to the intent of the Contract Documents and make any corrections before

submission to the Architect/Engineer.

4. Contractor shall inform the Engineer, in writing, of any deviations in the shop drawings

and submittals where the submitted item deviates from the Contract Documents. This

written advisory shall accompany the initial submittal and shall state the reasons for the

deviations.

D. The Architect/Engineer will check the Shop Drawings and Submittals for conformance with the

Contract Documents. The Engineer’s acceptance of the Shop Drawings and Submittals does

not release the Contractor from providing all specific requirements of the equipment and

installation not listed in the Submittal but required by the Contract Documents.

E. Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions that are to be confirmed at the job site, for

coordination in the ordering and assembly of systems and equipment, for information that

pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction, and for coordination of

the work of all trades.

F. The following specific items and information shall be included in all Shop Drawings and

Submittals:

1. Capacity and performance data as shown on the Equipment Schedules or as specified.


230010 - 9

2. Complete descriptive data on the systems, equipment and specialties which are specified,

scheduled, or shown, so that compliance with the Contract Documents can be

determined.

3. Electrical wiring diagrams (power and control) for electric motor driven equipment.

G. Systems and equipment which have been installed without having been accepted by the

Architect/Engineer may be rejected and be shall be replaced with products that are acceptable.

Submittals and Shop Drawings used at the construction site shall have Architect/Engineer’s

acceptance stamp.

H. Shop Drawings and Submittals shall be revised and submitted as often as necessary to obtain

acceptance. Contractor shall not delay the progress of the work due to unnecessary delays in

obtaining acceptance of all required Shop Drawings or Submittals.

1. Resubmit rejected Shop Drawings and Submittals within three weeks, or sooner if

required by project schedule.

2. During the submittal process, obtain all of the information that will be required for the

Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

I. Ductwork Shop Drawings: Ductwork drawings shall be based on approved Architectural,

Structural, and Mechanical shop drawings and equipment submittals which relate directly to the

installation of the Mechanical Systems. Contractor shall also rely on job conditions, the

equipment that will be installed and actual field measurements in the preparation of the shop

drawings.

1. The ductwork shop drawings shall clearly depict structural steel, grids, lights, sprinkler

systems, and plumbing and HVAC piping mains in order to avoid interferences with

structural steel, walls, and ceiling systems.

2. Shop drawings shall show the dimensions of the equipment and the relationship of

equipment to walls, floors, and ceilings. The shop drawings shall be prepared on at least

24" x 36" sheets at a minimum scale of 1/4” = 1’-0”.

1.20 COORDINATION AND COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 “Coordination Drawings”.

B. All Contractors and sub-contractors shall coordinate the installation of all equipment and

material. The Contractors shall hold weekly scheduling and coordination meetings during the

construction process. If conflicts are found, and they cannot be worked out in the field, they

shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer.

C. Layout of building systems, equipment, fixtures, piping, ductwork, conduit, specialty items, and

accessories indicated on the Contract Drawings is diagrammatic. Variations in alignment,

elevation, and detail will be required to avoid interference and satisfy architectural and

structural limitations. All such variations are not necessarily indicated.

D. Coordination drawings shall be prepared, reviewed and coordinated in advance of any work

being performed in any area. The drawings and coordination shall follow the project phasing

schedule where applicable.


230010 - 10

1. A coordination drawing completion schedule shall be prepared by the Mechanical

Contractor and agreed upon by all Contractors and sub-contractors. The initial

coordination drawings shall be prepared within thirty days of receipt of the General

Contractor’s base ceiling drawings.

2. Upon completion and sign-off by all Contractors, submit final coordination drawings to


E. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing all elements,

components, and systems of equipment and materials in relationship with other systems,

installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for

installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of

importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the

following:

1. Prepare plans, sections and elevations to indicate the proposed locations of fixtures,

piping, ductwork, conduit, equipment, and materials. Include the following:

a. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.

b. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including access door

openings and component removal

c. Equipment connections, mounting and support details.

d. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.

e. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.

f. Sizes and locations of equipment pads and bases.

2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the

building during construction.

3. Order of priority for construction space:

a. Maintain scheduled finished ceiling height.

b. Light fixtures

c. Drainage piping (gravity flow).

d. Ductwork.

e. Cable trays

f. Fire protection piping.

g. Other piping.

h. Conduit.

F. Prepare overall coordinated reflected ceiling plans which shall include, but not be limited to, air

outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, access doors,

and other ceiling-mounted equipment or items.

1. The Contractor shall prepare the base ceiling plans. Each contractor shall use these base

ceiling drawings to indicate their work on a composite reflected ceiling plan. The

Mechanical Contractor shall obtain copies of the General Contractor’s base ceiling plans,

and copies of all other contractors’ or sub-contractors’ reflected plans and use them to

prepare composite plans.

2. All Contractors and sub-contractors shall carefully check all of the drawings and

coordinate their work with all other trades to provide a symmetrical and coordinated

ceiling. Ceiling T-bars, lights, diffusers, and other equipment shall all be symmetrically

installed with provisions made for integrating the T-bars and the various equipment.

Failure to coordinate the work will result in relocation of ceiling components as directed

by the Architect/Engineer at the Contractor's expense.


230010 - 11

3. The Mechanical Contractor shall obtain copies of Contractors’ and sub-contractors’

coordination drawings to insure that all installations are coordinated and no conflicts

exist. The Mechanical Contractor shall utilize the structural steel drawings to coordinate

installation of material and equipment in the ceiling spaces and in chases. Failure to

coordinate the work will result in relocation of components as directed by the

Architect/Engineer at the Contractor's expense.

1.21 ALIGNMENT

A. Where several devices, panels, controllers, bells, alarms, thermostats, switches, handles, etc.,

are to be installed in a common location, this equipment shall be lined up in a horizontal or

vertical plane. Request interpretation from the Architect/Engineer for any unusual alignment

conditions.

1.22 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 "Record Documents".

B. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the following installed

conditions:

1. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building

lines.

2. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials

installed. Revise schedules on the drawings.

3. Exterior underground equipment and materials located with triangulated dimensions.

1.23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare and provide minimum of three (3) maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1

“Operation and Maintenance Data”.

B. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for

equipment items:

1. Written description of system operation.

2. An equipment list for each piece of equipment furnished. The list shall be in order of

equipment label and shall indicate the manufacturer, model number, serial number, and

motor horsepower and voltage ratings.

3. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance

curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and list of replacement

parts.

4. A copy of all final corrected equipment submittals, control diagrams, descriptive

brochures, and a list of all parts of each piece of equipment.

5. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine

and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and

emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.


230010 - 12

6. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;

disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, and lubrication

charts and schedules

7. Copies of all permits required for occupancy.

C. All of the materials shall be indexed, arranged categorically, and be bound in a rigid, plastic

covered, three ring binder. Provide tabs for each major section.

D. The purpose of this manual is to assist the Owner in routine operation, maintenance, servicing,

trouble shooting and procurement of replacement parts. All information in the manual shall be

as-built and only material pertinent to the project shall be included.

1.24 TRAINING AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 "Demonstration and Training".

B. At the completion of the work, and before final acceptance of the building by the Owner, each

Contractor, together with manufacturers’ representatives, shall instruct the Owner’s designated

representatives in the care, adjustment, maintenance and operation of equipment and systems in

accordance with Division 1.

C. A manufacture’s representative of each major component or system shall inspect his work,

make final adjustments, place them in a satisfactory working condition, and instruct the owner

in their operation. Each representative shall also provide a letter to the Architect/Engineer

indicating that an inspection has been performed, instruction given, and the equipment is

installed and operating in conformance with the manufacturer’s written installation

instructions.

1.25 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES

A. All work performed shall be guaranteed in writing by the Contractor for a period of one (1)

year after substantial completion. The Contractor shall remedy any defects due to faulty

materials or workmanship, and pay for any damage to other work resulting there from which

appear within a period of one (1) year from date of occupancy or the date of the Owner's

Certificate of Final Payment of the total contract, and in accordance with the terms of any

special guarantees provided in the Contract. The Owner shall give notice of observed defects

with reasonable promptness. All questions arising under this article shall be decided by the

Owner notwithstanding final payment.

1.26 TEMPORARY HEAT

A. New HVAC equipment may be used for temporary heat if allowed in Division 1 and provided

the following conditions are met:

1. HVAC unit warranty is not reduced. Warranty period begins at date of substantial

completion.

2. Building is not excessively dusty.

3. The HVAC equipment is installed as part of the permanent HVAC systems as indicated

on the Drawings.


230010 - 13

4. All equipment and ductwork shall be cleaned to new condition prior to substantial

completion.

5. All return air grilles and/or return duct openings shall be provided with MERV-8

filtration media to minimize airborne contaminants from entering the return air ductwork

system. This filtration media shall be changed on a regular basis, as needed. Inspection

of filtration media will take place during routine construction reviews by the engineer.

At the completion of work, the filtration media shall be removed. At the completion of

work, the Contractor shall provide new filtration media within the main air handler.

a. 2” MERV-8

b. 4” MERV-13

B. Remove all temporary heating materials, equipment, hardware, accessories etc. when it is no

longer required, and prior to substantial completion.

1.27 METHOD OF PROCEDURE

A. The Drawings accompanying these Specifications are diagrammatic and intended to indicate

the approximate and relative locations of the materials and systems. Installation, connection,

and inter-connection of all components of the systems shall be complete and made in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and best practices of the respective trades.

B. Install all work and equipment at such time and in such manner as not to delay or interfere with

any other trade performing work.

C. Coordinate with all trades as to the locations of different lines of pipe, ducts, conduit, and

electrical equipment before erecting any Work, so as to avoid interference. In case of conflict,

equipment shall be relocated, without additional cost, as directed by the Engineer regardless of

which equipment was installed first. Each Contractor shall cooperate with other Contractors

for the proper securing and anchoring of all Work included within these Specifications.

D. Care shall be used in the erection and installation of all equipment and materials to avoid

marring surfaces of the work of other Contractors. Each Contractor will be held responsible for

all such damage caused by the lack of precaution and due to negligence on the part of his

workmen.

E. All items of labor, material and equipment not specified in detail or shown on the drawings but

incidental to or necessary for the complete and proper installation and proper operation of the

several branches of the work described herein or reasonably implied in connection therewith,

shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications or drawings.

1.28 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the

actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to Architectural interior and exterior elevations and equipment specifications for rough-in

requirements.

1.29 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS


230010 - 14

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of systems, materials, and

equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Coordinate systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building

components.

2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of

construction.

4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of materials and equipment for efficient

flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning

prior to closing in the building.

6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and

equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

7. Coordinate connection of systems with utilities and services. Comply with requirements

of governing regulations, service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required

connection for each service.

8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,

including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements

indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown

only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual

system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect/Engineer.

9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to

other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

10. Install equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of

disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease

fittings to an accessible location.

11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces.

12. Install materials and equipment firmly supported and secured to the building construction

where required, and according to manufacturer’s instructions

13. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required

to be installed at a specified slope.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)


ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT Delanco MVC

230030 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 230030 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies the basic requirements and responsibilities for motors, motor controls,

and electrical work related to equipment furnished under Division 23.

1. The General Contractor has final responsibility for coordination of all work and

responsibilities between sub-contractors and installers.

B. Electrical products furnished under Division 23 shall comply with Part 2 – Products below and

with applicable Division 26 sections.

C. Refer to the drawings or specifications for the specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower,

kilowatts, voltage and electrical characteristics) for equipment furnished.

D. Refer to Section 232923 for Variable Frequency Controller specifications.

E. Refer to other Division 23 sections for automatic temperature control or energy management

system requirements related to wiring and control products.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators

B. NEMA Standards ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.

C. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

D. NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches

E. NFPA Bulletin 70: National Electrical Code, latest addition or as adopted by the local AHJ.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


230030 - 2

A. Submit product data for motors, starters, and other electrical components, as required by the

individual equipment specification sections.

1. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, ratings, and finishes

2. Include power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-

installed and field-installed wiring.




intended use.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Confirm that voltage and amperage characteristics of equipment to be installed match those

indicated on the electrical drawings. Notify the Architect/Engineer immediately of any

discrepancies. Do not proceed with any installation work which conflicts with the drawings.

B. Distribute and coordinate the product information which requires electrical coordination with

the electrical contractor or sub-contractor and per Division 1 requirements.

1. The electrical contractor or sub-contractor shall obtain and review shop drawings,

product data, and manufacturer’s instructions for equipment furnished under other

Divisions. The electrical contractor or sub-contractor will confirm that voltage and

amperage characteristics of equipment to be installed match those indicated on the

drawings.

C. Coordinate sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule

and startup of equipment.

D. Refer to the “Electrical Responsibilities Schedule” on the drawings for Electrical/Mechanical

coordination of work

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to the compliance with these specifications, the following manufacturers may provide

equivalent products to the basis of design; however, in the event that incorporation of an

equivalent item into the work requires revisions or additions to other trades, coordinate the

installation and bear all costs, at no change in the Contract Sum.

1. Square D Company

2. Siemens


230030 - 3

3. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer

4. Allen Bradley

5. Franklin Control Systems


2.2 MOTORS

A. General Motor Requirements:

1. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are

specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections. 2. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Polyphase Motors:

1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads. 2. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load brake horsepower will not

require the motor to operate in the service factor range. 3. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 degrees C. environment with maximum 50ºC

temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation). 4. Starting capability: Frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control system, and

not less than 5 evenly time spaced starts per hour for manually controlled motors. 5. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors. 6. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. 7. For special motors, more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the

individual equipment specifications.

C. Motors Used with Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for

controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control

method.

1. Two-speed motors shall have two separate windings on poly-phase motors.

D. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with, and approved by, VFC manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by

pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

E. Single Phase Motors:

1. Motors 1/20 hp and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

2. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

1) Permanent-split capacitor.


230030 - 4

2) Split phase.

3) Capacitor start, inductor run.

4) Capacitor start, capacitor run.

3. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

4. Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings.

5. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to

motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of

motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor

temperature returns to normal range.

2.3 MOTOR STARTERS

A. General Motor Starter Characteristics:

1. Enclosures: lockable NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures, except in wet locations shall

be NEMA 4 with conduit hubs, or units in hazardous locations which shall have NEC

proper class and division.

2. Type and size of starter shall be as recommended by motor manufacturer or the driven

equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition.

B. Manual Starters, fractional horsepower single phase

1. Square D Class 2510; Type ‘FG5’ (single pole) or ‘FG6’(two pole), or equal

2. Toggle operator, number of poles required by load

3. NEMA ‘1” enclosure, unless otherwise noted

4. Green ‘ON’ pilot light in cover

5. Overload protection: melting alloy type thermal overload relays.

6. Handle guard kit with padlock provision.

C. Magnetic Starter, polyphase

1. Square D Class 8536 Form H30 or equal, full-voltage non-reversing unless noted

2. Full-voltage starter with solid-state “motor-logic” relay with adjustable trip current, to

provide overload protection, phase loss and phase imbalance protection

3. NEMA’1’enclosure, unless indicated or required by application

4. Hand-Off-Auto selector switch mounted on cover.

5. 24 volt or 120 volt control transformer, fused from line side.

6. Externally operated manual reset.

7. Green ‘on’ pilot light in cover.

8. N.O and N.C. auxiliary contacts

2.4 SMART STARTERS

A. General: “Smart Starter” combination motor starters include integrated control logic, wiring

terminals, electronic overload protection, internal disconnect means, and other features as

specified below.

1. Manufacturer shall provide a five year warranty on the complete starter assembly.


230030 - 5

2. The starter assembly shall be UL listed under UL 508A

B. Single Phase Combination Starter; Franklin Control Systems BAS-1P or equal

1. Ratings: 110 volt or 208/240 VAC single phase motors from 0.1 HP to 1.0 HP.

2. Manually-operated quick-make toggle mechanism lockable in the “off” position to

function as the motor disconnect.

3. Electronic adjustable overload protection with manual reset

4. LED pilot lights for ‘run’ and ‘fault’ status.

5. Hand-Off-Auto switch, concealed behind cover.

6. Controls: provide an interposing run relay and current sensing status output relay.

a. Wiring terminals allow for remote control run (ON/OFF) input.

b. Wiring terminals available for run status output and fault output.

c. All control terminals shall be integrated in the starter.

7. Provide surface mount enclosure for mounting to a single-gang box.

2.5 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. General: Furnish disconnect “safety” switches in types, sizes, duties, features, ratings, and

enclosures as required or indicated.

1. NEMA 1 enclosure for indoor switches

2. NEMA 4 enclosure with raintight hub, for outdoor switches.

3. For motor disconnects, provide units with horsepower ratings suitable for the loads

served.

B. Non-fusible switch: heavy duty switches, voltage classes and current ratings as required or

indicated; Square “D” Class 3110 or equal.

1. Single throw externally-operable handle, quick-make/quick-break mechanism,

interlocked hinged cover, equipment grounding kit.

2. Provide number and arrangement of auxiliary interlock contacts in switches when

indicated.

C. Fusible switch: heavy duty switches, voltage classes and current ratings as required or

indicated; Square “D” Class 3110 or equal.


interlocked hinged cover, equipment grounding kit, fuseholder clips with Class H fuses

(unless indicated), and current ratings indicated.

2. Provide number and arrangement of auxiliary interlock contacts in switches when

indicated.

D. Toggle disconnect switch (for fractional horsepower motors with internal overload protection,

maximum 1 HP/16 FLA); Hubbell HBL1221B (brown)

1. Single or double-pole industrial grade toggle switch, non-fused, nylon handle, one-piece

bridge

2. 20 amps, 120/208/240/277 volts


230030 - 6

3. Single-gang box with galvanized cover plate and integral guard with padlock provision.

E. In-line plug-type motor disconnects may be furnished for fractional horsepower motor

disconnects where specified as part of equipment.

2.6 COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTER/DISCONNECT

A. Provide device with same features as magnetic motor starters and disconnect switches as

specified above, in common enclosure.

1. Square D Class 8536 Form H30 or approved equal, full-voltage non-reversing unless

noted.

2. Full-voltage starter with solid-state “motor-logic” relay with adjustable trip current, to

provide overload protection, phase loss and phase imbalance protection


interlocked hinged cover, equipment grounding kit.

4. NEMA’1’enclosure, unless indicated or required by application

5. Hand-Off-Auto selector switch mounted on cover.

6. 24 volt or 120 volt control transformer, fused from line side.


8. Green ‘on’ pilot light in cover.

9. N.O and N.C. auxiliary contacts

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installation with electrical installer. Provide copies of approved shop drawings for

equipment to be wired.

B. Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. All electrical power connections to equipment will be made by the electrical contractor or sub-

contractor (EC), through the remote starter and/or remote disconnect where indicated.

B. Motors and motor controls for equipment shall be furnished and set by the mechanical

contractor or sub-contractor (MC) as work of Division 23. Field-installed disconnects, starters,

or variable speed controllers shall be furnished by the MC and installed and wired by the EC.

C. The contractor or sub-contractor furnishing the motorized equipment shall coordinate and

supervise start up and testing of equipment.

3.3 ELECTRICAL RESPONSIBILITY AND COORDINATION


230030 - 7

A. The MC shall check each piece of equipment or motor for alignment, lubrication, etc. The

electrical contractor will test each motor for proper rotation after final connections are

completed and before applying current to the motor. The EC will make any necessary

adjustments to the starter and control equipment for proper starting and overload protection.

B. The mechanical contractor or sub-contractor (MC) shall furnish all mechanical/HVAC

equipment, motors, starters, thermal overloads, push buttons for local and remote control,

controllers, pressure switches, aquastats or similar items together with all temperature/building

automation appurtenances, accessories and control wiring required to operate the equipment

furnished under the Division 23 sections of the contract, and as necessary to perform the

operating functions as specified, shown on the drawings or as otherwise required.

C. The MC shall set and mount all mechanical/HVAC equipment, motors, starters, variable

frequency controllers, and control panels and devices. The electrical contractor or sub-

contractor (EC) will, unless noted otherwise, furnish and install all safety switches at the

equipment and make all power wiring connections (120 volts and above) to equipment or

motors through the safety disconnect switch, remote motor starter, or line voltage control

device (thermostat, etc.). Where the starter and/or safety switch is an integral part of the

equipment assembly, the assembly shall be furnished with the wiring being complete between

the starter, controller and motor and the EC will make the power connections only at the unit.

D. If procurement requirements necessitate a change in the electrical characteristics of any motor

or equipment being furnished under Division 23, the MC shall first obtain approval of such

changes from the Engineer. The MC shall also be responsible for all necessary arrangements

and shall pay all costs, if any, for all required changes to the electrical work.

E. The EC will furnish, install and connect all power wiring to designated control panel locations.

The MC and/or MC’s temperature control subcontractor shall furnish, install and connect all

low voltage (24 volts) control wiring to all equipment controls and appurtenances provided

under Division 23, unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the drawings.

F. Refer to the Electrical Responsibility Schedule on the drawings for additional information on

responsibilities for providing starters, disconnects and controls.

G. The EC shall be responsible for proper rotation of three phase equipment.


BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (MECHANICAL) Delanco MVC

230050 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 230050 – BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (MECHANICAL)

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and other Division 23 Sections.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods and common

materials for mechanical installations as follows:

1. Common Piping System Requirements

2. Materials and installation

a. Transition fittings

b. Dielectric fittings and unions

c. Solder

3. Miscellaneous metals and lumber.



a. Sleeves

b. Mechanical sleeve seals

c. Escutcheons

6. Joint sealers

7. Firestop systems

8. Equipment installation requirements.

9. Supports and anchors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS











230050 - 2




F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

2. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For all specified materials and products:

B. Shop Drawings: Detailed fabrication and installation drawings for supports and anchorages.


construction, dimensions, description of materials, component connections, anchorage methods,

hardware and installation procedures, plus the following:



D. Welding certificates.






C. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions


substrates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural

Welding Code--Steel."



230050 - 3

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,

storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and

moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual piping Sections for application requirements for pipe, tube, and fitting

materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.


A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system

contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless

thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face

or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty

brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,


F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall

thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.3 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space

between pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers:



230050 - 4

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Metraflex Co.



2. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel Include two for each sealing element.

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coatingof length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing

element.

2.4 SLEEVES

A. Description: Sleeves

1. Manufacturers:


b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Metraflex Co.



B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with

welded longitudinal joint.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

D. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain

ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include

clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.


A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-

joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working

pressure at 180 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Central Plastics Company.

b. Epco Sales, Inc.


d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div


230050 - 5


D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Central Plastics Company.

b. Epco Sales, Inc.



E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-

face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic

washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Manufacturers:


b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Central Plastics Company.



2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig

minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic

lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Calpico, Inc.

b. Lochinvar Corp.

c. Victaulic


G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;

plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F .

1. Manufacturers:

a. Perfection Corp.

b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.

d. Victaulic Co. of America.









230050 - 6



1. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number

3 Common or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules or

Number 3 boards complying with SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in

accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19

percent.




A. General:

1. Architect/Engineer must approve in writing any alternates to the firestop systems and

materials specified herein.

2. Compatibility: Provide firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the

substrates forming openings, and with the items penetrating through the firestop system,

under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestop system

manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

3. Accessories: Provide components for each firestop system to install fill materials and to

comply with the UL listing. Use only components specified by firestop systems

manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency.

a. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials

b. Temporary forming materials.

c. Substrate primers.

d. Collars and steel sleeves.

4. Manufacturers; Specified product or equal by

a. Hilti or

b. 3M

c. Specified Technologies Inc.

d. Dow Corning


5. Architect/Engineer must approve in writing any alternates to the firestop systems and

materials specified herein.

B. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems:

1. Systems or devices listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory under categories XHCR

(firestop devices) and XHEZ (firestop systems) may be used, providing that they

conform to the construction type, penetrant, type, annular space requirements and fire

rating involved in each separate instance, and that the system is symmetrical for wall

applications. Systems or devices must be asbestos-free.

2. Additional requirements: Withstand the passage of cold smoke either as an inherent

property of the system, or by the use of a separate product included as a part of the UL

system or device, and designed to perform this function.

C. Construction Joint/Gap Firestop Systems:


230050 - 7

1. Fill materials listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory under category XHHW may be

used, providing materials conform to the construction type and fire rating involved in

each application.

2. Forming materials listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory under category XHKU may

be used, providing material conforms to the construction type and fire rating involved in

each application and meets UL 2079 and ASTM E1966.

3. Additional requirements: Withstand the passage of cold smoke either as an inherent

property of the system, or by the use of a separate product included as a part of the UL

system or device, and designed to perform this function.

D. Firestop Systems for Cable Trays, Conduits, and Cables.

1. Electrical Systems protection material as listed in UL-classified systems UL 1709,

ASTM E119, ASTM E1529 and ASTM E1725.

2. Acceptable products: As listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory for the applicable

UL system.

a. Fire resistive mats: 3M Interam Endothermic Mats, 0.3” or 0.4” thick foil

encapsulated roll product.

b. Smoke and Flame Sealant: 3M FireDam 150 Caulk.

c. Foil Tape: 3M Interam T-49 Aluminum Foil Tape; used as a vapor barrier, radiant

heat reflector, and installation aid.

d. General Purpose Tape: Scotch 898 Filament Tape; used as installation aid.

e. Composite Sheet: 3M Fire Barrier CS-195+ Composite Sheet; used to cover

openings and as a collar at the termination of the fire protection envelopes.

E. Firestopping Caulk: 3M Fire Barrier CP 25WB+ Caulk; used as a smoke and flame sealant, Or

approved equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS – COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated

unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

1. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment

rooms and service areas.

2. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at

right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless

specifically indicated otherwise.

3. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel

removal and to allow application of insulation

4. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

5. Install piping at indicated slopes and free of sags and bends.

6. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

B. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.


230050 - 8

C. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated

finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.

d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type.

e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.

f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with

concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.

g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw

or spring clips.

h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate

type.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and

roof slabs.

E. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,

and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve

fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6

b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions.

c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to

extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section

"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

1). Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or

pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations:

1. Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.

2. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for

installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

4. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.

5. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble


230050 - 9

mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten

bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight

seal.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations:

1. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.

2. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals.

3. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for

installing mechanical sleeve seals.

H. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation:

1. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size.

2. Position pipe in center of sleeve.

3. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve.

4. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make

watertight seal.

I. Fire-Barrier Penetrations:

1. Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe

penetrations.

2. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.

J. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

K. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.

L. Install piping so as not to encroach on required clearances above or around electrical panels.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections

specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube

end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using

lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"

Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.


230050 - 10

2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.

3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID.

4. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

5. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified.


damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and

welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints:

1. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.

2. Install gasket concentrically positioned.

3. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of

dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping

materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 PAINTING


Painting" and "Exterior Painting."



C. Paint and finish all electrical equipment and material which is not provided with a factory

applied finish, as follows:

1. Where exposed within Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Rooms or similar spaces.

2. Where exposed outdoors or above the roof.

3. Where exposed within finished areas of the building, unless otherwise indicated to be

painted by the General Contractor.

D. No equipment or raceways shall be painted before testing and approval.

E. All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, including galvanized or rusted surfaces, by wire

brushing and cleaning or otherwise prepped as recommended by the manufacturer, before finish

painting.


230050 - 11

F. Polished chrome plated surfaces shall be cleaned. Replacement will be required if surfaces

have been damaged during installation.

G. All painting shall be performed neatly and in accordance with best practice of the trade.

H. Where factory finished units are installed, obtain approval of finish color before units are

shipped.

I. Painting generally shall be as follows:

2. Exposed Work:

a. One prime coat and two finished coats on non-galvanized piping, ducts, contol

panels or cabinets, equipment, specialties, access doors, manhole frames, covers,

ladders, hangers and other ferrous metal work which is not galvanized.

b. Galvanized surfaces need not be painted.

3. Concealed Work:

a. Concealed pipes, ducts, hangers, and supports need not be painted.

b. The visible interior portions of all ducts and other enclosures shall be painted with

two coats of flat black paint.

4. For all equipment furnished with factory applied primer, apply two finish coats after

installation and tests. For equipment furnished with manufacturer’s standard finish, field

finish coats will be waived if such finish is approved after installation, cleaning, and

touching-up.



not indicated.







3.6 ANCHORS

A. Direct all piping motion to expansion joints by heavy clamps and/or structural steel sections

clamped or welded to structural members as required and/or as indicated. Points at which

anchors are located and secured shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer such that no

structural members shall be unduly strained. Where possible, anchor points shall be on

members running parallel to the piping being anchored

3.7 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base

plates, and anchors.


230050 - 12

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. Place grout, completely filling equipment

bases. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. Place

grout around anchors.

E. Cure placed grout






D. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor

materials and equipment.

E. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or



F. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.


A. Examination:

1. Examine areas and conditions under which firestop system is to be installed and notify

the architect of conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion of the work.

2. Examine substrates to determine they are satisfactory to receive firestop system

materials.

a. Conduct tests according to firestop systems manufacturer’s written

recommendations to verify that substrates are free of oil, grease, rolling

compounds, incompatible primers, loose mill scale, dirt or other foreign

substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materials.

b. Verify objects penetrating firestop materials, including clips, hangers, support

sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.

c. Verify substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other

suspended construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive materials.

3. Verify that environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of firestop

materials.

4. Do not proceed with installation of firestop system until unsatisfactory conditions have

been corrected by the contractor in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

B. Preparation:


230050 - 13

1. Clean and repair substrates that could impair the adhesion or proper fitting of firestop

materials, including oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, and loose mill

scale.

2. Secure all pipe, conduit, cable and other items which penetrate firestop materials.

3. Provide masking and temporary covering, as required, to prevent contamination of

adjacent surfaces by firestop materials.

C. Installation – General

1. Installation of firestop systems shall be performed in strict accordance with

manufacturer’s detailed installation instructions and procedures.

2. Extend firestop material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate or opening to

be protected.

3. Protect firestop material from damage on surfaces subject to traffic.

D. Installation of Through–Penetration Firestop Systems

1. General

a. Install through–penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop systems

manufacturer’s written installation instructions and published drawings for

products and applications indicated.

b. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required

to support fill material during their application and in the position needed to

produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings

indicated.

1.) After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other

accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop system.

c. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the

following results.

1.) Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories

and penetrating items as required too achieve fire-resistance ratings

indicated.

2.) Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by

openings and penetrating items.

3.) For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing work, finish to

produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining surfaces.

2. Field Quality Control

a. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other

construction only after inspection and approval by code authorities.

b. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop

systems so they comply with requirements.

c. Inspection Agency: If required, owner will engage a qualified independent

inspecting agency to inspect through-penetration firestop systems and to prepare

test reports indicating whether through-penetration firestop systems comply with

or deviate from requirements.

3. Identification

a. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-

adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of

penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where

labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop

systems. Include the following information on labels:


230050 - 14

1.) The words: “Warning-Through-Penetration Firestop System-Do Not

Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage”.

2.) Contractor’s name, address and phone number.

3.) Through-penetration firestop systems designation of applicable testing and

inspecting agency.

4.) Date of installation.

5.) Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer’s name.

6.) Installer’s name.

4. Cleaning and Protection

a. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as work progresses by methods

and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration

firestop systems manufacturer and that do not damage materials in which openings

occur.

b. Provide Final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that

ensure through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at

time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or

deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-

penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce

through-penetration firestop systems complying with specified requirements.



Painting" and "Exterior Painting.".



C. Paint and finish all mechanical equipment and material which is not provided with a factory

applied finish, as follows:

1. Where exposed within Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Rooms or similar spaces.

2. Where exposed outdoors or above the roof.

3. Where exposed within finished areas of the building, unless otherwise indicated to be


D. No piping or ductwork shall be painted before testing and approval.


brushing and cleaning or otherwise prepped as recommended by the manufacturer, before finish

painting.

F. All painting shall be performed neatly and in accordance with best practice of the trade.

G. Where factory finished units are installed, obtain approval of finish color before units are

shipped.

H. Painting generally shall be as follows:

1. Exposed Work:


230050 - 15

a. One prime coat and two finished coats on non-galvanized piping, ducts,

equipment, specialties, access doors, manhole frames, covers, ladders, supports,

hangers and other ferrous metal work which is not galvanized.

b. Galvanized surfaces need not be painted.

2. Concealed Work:

a. Concealed ducts, pipes, equipment, hangers, and supports need not be painted.




touching-up.

4. Painting or protective coating for selected items is specified further in individual

Sections.


METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING Delanco MVC

230519 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Thermometers.

2. Gauges.

3. Test plugs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves.

B. Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers and gauges indicating manufacturer's number,

scale range, and location for each.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of thermometer and gauge, signed by product manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Ernst Gauge Co.

2. Eugene Ernst Products Co.


230519 - 2

3. Marsh Bellofram.

4. Miljoco Corp.

5. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.

6. Trerice, H. O. Co.

7. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

8. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.

9. Winters Instruments.


2.2 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Case: Die-cast aluminum or brass, 7 or 9 inches long.

B. Tube: Red reading, organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens.

C. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings.

D. Window: Plastic

E. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with

locking device

F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit

installation.

G. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of

1.5 percent of range.

H. Acceptable product: www.miljoco.com Model No. SX7 (7”) or SX9 (9”), Trerice BX9, Or

approved equal

2.3 THERMOWELLS

A. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.

B. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,

diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.

C. Acceptable product: www.miljoco.com Model No. W35B (3½” Stem), W62B (6” Stem for

insulation), Or approved equal

2.4 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gauges: Indicating-dial type complying with

ASME B40.100.

1. Case: Liquid and Dry type, stainless steel, 4-1/2-inch diameter.

2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.

http://www.miljoco.com/



230519 - 3

3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom-outlet type.

4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.

6. Pointer: Black metal.

7. Window: Acrylic.

8. Ring: Stainless steel

9. Accuracy: Grade 1A, plus or minus 1 percent of full scale.

10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.

11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.

B. Acceptable product: www.miljoco.com Model No. P4598L or PLF4098L, or Trerice

500XB, Or approved equal

C. Pressure-Gauge Fittings:

1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type. Model 1100

2. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-metal

disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure. Model 1200

2.5 TEST PLUGS

A. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed and

threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.

B. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

C. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.

1. Insert material for water service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR.

2. Insert material for water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be EPDM.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS

A. Install liquid-in-glass thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler

3.2 GAUGE APPLICATIONS

A. Install dry-case-type pressure gauges for discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.

B. Install liquid case-type pressure gauges at each pump. Utilize one gauges with valved tubing to

both sides of the pump.



230519 - 4

3.3 TEST PORTS

A. Install test ports at the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler

2. Inlet and outlet of each pump

3.4 INSTALLATIONS

A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

B. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees

where thermometers are indicated.

C. Install direct-mounting pressure gauges in piping tees with pressure gauge located on pipe at

most readable position.

D. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gauge.

E. Install test plugs in tees in piping.

F. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations.

G. Install thermometers and gauges adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and

maintenance for thermometers, gauges, machines, and equipment.

H. Adjust faces of thermometers and gauges to proper angle for best visibility.


GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING Delanco MVC

230523 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves.

2. Iron ball valves.

3. Bronze lift check valves.

4. Bronze swing check valves.

5. Balancing Valves.


1. Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.

2. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and

schedules.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.


230523 - 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single

manufacturer.

1. Grooved end valves shall be of the same manufacturer as the adjoining couplings.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

2. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooved ends, and weld ends.

3. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

4. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.

6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use

handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Hammond Valve.

2. Milwaukee Valve Company.

3. NIBCO INC.

4. Stockham

5. Victaulic Company

6. Nutech



230523 - 3

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system

pressures and temperatures. Valves used as the primary shutoff at boilers or pressure vessels

shall have the same or higher temperature and pressure ratings than the device they serve.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

E. Valve-End Connections:

1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. (Soldering and brazing methods

used to achieve required pressure-temperature ratings shall not damage internal valve

parts. Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F check valves and below 421 deg F

for ball valves.)

2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

F. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Description:


b. SWP Rating: 150 psig

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig

d. Body Design: Two piece.

e. Body Material: Bronze (NSF 61 UL Compliant)

f. Ends: Threaded.

g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

h. Stem: Bronze.

i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

j. Port: Full (no exceptions)

2. Acceptable Full Port Valves: Milwaukee Valve BA400 / BA450, NIBCO T585-70

(threaded); S585-70 (solder) Stockham T285-BR-R-70 (threaded) S285-BR-R-70S585-70

(solder) or the Victaulic Series P589 (Vic-Press ends).

2.4 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Description:



230523 - 4

b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.

c. Body Design: Vertical flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze. (NSF 61 Compliant)

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: Bronze (metal) Buna-N NBR, PTFE, or TFE. (non-metal)

2. Acceptable Valves: Milwaukee Valve 548T or 1548T, Nibco S-480 or T-480

2.5 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves

1. Description:



c. Body Design: T pattern

d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded or soldered.

f. Disc: Bronze (metal) Disc: NBR, PTFE, or TFE. (non-metal)

2. Acceptable Valves: Milwauke Valve 509 or 1509, Nibco S-433 or T-433, Stockham B-

316Y

2.6 BALANCING VALVES

A. Note: Hydronic control valves to be pressure independent with integral balancing capability.

Balancing valves below are in case there is an application without a control valve.

B. Automatic Flow Control Valves: Class 150, cast iron housing, stainless steel operating parts;

threaded connections for 2 inch and smaller, grooved connections for 2-1/2 inch and larger.

Factory set to automatically control flow rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while

compensating for system operating pressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves for

flow measuring equipment. Provide a metal identification tag with chain for each valve, factory

marked with the zone identification, valve model number, and rate flow in GPM.

Note: If specified, the Belimo pressure independent control valves have integral balancing

valves. Refer to Part 3 of Spec 230900 – Instrumentation and Control for HVAC.

Design:

1. Manufacturers: (autoflow balancing valves)

a. Griswold

b. Hayes Fluid Controls

c. Autoflow

d. FDI (Flow Design Inc)

e. Victaulic Company


2. The GPM for the automatic flow control valves shall be factory set and shall

automatically limit the rate of flow to within 5% of the specified amount.

3. For ½” - 2”, the flow cartridge shall be removable from the Y-body housing without the

use of special tools to provide access for regulator changeout, inspection and cleaning

without breaking the main piping. (Access shall be similar to that provided for removal


230523 - 5

of a Y-breaking the main piping. (Access shall be similar to that provided for removal of

a Y-strainer screen).

4. True operating ranges of 2 - 32 psig or 5 - 60 psig are required. The design flow should

be achieved at the minimum psi differential. A 50% safety factor applied to the lower

operating range is not acceptable.

5. Each valve shall have two P/T ports.

6. All automatic flow control devices shall be supplied by a single source and certified flow

tests, witnessed by a professional engineer, shall be available.

7. Five year product warranty and free first year cartridge exchange.

Construction:

1. The internal wear surfaces of the valve cartridge must be electroless nickel or stainless

steel.

2. The internal flow cartridge body shall have machine threads so the spring free height may

be compensated for without the use of fixed shims. A crimped sheet metal design is not

acceptable.

3. The internal flow cartridge shall be permanently marked with the GPM and spring range.

4. For ½” through 2” pipe sizes: An assembly shall consist of a brass Y-type body, integral

brass body ball valve and ‘O’ ring type union; Flow Design Model AC or equal.

5. for 2-1/2” and larger flanged connections: Ductile iron body suitable for mounting wafer

style between standard 150# or 300# flanges. The long flange bolts and nuts shall be

provided with each control valve. Flow Design Model WS or equal.

6. All valves shall be factory leak tested at 100 psi air under water.

Minimum ratings:

1. ½” through 2” pipe size: 400 PSIG at 250°F.

2. 2-1/2” through 14” pipe size: 600 PSIG at 250°F.

3. 16” through 30” pipe size: 250 PSIG at 250°F.

Flow Verification:

1. Where indicated on the plans, the differential pressure across the Automatic Flow Control

Valve shall be measured for flow verification and to determine the amount of system over

heading or under pumping.

2. The flow shall be verified by measuring the differential pressure across the coil served or

the wide-open temperature control valve and calculating the flow using the coil or valve

Cv.

Test Kit:

1. A differential pressure test kit shall be supplied to verify flow and measure overheading.

2. The kit shall consist of a 4-1/2” diaphragm gauge equipped with ten foot hoses and P/T

adapters all housed in a vinyl case.

3. Calibration shall be 0 - 35 PSID for 2-32 PSI spring range or 0 - 65 PSID for 5 - 60 PSI

range.

Installation:

1. Install automatic flow control valves on the return lines of coils as indicated on the plans.

Balancing valve on supply side is not acceptable.


230523 - 6

2. The standard ports and handles shall clear 1” thick insulation. Handle and port

extensions are required for over 1” thick insulation.

3. Install, on the supply side of coils, a Y-strainer with a brass blowdown valve with ¾”

hose end connection with cap and chain.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove

special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and

handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made

accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper

size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is

suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.


A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Unions and flanges for servicing and disconnect are not required in installations with grooved

mechanical joint couplings. (The couplings shall serve as disconnect points.)

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Center-Guided Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.

3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.


230523 - 7

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly,

2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type.

3. Balancing Valves: Autoflow type (coordinate with ATC as some control valves are

PICCV type. Provide for all baseboard, cabinet heaters, and HW duct coils using three-

way valves.)

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves

with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends or solder-joint.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Flanged or grooved ends.

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or grooved ends.

3.5 HEATING WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. Full

port.

2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125 bronze or nonmetallic disc.

B. Valves used as the primary shutoff at boilers or pressure vessels shall have the same or higher

temperature and pressure ratings than the device they serve.


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Delanco MVC

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and

equipment:


2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Metal framing systems.


5. Fastener systems.

6. Pipe stands.



1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze

hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fire-

protection piping.

3. Division 23 Section(s) "Metal and Nonmetal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and

Supports."


A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined

weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.





C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



2. Powder-actuated fastener systems.

3. Pipe positioning systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and

installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.

2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.

3. Fiberglass strut systems. Include Product Data for components.

4. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

2. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

3. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.

4. Empire Industries, Inc.

5. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.

6. Grinnell Corp.

7. MIRO Industries

8. Pipe Shields, Inc.


2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3

"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped. All metal to be galvanized.

C. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.



2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels

and other components.

B. Coatings: Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc.

b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.

c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.

d. MKT Fastening, LLC.

e. Powers Fasteners.


B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened

portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported

loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

b. Empire Industries, Inc.

c. Hilti, Inc.

d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.

e. MKT Fastening, LLC.

f. Powers Fasteners.

g. Or approved equal

2.6 PIPE STAND FABRICATION

A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-

resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece UV resistant polycarbonate resin base unit with

integral slot for pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

1. MIRO Industries: Model 1.5

2. Empire



3. National Pipe Hanger


C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece UV resistant polycarbonate resin base unit with

plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

1. MIRO Industries: Model 4-RAH

2. Empire

3. National Pipe Hanger



A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel

shapes.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to individual piping specifications for specific requirements of the type of hangers and

supports to utilize.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems

and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.



E. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Galvanized Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of

noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 to allow off-

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

3. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated

stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

4. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

5. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

6. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

7. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion

support and cast-iron floor flange.

8. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2

rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

F. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to

NPS 20.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,

NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

G. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

H. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.



7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

I. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation.

J. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not


K. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not


L. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.

M. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and

waste piping for plumbing fixtures.


A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building

structure.

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for

grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze

pipe hangers.



1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual

pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.

Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support

together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less

than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on

smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and

mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof

Accessories" for curbs.

G. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste

piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures"

for plumbing fixtures.

H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and

other accessories.

I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

K. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

L. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger

and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from

movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.



N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum

pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

O. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attaching clamps and spacers to piping and insulation.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. Maintain continuous insulation and

vapor barrier.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.


distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.5 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment

supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance

and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.



3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply

with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas

of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.8 SEISMIC SUPPORT

A. In structures designed to meet specific seismic events, all mechanical components shall be

supported by methods recognized to not interfere with the necessary movement of a structure.

All supports shall be designed to accommodate lateral force levels of a seismic event. All

conditions shall meet the seismic support requirements of the applicable building code. Refer to

specific specification relating to seismic restraint system. Seismic restraints are not required on:

1. Piping suspended by individual hangers twelve inches or less in length from top of pipe

to supporting structure.

2. Ducts which have a cross sectional area less than six square feet.

3. Piping in mechanical rooms less than 1-1/4".

4. Piping in building less than 2-1/2".


IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Delanco MVC

230553 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes mechanical identification materials and devices.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.

B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification

material and device.


A. Comply with ASME A13.1, “Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems” for lettering

size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.


230553 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS

A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 23 Sections. If

more than a single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer’s option. Subject

to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering mechanical identification materials

which may be incorporated in the work include but not limited to, the following:

1. Seton Name Plate Co. 800-243-6624

2. National Marker Co. 800-453-2727

3. Marking Services, Inc. 800-234-0135


B. Snap-On Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturers standard preprinted, semi-rigid, snap-on type.

Include color-coding according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Acceptable Product: www.seton.com Seton Identification Products “Set Mark”.

C. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturers standard preprinted, color coded, pressure-

sensitive, vinyl type with permanent adhesive.

1. Acceptable Product: www.seton.com Seton Identification Products “Opti-Code”.

D. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less than 6 inches: Full-band pipe markers, extending

360 degrees around pipe at each location.

E. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 inches and larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe

markers, at least 3 times letter height and of length required for label.

F. Lettering: Manufacturer’s standard preprinted captions as selected by Engineer.

1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accommodate both

directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

G. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer’s standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes:

1. Green: Cold-air supply.

2. Yellow: Hot-air supply.

3. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.

4. Terminology: Include direction of airflow; duct service such as supply, return, and

exhaust; duct origin, duct destination, and design airflow.

Acceptable Product: www.seton.com Seton Identification Products “Seton Code Markers -

Duct”.

H. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer’s standard color-coded, pressure sensitive, self-adhesive, vinyl tape,

at least 3 mils thick.

1. Width: 1-1/2 inches on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches; 2-1/2

inches for larger pipes.

http://www.seton.com/




230553 - 3

2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated

Acceptable Product: www.seton.com Seton Identification Products “Marking Tape”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.

3.2 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. This

shall include all new and existing piping.

B. Marker Type: Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on pipe insulation segment

where required for hot, non-insulated pipes.

C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 6 inches OD by one of the following

methods.

1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.

2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.

3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation.

4. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4 inch

wide, lapped a minimum of 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full

circumference of pipe.

D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 6 inches in diameter and larger by one of following

methods:

1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation.

2. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2

inches wide, lapped a minimum of 3 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full

circumference of pipe.

3. Strapped to pipe or insulation with manufacturer’s standard stainless-steel bands or

plastic cable ties.

E. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine

rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior non-

concealed locations according to the following:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or non-accessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.



230553 - 4

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaces at a maximum of 50-foot intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

area of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced

markers.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by

work of this or other Divisions.

B. Clean faces of identification devices.


TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Delanco MVC

230593 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:

1. Air Systems:

a. Variable-air-volume systems.

b. Constant volume systems

2. Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Constant-flow systems.

3. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings.

4. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.

5. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce

fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and

terminals, according to indicated quantities.

C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and

ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors,

and other pollutants.

D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high

air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn

from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

E. NC: Noise criteria.

F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable

results.


230593 - 2

G. RC: Room criteria.

H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

I. Smoke-Control System: An engineered system that uses fans to produce airflow and pressure

differences across barriers to limit smoke movement.

J. Smoke-Control Zone: A space within a building that is enclosed by smoke barriers and is a part

of a zoned smoke-control system.

K. Stair Pressurization System: A type of smoke-control system that is intended to positively

pressurize stair towers with outdoor air by using fans to keep smoke from contaminating the

stair towers during an alarm condition.

L. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a

closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

M. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.

N. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause

reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

O. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a

fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was

performance tested.

P. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

Q. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the

distribution system.

R. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.

S. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and

reporting TAB procedures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4copies of

evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified

in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed,

submit 4 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 90 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4

copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation"

Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.

D. Certified TAB Reports: Submit three copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on

approved forms certified by TAB firm.


230593 - 3


A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by AABC, NEBB, or TABB.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB

strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the

participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service

representatives; HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days'

advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

a. Submittal distribution requirements.

b. The Contract Documents examination report.

c. TAB plan.

d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.

e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the

following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB

reports.

2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified

and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and

Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems”. NEBB's "Procedural Standards

for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems”.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards

for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems or NEBB's

"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems,"

Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification”.

F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently

if required by instrument manufacturer.

1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the

name of party performing instrument calibration.


A. Project is being phased so the balancing will have to be phased also and then do a final TAB

when both phases are complete.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial

Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.


230593 - 4

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,

HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to

support and assist TAB activities.

B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and

times.

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's, NEBB or TABB

forms stating that AABC, NEBB or TABB will assist in completing requirements of the

Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee

includes the following provisions:

1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract

Documents.

2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation

limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover

conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

1. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-

control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required

by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing

devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and

equipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01 Section "Project Record

Documents."

D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions

for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and

assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.


230593 - 5

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data

to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or

unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system

effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under

conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the

factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201,

"Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design,"

Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,

cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,

such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and

fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are

accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment

operation.

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and

balancing.

J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased,

belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible

and their controls are connected and functioning.

L. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe

penetrations and other holes are sealed.

M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

N. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or

mixing fluid flows.

O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

P. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

R. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe

and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from

indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:


230593 - 6

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.

3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.

6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided.

8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained

in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air

Conditioning Systems", NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

of Environmental Systems" or SMACNA's TABB "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and

Balancing"] and this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and

balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.

Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent

identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-

control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with

required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air

dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.


230593 - 7

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-

air-volume systems as follows:

1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position

that simulates full-cooling load.

2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.

Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for

the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminal-unit manufacturer's

recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome

terminal-unit discharge system losses.

3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.

4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the

designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to

make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream

from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.

5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the

designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as

described for constant-volume air systems.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave

outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

6. Re-measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and

minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as

described for constant-volume air systems.

7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure

controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is

maintained at the most critical unit.

8. Record the final fan performance data.

3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end

of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct

variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the

general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check expansion tank liquid level.


230593 - 8

3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.

4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow.

5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at

fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal

valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.

7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so

motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.

8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement

pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read

pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for

differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow

and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the

pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve

until indicated water flow is achieved.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the

system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake

horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual

amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop

relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5

percent greater than indicated flow.

E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.

2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over

indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated

flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump

heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.


230593 - 9

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature.

2. Water flow rate.

3. Water pressure drop.

4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.

6. Airflow.

7. Air pressure drop.

B. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

3. Airflow.

4. Air pressure drop.

5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a pre-construction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.

2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate

information.

3. Check the refrigerant charge.

4. Check the condition of filters.

5. Check the condition of coils.

6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate drain trap.

7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.

8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements

taken. Report deficiencies.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is

to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.

1. New filters are installed.

2. Coils are clean and fins combed.

3. Drain pans are clean.

4. Fans are clean.

5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.

6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are

affected by the renovation work.

1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows and

determine the new fan, speed, filter, and coil face velocity.


230593 - 10

2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face

velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment

manufacturer.

3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow and water flow rates by more than 5

percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated airflow and water flow

rates. If 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.

4. Air balance each air outlet.

3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.

3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.

3.11 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'

balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to

facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to

HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and

balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems

found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each

building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.12 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in

three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and

balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Fan curves.

3. Manufacturers' test data.

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings

and Product Data.


230593 - 11

D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the

final report, as applicable:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of TAB firm.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated

values.

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.

f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.

g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present

each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.

3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

5. Terminal units.

6. Balancing stations.

7. Position of balancing devices.

F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.


230593 - 12

f. Unit arrangement and class.

g. Discharge arrangement.

h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

j. Number of belts, make, and size.

k. Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg .

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.

f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

i. Outside airflow in cfm.

j. Return airflow in cfm.

k. Outside-air damper position.

l. Return-air damper position.

m. Vortex damper position.

G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Coil type.

d. Number of rows.

e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.

f. Make and model number.

g. Face area in sq. ft.

h. Tube size in NPS.

i. Tube and fin materials.

j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm.

b. Average face velocity in fpm.

c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.

d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.


230593 - 13

h. Water flow rate in gpm.

i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

j. Entering-water temperature in deg F.

k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.

m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.

n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.

o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Arrangement and class.

g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.

g. Number of belts, make, and size.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

I. Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and

record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling unit number.

b. Location and zone.

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.

e. Duct size in inches.

f. Duct area in sq. ft.

g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.

h. Indicated velocity in fpm.

i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.

j. Actual average velocity in fpm.

k. Barometric pressure in psig.


230593 - 14

J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.


c. Test apparatus used.

d. Area served.

e. Air-terminal-device make.

f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.

g. Air-terminal-device type and model number.

h. Air-terminal-device size.

i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft.



b. Air velocity in fpm.

c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.

d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.

e. Final airflow rate in cfm.

f. Final velocity in fpm.

g. Space temperature in deg F.

K. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.


c. Room or riser served.

d. Coil make and size.

e. Flowmeter type.



b. Entering-water temperature in deg F.

c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.

e. Entering-air temperature in deg F.

f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

L. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and

include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Make and size.

e. Model and serial numbers.

f. Water flow rate in gpm.

g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.


230593 - 15

i. Pump rpm.

j. Impeller diameter in inches.

k. Motor make and frame size.

l. Motor horsepower and rpm.

m. Voltage at each connection.

n. Amperage for each phase.

o. Full-load amperage and service factor.

p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig.

b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.

c. Actual impeller size in inches.

d. Full-open flow rate in gpm.

e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.

f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.

g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.

h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.

i. Final water flow rate in gpm.

j. Voltage at each connection.

k. Amperage for each phase.

M. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.

3.13 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check

measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance

readings documented in the Final Report.

2. Randomly check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.

b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.

c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point.

d. Measure sound levels at two locations.

e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations.

f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.

g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.

B. Final Inspection:


230593 - 16

1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing

and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a

final inspection be made by Architect.

2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of

Architect.

3. Architect shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be

rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements

recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour

business day.

4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the

final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as

"FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total

measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be

considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report

and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.

7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall

contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in

accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the

final payment.

3.14 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that

balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and

winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak

summer and winter conditions.


HVAC INSULATION Delanco MVC

230700 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials:

a. Flexible Elastomeric.

b. Mineral fiber board and blanket.

2. Insulating cements.

3. Adhesives.

4. Sealants.

5. Mastics

6. Field-applied jackets.

7. Tapes.


1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation."

2. Division 23 Section "Metal [and Nonmetal] Ducts" for duct liners.

C. Insulate all hot water piping and all supply air ductwork.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and

jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation.

2. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access

panels.

3. Detail application at linkages of control devices.

4. Detail field application for each equipment type.


230700 - 2


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct

Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation

application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain

clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and

for space required for maintenance.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin

on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS


1. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall

be applied.

2. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

3. If applicable, products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable

chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

4. If applicable, insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as

acceptable according to ASTM C 795.


230700 - 3

B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSP

jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide from one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp

b. Johns Manville

c. Knauf Insulation

d. Owens Corning


2. Acceptable Product: www.knaufusa.com Knauf Insulation Model “Duct Wrap”

C. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.

b. Johns Manville.

c. Knauf Insulation.

d. Owens Corning.


2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied

jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

3. On cold systems, vapor barrier performance is extremely important. All penetrations of

the ASJ and exposed ends of insulation shall be sealed with vapor barrier mastic. If

humidities in excess of 90% are expected, the ASJ shall be protected with either a mastic

coating or a suitable vapor retarding outer jacket. Vapor seals at butt joints shall be

applied at every fourth pipe section joint and at each fitting to provide isolation of water

incursion.

4. Fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-formed fiberglass fittings, fabricated

sections of fiberglass pipe insulation, pipe and tank Insulation, blanket insulation, or

insulating cement. Thickness shall be equal to adjacent pipe insulation. Finish shall be

with pre-formed PVC fitting covers. PVC shall be rated for 25/50 flame/smoke spread

rating. Flanges, couplings and valve bonnets shall be covered with an oversized pipe

insulation section sized to provide the same insulation thickness as on the main pipe

section. An oversized insulation section shall be used to form a collar between the two

insulation sections with low-density blanket insulation being used to fill gaps. Jacketing

shall match that used on straight pipe sections. Rough cut ends shall be coated with

suitable weather or vapor resistant mastic as dictated by the system location and service.

On hot systems where fittings are to be left exposed, insulation ends should be beveled

away from bolts for easy access. On cold systems, particular care must be given to vapor

sealing the fitting cover or finish to the pipe insulation vapor barrier. All valve stems

shall be sealed with caulking to allow free movement of the stem but provide a seal

against moisture incursion.

5. Acceptable Product: www.knaufusa.com Knauf Insulation Model “1000 Pipe

Insulation”

D. Flexible Elastomeric (Piping): Expanded flexible elastomeric closed-cell foam tubular

materials with manufactured pre-slit and self-sealing closure system complying with ASTM C

534, type 1, Grade 1.

http://www.knaufusa.com/

http://www.knaufusa.com/


230700 - 4

1. Products: Subject compliance with requirements, provide from the following or

approved equal.

a. Armacell LLC

b. K-Flex USA

c. Rubatex


2. Acceptable Product: www.armacell.com Armacell LLC, Model “SS Self-Seal Pipe

Insulation”.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to

insulation manufacturers specifications for appropriate adhesives to utilize.

2.3 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:


2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.

4. Color: White or gray.



B. FSK, ASJ and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:


2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F

4. FSK Jacket Color: Aluminum.

5. ASJ Jacket Color: White.



C. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

http://www.armacell.com/


230700 - 5

2.4 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,


1. Width: 3 inches

2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;


1. Width: 3 inches.

2. Thickness: 6.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

2.5 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015

inch thick, wide with wing seal.

2. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch

thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for

capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of

insulation indicated.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy, 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel, or 0.062-inch

soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

a. See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming

manufacturers. Retain

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other

conditions affecting performance of insulation application.


230700 - 6

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with

requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required

for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system

schedules.

B. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

C. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

D. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

E. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.


230700 - 7

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of

strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to

maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar

to butt joints.

O. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:




4. Manholes.

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire

damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper

sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping".

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:


230700 - 8

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from

same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular

surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is

uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt

each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with

adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same



diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,

valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with

insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same



diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating

cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and

replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable

insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor

barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.

Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe

insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for

above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the

mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation

facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION."

Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,

and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the

connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing

sealant.

3.6 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten

bands without deforming insulation materials.


230700 - 9

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple

longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation

material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.




adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.



available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections

of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation

materials with wire or bands.



available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to

valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation.


E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation

pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as

follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16

inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.


230700 - 10

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.

f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation

facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with

insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure

laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.

Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier

mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped

pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.

Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the

insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.

At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section

for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually

mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with

6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of

stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.7 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate

openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.




adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as

pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive

to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.



230700 - 11

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when

available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet

insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow

valve operation without disturbing insulation.


4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to

surface being insulated.

3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at

end joints.

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

3.9 FINISHES

A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket

Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09

painting Sections.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket

material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of

insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.



B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Engineer, by removing field-applied jacket and

insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be


230700 - 12

limited to two locations for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule,

General" Article.

2. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Engineer, by removing field-

applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of

inspection shall be limited to two locations for each type of equipment defined in the

"Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion

adequate to determine compliance.

3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing

field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent

of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of

threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers,

two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations

of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule,

General" Article.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements.

3.11 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, supply and outdoor air.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007. If duct liner does not meet the minimum requirements

stipulated with the energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007, additional exterior

insulation shall be provided.

2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.


5. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.



3.12 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Supply air ducts on the warm side of the building insulation.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.

2. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches.

3. Number of Layers: One.



B. Service: Outside-air ducts the warm side of the building insulation



230700 - 13

2. Thickness: 2 inches.




C. Service: Exhaust Air and Relief Air ducts between the motorized damper and outside

termination point. (concealed)


2. Thickness: 2 inches.




3.13 PIPE INSULATION

A. Field-applied pipe jacket: Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at

longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal

end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket

with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following

systems, materials, and equipment:



3. Fire-suppression piping.

4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.

7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.

3.14 PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Condensate drain piping.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F.

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric (piping).

3. Insulation Thickness: 1”

4. Field-Applied Jacket: None.


6. Finish: None.

B. Service: Heating hot-water supply and return.


2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiberglass, with jacket.


a. Piping 1-1/2” and less – 1.5” thick

b. Piping 2 ” to 4” – 2” thick


230700 - 14

c. Piping 5” to up” – 2” thick


5. Vapor Retarder Required: No.

6. Finish: None.

C. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping.


2. Insulation Material: Glass Mineral Wool with jacket or Flexible elastomeric (piping).


a. Piping 2” and less – 1 ½” thick

b. Piping 2½ ” to 3” – 2” thick

c. Piping 4” to up 6” – 2” thick

4. Field-Applied Jacket: None.


6. Finish: Paint exterior to protect from Sun’s UV light.


COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Delanco MVC

230800 - 1

SECTION 230800 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. DLB “COMMISSIONING PLAN - DPMC – THIRD PARTY CX SERVICES T0548-01

NEW MVC DELANCO FACILITY” dated 6/6/16 is procedural document included as

APPENDIX C. All performance requirements for the bidding of the project are contained in

the project plans and specifications.

C. SUMMARY

1. Section includes commissioning process requirements for the following HVAC&R

systems, assemblies, and equipment:

2. Cooling generation systems, including direct-expansion systems

3. Heat generation systems, including hot-water boilers.

4. Energy supply systems, including gas supply.

5. Distribution systems, including air distribution (heating and cooling) systems, hot-

water distribution systems, exhaust systems, and air-handling units

6. Terminal and packaged units, including electric unit heaters, baseboard heaters, finned

tube radiation heaters, and variable air volume units.

7. Controls and instrumentation, including alarm and control points

8. Systems testing and balancing verification, including heating-water piping systems,

supply-air systems, return-air systems, and exhaust-air systems.

D. Related Requirements:

1. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for general commissioning

process requirements and Commissioning Coordinator responsibilities.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. DDC: Direct digital controls.

C. HVAC&R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration.


230800 - 2

D. "Systems," "Subsystems," "Equipment," and "Components": Where these terms are used

together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and

components.

E. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For BAS and HVAC&R Testing Technician.

B. Construction Checklists: See related Sections for technical requirements for the following

construction checklists:

1. Vibration and seismic controls for HVAC&R piping and equipment.

2. Instrumentation and control for HVAC&R.

3. Refrigerant piping.

4. Metal ducts and accessories.

5. Fans.

6. Particulate air filtration.

7. Air-handling units.

8. Heating-water piping and accessories.

9. Boilers

10. Pumps


A. BAS Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform BAS construction checklist

verification tests, construction checklist verification test demonstrations, commissioning tests,

and commissioning test demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications:

1. Experience installing, servicing, and operating systems manufactured by approved

manufacturer.

B. HVAC&R Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform HVAC&R construction

checklist verification tests, construction checklist verification test demonstrations,

commissioning tests, and commissioning test demonstrations shall have the following

minimum qualifications:

1. Experience installing, servicing, and operating systems manufactured by approved

manufacturer.

C. Testing Equipment and Instrumentation Quality and Calibration: For test equipment and

instrumentation required to perform HVAC&R commissioning work, perform the following:


230800 - 3

1. Submit test equipment and instrumentation list. For each equipment or instrument,

identify the following:

a. Equipment/instrument identification number.

b. Planned commissioning application or use.

c. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number.

d. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the

equipment and instrumentation.

2. Test equipment and instrumentation shall meet the following criteria:

a. Capable of testing and measuring performance within the specified acceptance

criteria.

b. Be calibrated at the manufacturer's recommended intervals with current

calibration tags permanently affixed to the instrument being used.

c. Be maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout the duration

of use on this Project.

d. Be recalibrated/repaired if dropped or damaged in any way since last

calibrated.

D. Proprietary Test Instrumentation and Tools:

1. Equipment Manufacturer's Proprietary Instrumentation and Tools: For installed

equipment included in the commissioning process, test instrumentation and tools

manufactured or prescribed by equipment manufacturer to service, calibrate, adjust,

repair, or otherwise work on its equipment or required as a condition of equipment

warranty, perform the following:

a. Submit proprietary instrumentation and tools list. For each instrument or tool,

identify the following:

1) Instrument or tool identification number.

2) Equipment schedule designation of equipment for which the instrument

or tool is required.

3) Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number.

4) Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate

the instrument or tool, where appropriate.

b. Include a separate list of proprietary test instrumentation and tools in the

operation and maintenance manuals.

c. HVAC&R proprietary test instrumentation and tools become the property of

Owner at the time of Substantial Completion.


230800 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Certify that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated,

and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved Shop

Drawings and submittals.

B. Certify that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and

calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved Shop

Drawings and submittals, and that pretest set points have been recorded.

C. Certify that TAB procedures have been completed and that TAB reports have been submitted,

discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.

D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested according to

approved test procedures (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual

position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).

E. Measure capacities and effectiveness of systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and

components, including operational and control functions to verify compliance with acceptance

criteria.

F. Test systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components operating modes,

interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and

response according to acceptance criteria.

G. Construction Checklists: Prepare and submit detailed construction checklists for HVAC&R

systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.

1. Contributors to the development of construction checklists shall include, but are not

limited to, the following:

a. HVAC&R systems and equipment installers.

b. TAB technicians.

c. HVAC&R instrumentation and controls installers.

H. Perform tests using design conditions, whenever possible.

1. Simulated conditions may, with approval of Architect, be imposed using an artificial

load when it is impractical to test under design conditions. Before simulating

conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set

simulated conditions as directed by Commissioning Coordinator and document

simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return configurations and

settings to normal operating conditions.


230800 - 5

2. Commissioning test procedures may direct that set points be altered when simulating

conditions is impractical.

3. Commissioning test procedures may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal

generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are impractical.

I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R

system, document the deficiency and report it to Owner. After deficiencies are resolved,

reschedule tests.

J. If seasonal testing is specified, complete appropriate initial performance tests and

documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

K. Coordinate schedule with, and perform the following activities at the direction of,

Commissioning Coordinator.

L. Comply with construction checklist requirements, including material verification, installation

checks, start-up, and performance tests requirements specified in Sections specifying HVAC

systems and equipment.

M. Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to complete and document the

following:

1. Performance tests.

2. Demonstration of a sample of performance tests.

3. Commissioning tests.

4. Commissioning test demonstrations.

3.2 TAB COMMISSIONING TESTS

A. TAB Verification:

1. Prerequisites: Completion of "Examination" Article requirements and correction of

deficiencies, as specified in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for

HVAC."

2. Completion of "Preparation" Article requirements for preparation of a TAB plan that

includes strategies and step-by-step procedures, and system-readiness checks and

reports, as specified in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for

HVAC."

3. Scope: HVAC&R air systems and hydronic piping systems.

4. Purpose: Differential flow relationships intended to maintain air pressurization

differentials between the various areas of Project.

5. Conditions of the Test:


230800 - 6

a. Commissioning Test Demonstration Sampling Rate: As specified in

"Inspections" Article in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for

HVAC."

b. Systems operating in full heating mode with minimum outside-air volume.

c. Systems operating in full cooling mode with minimum outside-air volume.

d. For measurements at air-handling units with economizer controls; systems

operating in economizer mode with 100 percent outside air.

6. Acceptance Criteria:

a. Under all conditions, rechecked measurements comply with "Inspections"

Article in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

b. Additionally, no rechecked measurement shall differ from measurements

documented in the final report by more than two times the tolerances allowed.

c. Under all conditions, where the Contract Documents indicate a differential in

airflow between supply and exhaust and/or return in a space, the differential

relationship shall be maintained.


AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS Delanco MVC

230900 � 1

DPMC NO. T0487�00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 230900 – AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS

PART 1 � GENERAL




1.2 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS

A. The control system shall be a full native BACnet protocol system. The use of LonWorks,

Modbus, or proprietary communication systems will not be approved for use.

B. The control system shall consist of a high�speed, peer�to�peer network of DDC controllers and

a web�based operator interface. Depict each mechanical system and building floor plan by a

point�and�click graphic. A web server with a network interface card shall gather data from this

system and generate web pages accessible through a conventional web browser on each PC

connected to the network. Operators shall be able to perform all normal operator functions

through the web browser interface. The Owner shall provide an IP address to allow this system

to be accessed, configured, and programmed via the internet.

C. The ATC supplier of the control system shall be responsible for a complete and operational

control system and shall coordinate the connection requirements to all equipment provided

with integral controllers. The ATC supplier shall be responsible for supplying and mounting of

all controls whether done in the field or in the factory. The decision to have controls for the

HVAC units mounted in the factory shall be up to the BAS subcontractor. All costs associated

with supplying and installation of these controls shall be the responsibility of the BAS

subcontractor.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following are definitions or abbreviations used in this section.

B. The following are definitions or abbreviations used in this section.

1. ATC Automatic Temperature Controls

2. BACnet: An ASHRAE endorsed control network technology platform for designing and

implementing interoperable control devices and networks.

3. BAS Building Automation System (control system herein specified)

4. BAS Contractor: The Contractor or Subcontractor responsible for the controls

specified in this specification section.

5. Contractor: The Prime Contractor responsible for all work of this section.


230900 � 2

6. DDC: Direct digital control.

7. I/O: Input/output.

8. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.

9. PC: Personal computer.

10. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.

11. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.

12. VFD: Variable Frequency Drive (also called a Variable Frequency Controller)

1.4 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control

components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory�wired controls.

B. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete building automation system (BAS)

including all necessary hardware and all operating and applications software necessary to

perform the control sequences of operation as called for in this specification. All front end

components of the system – workstation and software, shall have the capability to

communicate to systems utilizing BACnet protocol, as defined by ASHRAE Standard 135�

2007. Items of work, as required, are included as follows:

1. Provide all necessary hardware and software to meet the system’s functional

specifications. Provide Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for

every controller in system, including unitary controllers.

2. Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings, and software

configuration from project design data. Submit to Engineer prior to commencement of

work.

3. Implement the detailed design for all system�standard analog and binary objects,

distributed control and system databases, graphic displays, logs, and management reports

based on control descriptions, logic drawings, configuration data, and bid documents.

4. Design, provide, and install all equipment cabinets, panels, data communication network

cables needed, and all associated hardware.

5. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all operator terminals and

peripheral devices, such as printers, etc., supplied under this section.

6. Provide complete manufacturer’s specifications for all items that are supplied. Include

vendor name of every item supplied.

7. Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job site to assist in all phases of

system installation, startup, and commissioning.

8. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program.

9. Provide as�built documentation, operator’s terminal software, diagrams, and all other

associated project operational documentation (such as technical manuals) on approved

media, the sum total of which accurately represents the final system including panel and

circuit numbers.

10. An icon shall be included as a Desktop ‘shortcut’ which will allow quick access to all the

‘as built’ control drawings, sequences of operation and bill of materials. This file will be

accessed as a batch of PDF files easily accessible and readable at the PC. This will allow

the local user, a third party service company or the BAS Contractor to access and look up

the technical information regarding any controlled system and its intended sequence.


230900 � 3

1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Comply with the following performance requirements:

1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data

within 10 seconds.

2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data

within 8 seconds.

3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of

a binary object and device reaction.

4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or

workstation within six seconds.

5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple

workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.

6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds,

but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.

7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan

and update process values and outputs at least once per second.

8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured

variables within tolerances as follows:

a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.

b. Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.

c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale.

d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.

e. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.

f. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F.

g. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F.

h. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent.

i. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale.

j. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.

k. Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale.

l. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01�inch wg.

m. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1�inch wg.

n. Carbon Monoxide: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.

o. Carbon Dioxide: Plus or minus 50 ppm.

p. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Draft Submittal: A finalized draft submittal shall be reviewed with the design engineer at the

engineer’s office prior to the formal submission. All information requested below along with a

working sample control system on a lap�top computer shall be brought for review.

B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate

dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for

materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.

1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity,

manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation

equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors,

actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment.


230900 � 4

2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator

interface, color graphics, and other third�party applications.

3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device,

manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence

of operation including schematic diagram.

C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

1. Drawings shall be submitted in the following standard sizes: 11” x 17” (ANSI B).

2. Drawings shall be provided, unlocked, on CD�ROM in CAD .dwg, .vsd, or .pdf formats.

3. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number.

4. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control

devices.


6. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.

7. Written description of sequence of operation.

8. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.

9. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics.

10. DDC System Hardware:

a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers.

b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware.

c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk

data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit

locations.

11. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data

(connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.

12. Controlled Systems:

a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and

control elements graphically shown, with wiring.

b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including

bases and special construction.

c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.

d. Points list.

D. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system

component complies with ASHRAE 135.

E. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data

files.

3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.

F. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems

revisions or monitoring and control revisions. The full suite of programming tools for the

control system of the successful bidder must be provided with no exceptions.


230900 � 5

G. Field quality�control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01

Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and

compressed�air station.

2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and

devices.

3. Keyboard illustrations and step�by�step procedures indexed for each operator function.

4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration

tolerances.

5. Calibration records and list of set points.


A. General

1. The BAS Contractor’s primary business shall be the engineering, programming,

installation and service of total integrated Building Management Systems.

2. The BAS Contractor shall be capable of supplying complete maintenance and support

services on a 24 hour, 7�day�a�week basis.

3. The Building Management System architecture shall consist of the products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of Building Management Systems, and

shall be the manufacturer’s latest standard of design at the time of bid.

4. All controls, other than relays, transformers and panels shall be the product of the same

manufacturer.

5. The Building Management System Contractor primary business shall regularly engaged

in the engineering, programming, installation and service of total integrated Building

Management Systems. Wholesale distributors, Dealers and/or contractors whose Primary

business in not that of Automatic Temperature Controls are not acceptable.

6. The BAS contractor shall have an established 24�hour emergency service organization.

A dedicated telephone number shall be provided to the owner for requesting emergency

service. A maximum of eight hour, electronic service technician on site response time

shall be guaranteed by the BAS contractor.

7. Engineered Drawings: All control drawings shall be generated using Computer Aided

Drafting or MS Visio. All project drawings shall be supplied to the owner on an MS�

DOS formatted diskette using the DXF file format, .vsd file format or Adobe .PDF

format upon project completion. Further additions or changes to the BAS shall be

reflected upon the CAD/MS Visio drawings.

B. Workplace Safety And Hazardous Materials

1. Provide a safety program in compliance with the Contract Documents.

2. The BAS Contractor shall have a corporately certified comprehensive Safety

Certification Manual and a designated Safety Supervisor for the Project.


230900 � 6

3. The Contractor and its employees and subtrades comply with federal, state and local

safety regulations.

4. The Contractor shall ensure that all subcontractors and employees have written safety

programs in place that covers their scope of work, and that their employees receive the

training required by the OSHA have jurisdiction for at least each topic listed in the

Safety Certification Manual.

5. The Contractor shall sign and date a safety certification form prior to any work being

performed, stating that the Contractors’ company is in full compliance with the Project

safety requirements.

6. The Contractor’s safety program shall include written policy and arrangements for the

handling, storage and management of all hazardous materials to be used in the work in

compliance with the requirements of the AHJ at the Project site.

7. The Contractor’s employees and subcontractor’s staff shall have received training as

applicable in the use of hazardous materials and shall govern their actions accordingly.

C. Quality Management Program

1. Designate a competent and experienced employee to provide BAS Project Management.

The designated Project Manger shall be empowered to make technical, scheduling and

related decisions on behalf of the BAS Contractor. At minimum, the Project Manager

shall:

a. Manage the scheduling of the work to ensure that adequate materials, labor and

other resources are available as needed.

b. Manage the financial aspects of the BAS Contract.

c. Coordinate as necessary with other trades.

d. Be responsible for the work and actions of the BAS workforce on site.

D. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative

who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

F. Tools, Testing and Calibration Equipment: The control system supplier shall provide all tools,

testing, and calibration equipment necessary to ensure reliability and accuracy of the control

system.

G. The Control Contractor shall have an established local branch office staffed with trained

engineers, technicians and service mechanics within 50 miles of project site.

H. Bids by wholesalers, dealers or any other firm not authorized by the DDC System

manufacturer to design, install and service the specified Direct Digital / Building Management

Control Systems shall not be acceptable.


A. Factory�Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated

to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment

manufacturer.


230900 � 7

B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans

and room details before installation.

B. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator

workstation.

C. Coordinate with other related trades (airside/waterside) where work coincides.

1.10 WARRANTY & SERVICE CONTRACT

A. A one (1) year service contract shall be included for the project, this service contract shall start

at time of system acceptance. As a minimum the contract shall provide:

1. Eight (8) hours of remedial customer training to be scheduled at the mid�point and end of

contract.

2. Four (4) – 8 hour quarterly visits for scheduled calibration and adjustment of controls

3. A fixed labor rate and parts/material multiplier for project provided controllers and repair

components not covered under the warranty.

4. Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, labor, associated travel, and expenses for a period

of one year from completion of system and owner acceptance.

B. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide on�site or

off�site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the vendor. The maximum ac�

ceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 8 hours.

C. This warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and software.

D. The warranty period shall include all rescheduling, setpoint changing, and reprogramming from

the supplier office via internet connection.

1.11 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL

A. All project�developed software and documentation shall become the property of the owner.

These include but are not limited to:

1. Project graphic images and generation software.

2. Record drawings in AutoCAD format and as PDFs.

3. Project database

4. Project�specific application programming code

5. The full suite of programming tools and associated licenses

6. All documentation.


230900 � 8

PART 2 � PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


products that may be incorporated into the Work include:

1. Automated Logic Corporation, ALC�NYNJ (973) 633�7730

2. TAC Andover Controls, Jersey State Controls, Inc (732) 206�0010

3. Trane Controls, Trane New Jersey (973) 887 8800

4. Honeywell Building Solutions Honeywell (973) 455�2073


B. Substitutions may be permitted by the Engineer or Owner, if, in his opinion, the requirements

of the proposed substitution comply with the requirements specified for the material, article or

piece of equipment; however, the Engineer or Owner is not required to permit substitution

pursuant to the case of Whitten Corporation vs. Paddock, Incorporated, United States District

Court, Massachusetts, April 12, 1974, affirmed by the Federal First Circuit Court, December

14, 1974, and the United States Supreme Court, 1988.

2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface

equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers

operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token�passing network and programmed

to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via

dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device

depicted by point�and�click graphics.

2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Operator Workstation: The Owner will use one of their administrative computers with internet

explorer or other browser software. Provide the software on this computer. Other users shall be

able to access the system using the Internet.

1. The application software shall reside on a virtual server.

2. Application Software:

a. I/O capability from operator station.

b. System security for each operator via software password and access levels.

c. Automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures.

d. Database creation and support.

e. Automatic and manual database save and restore.

f. Dynamic color graphic displays with up to 10 screen displays at once.

g. Custom graphics generation and graphics library of HVAC equipment and

symbols.

h. Alarm processing, messages, and reactions.

i. Trend logs retrievable in spreadsheets and database programs. Trend logs shall be

retrievable up to one year with less than ten clicks.

j. Alarm and event processing.

k. Object and property status and control.


230900 � 9

l. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power.

m. Custom report development.

n. Utility and weather reports.

o. Workstation application editors for controllers and schedules.

p. Maintenance management.

3. Custom Application Software:

B. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile,

random�access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment;

and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from

other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to

operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand�alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions


a. Global communications.

b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.

c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing.

e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and

controlled environment.

3. Standard Application Programs:

a. Electric Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time

scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on�off control with

differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control, DDC with

fine tuning, and trend logging.

b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply�air reset, and enthalpy

switchover.

c. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and

messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy calculations; run�time

totalization; and security access.

d. Custom Reports. Operator shall be able to create custom reports that retrieve data,

including archived trend data, from the system, that analyze data using common

algebraic calculations, and that present results in tabular or graphical format.

Reports shall be launched from the operator interface.

e. Remote communications.

f. Maintenance management.

g. Units of Measure: Inch�pound and SI (metric).

4. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or

diagnostic terminal unit.

C. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable,

nonvolatile, read�only memory; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or

upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand�alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions


a. Global communications.

b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.

c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.


230900 � 10

3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or

diagnostic terminal unit.

D. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect

points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.

1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on�off signals without external power.

2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second.

3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low�voltage (0� to 10�V dc), current (4 to 20 mA),

or resistance signals.

4. Binary Outputs: Provide on�off or pulsed low�voltage signal, selectable for normally

open or normally closed operation with three�position (on�off�auto) override switches

and status lights.

5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0� to 10�V dc) or current

(4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two�position (auto�manual) switch, or manually

adjustable potentiometer.

6. Tri�State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three�point,

floating�type electronic actuators.

7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.

E. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current�limiting type or overcurrent protection;

limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output

current and voltage requirements and be full�wave rectifier type with the following:

1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.

2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100�mic.sec. response time for 50

percent load changes.

3. Built�in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent

overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.

2.4 BUILDING CONTROLLERS

A. General. Provide Building Controllers to provide the performance specified in section 1 of this

division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements.

1. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, stand�

alone, microprocessor based Building Controllers to manage the global strategies

described in System software section.

2. The Building Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system,

database, and programming requirements.

3. The controller shall provide a communications port for connection of the Portable

Operators Terminal using Point to Point BACnet physical/data link layer protocol or a

connection to the inter�network.

4. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output

communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point

information and allow central monitoring and alarms.

5. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock.

6. Data shall be shared between networked Building Controllers.

7. The Building Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory

circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall:

a. Assume a predetermined failure mode.


230900 � 11

b. Generate an alarm notification.

8. BACnet. The Building Controller shall use the Read (Initiate) and Write (Execute)

Services as defined in BIBBS:

B. Communications. Each Building Controller shall reside on a BACnet inter�network using the

ISO 8802�3 (Ethernet) or ARCNET (ASTM 878.1) Physical/Data Link layer protocol. Each

Building Controller shall also perform routing to a network of Custom Application and

Application Specific Controllers.] [Optional – Each Building Controller shall perform

communications to a network of Custom Application and Application Specific Controllers

using LonTalk FTT�10 and LonMark profiles.]

C. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in an enclosure, and shall be rated for

operation at 0 C to 50 C [32 F to 120 F].

D. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. All

wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a

termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

E. Memory. The Building Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in

the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.

F. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal

voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut�down below 80% nominal voltage.

2.5 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A. General. Provide Custom Application Controllers to provide the performance specified in

section 1 of this division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements.

1. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, stand�

alone, microprocessor based Building Controllers to manage the local strategies

described in System software section.

2. The Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database,

and programming requirements.

3. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock.

4. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output

communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point

information and allow central monitoring and alarms.

5. The Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If

an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall:

a. Assume a predetermined failure mode.

b. Generate an alarm notification.

6. Custom application controllers shall communicate using BACnet.

B. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

1. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA 1 type enclosures,

and shall be rated for operation at 0 C to 50 C [32 F to 120 F].

2. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 type

waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at �40 C to 70 C [�40 F to 158 F].


230900 � 12

C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. All low

voltage wiring connections shall be made such that the controller electronics can be removed

and/or replaced without disconnection of field termination wiring.

D. Memory. The Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of

a power loss for at least 72 hours.

E. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal

voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage.

2.6 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS

A. General. Application specific controllers (ASC) are microprocessor�based DDC controllers,

which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of

equipment. They are not fully user programmable, but are customized for operation within the

confines of the equipment they are designed to serve.

1. Each ASC shall be capable of stand�alone operation and shall continue to provide control

functions without being connected to the network.

2. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system.

B. Environment. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 type

waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at �40 C to 65 C [�40 F to 150 F].

2. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA 1 type rated

enclosures. Controllers located where not to be disturbed by building activity (such as

above ceiling grid), may be provided with plenum�rated enclosures and non�enclosed

wiring connections for plenum cabling. All controllers shall be rated for operation at 0 C

to 50 C [32 F to 120 F].

C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power and communications. All wiring

connections shall be clearly labeled and made to be field removable.

D. Memory. The Application Specific Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming

information in the event of a power loss for at least 90 days.

E. Immunity to Power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal

voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80%.

F. Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC power

consumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type.

G. Application Specific Controllers shall communicate using the BACnet communications

protocol. Application Specific Controllers shall communicate using BACnet.

2.7 COMMUNICATIONS

A. This project shall comprise a network utilizing BACnet for communications between Building

Controllers and PC Workstation.


230900 � 13

B. Each BACnet device shall operate on the BACnet physical/data link protocols specified for

that device as defined earlier in this section.

C. All Building Controllers shall have a communications port for connections with the operator

interfaces. This may be either an RS�232 port for Point to Point connection or a network

interface node for connection to the Ethernet or ARCNET network.

D. Remote operator interface via an internet or world wide web shall allow for communication

with any and all controllers on this network.

E. Communications services over the internetwork shall result in operator interface and value

passing that is transparent to the internetwork architecture as follows:

1. Connection of an operator interface device to any one controller on the internetwork will

allow the operator to interface with all other controllers as if that interface were directly

connected to the other controllers. Data, status information, reports, system software,

custom programs, etc., for all controllers shall be available for viewing and editing from

any one controller on the internetwork.

2. All database values (i.e., points, software variable, custom program variables) of any one

controller shall be readable by any other controller on the internetwork. This value

passing shall be automatically performed by a controller when a reference to a point

name not located in that controller is entered into the controller's database. An

operator/installer shall not be required to set up any communications services to perform

internetwork value passing.

F. The time clocks in all controllers shall be automatically synchronized daily.

2.8 INPUT / OUTPUT INTERFACE

A. Hard�wired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through Building, Custom, or

Application Specific Controllers.

B. All input points and output points shall be protected such that shorting of the point to itself,

another point, or ground will cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points

shall be protected from voltage up to 24V of any duration, such that contact with this voltage

will cause no damage to the controller.

C. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of on/off signals from remote devices. The binary

inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 ma to be compatible with commonly

available control devices.

D. Pulse accumulation input points. This type of point shall conform to all the requirements of

Binary Input points, and also accept up to 2 pulses per second for pulse accumulation, and shall

be protected against effects of contact bounce and noise.

E. Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low voltage (0�10 Vdc), current (4�20 ma), or

resistance signals (thermistor, RTD). Analog inputs shall be compatible with, and field

configurable to commonly available sensing devices.

F. Binary outputs shall provide for on/off operation, or a pulsed low voltage signal for pulse width

modulation control. [Binary outputs on custom and building controllers shall have 3�position


230900 � 14

(on/off/auto) override switches and status lights.] Outputs shall be selectable for either

normally open or normally closed operation.

G. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shall

provide either a 0�10 Vdc or a 4�20 ma signal as required to provide proper control of the

output device. [Analog outputs on building or custom programmable controllers shall have

status lights, a 2�position (auto/manual) switch, and manually adjustable potentiometer for

manual override.]

2.9 UNITARY CONTROLLERS

A. Unitized, capable of stand�alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating

system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the

application.

1. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share

real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform

scheduling with real�time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system

and report failures.

2. Enclosure: NEMA 1 rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F.

3. Enclosure: Waterproof rated for operation at 40 to 150 deg F (if located in wet location)

2.10 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as

required.

B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:

1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point.

2. Wire: Twisted, shielded�pair cable.

3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by

temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.

4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 72 inches long; use where prone to temperature

stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft.

5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless�steel socket with minimum insertion

length of 2�1/2 inches.

6. Outside�Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.

7. Room Security Sensors: Stainless�steel cover plate with insulated back and security

screws.

8. Room sensors (where setpoint adjustment is required) shall utilize a set point slider

located at bottom of sensor. Slider shall be a potentiometer, wired to input of DDC

controller that allows for linear input voltage offset. The DDC controller shall be

programmed to reset space temperature set point by slider position – voltage reset

(usually set to +/� 3 deg f but adjustable by programmer/User).

C. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Veris


230900 � 15

b. MAMAC Systems, Inc.

c. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.

d. Vaisala.


2. Accuracy: 5 percent full range with linear output.

3. Room Sensor Range: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity.

4. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

5. Duct Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with element guard and mounting

plate.

6. Outside�Air Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with mounting enclosure,

suitable for operation at outdoor temperatures.

7. Duct and Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to 100 percent

relative humidity.

D. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:

1. Manufacturers:

a. MAMAC Systems, Inc.

b. Vaisala.

c. Veris


2. Static�Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected

input, and temperature compensated.

a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.

b. Output: 4 to 20 mA.

c. Building Static�Pressure Range: 0� to 0.25�inch wg

d. Duct Static�Pressure Range: 0� to 5�inch wg

3. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless�steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service;

minimum 150�psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

4. Water Differential�Pressure Transducers: Stainless�steel diaphragm construction,

suitable for service; minimum 150�psig operating pressure and tested to 300�psig; linear

output 4 to 20 mA.

5. Differential�Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot�duty rating and with

suitable scale range and differential.

6. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for

system; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

2.11 STATUS SENSORS

A. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential�pressure switch with pilot�duty rating and with

adjustable pressure�differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump.

B. Voltage Transmitter (100� to 600�V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single�loop, self�powered

transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full�scale accuracy.

C. Power Monitor: 3�phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and

current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4� to 20�mA kW output, with

maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor.

D. Current Switches: Self�powered, solid�state with adjustable trip current, selected to match

current and system output requirements.


230900 � 16

E. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2� to

10�V dc, feedback signal.

2.12 HUMIDITY SENSORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. MAMAC Systems, Inc.

2. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.

3. Veris


B. Humidity Sensors

1. Duct Humidity Transmitter shall be capable of providing continuous measurement of

percent relative humidity with an accuracy of + 4% over the range of 10 to 80% RH.

a. The output shall be proportional VDC over a cable pair or a 2�wire isolated loop

powered, 4�20 mA, 0�100% linear proportional output with non�interactive span

and zero adjustments,

b. Duct type sensing probes shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel, and shall be

equipped with a neoprene grommet, bushings, and a mounting bracket

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Veris Industries, and Mamac.

C. Duct�Mounting Humidistats: Electric insertion, 2�position type with adjustable, 2 percent

throttling range, 20 to 80 percent operating range, and single� or double�pole contacts.

2.13 GAS DETECTION EQUIPMENT

A. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid�state infrared sensors;

suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F and calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with

continuous or averaged reading 0�10 vdc (or dual signal 0�10 vdc & 4�20 mA) output;, for wall

mounting.

B. Duct mount CO2 transmitter:

1. Space CO2 Transmitter shall be capable of providing continuous measurement of 0�2000

ppm CO2 with an accuracy of + 30ppm at 77ºF (25ºC): <+(30 ppm CO2 + 2.0% of read�

ing) (includes manufacturing deviation and drift). All accuracy specifications reflect test�

ing the transmitters using high�grade, certified gases.

a. The output shall be Jumper Selectable: 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10 VDC

(default) proportional linear proportional output with non�interactive span and ze�

ro adjustments,

b. The sensor shall be a solid�state type, relative humidity sensor of the Bulk Poly�

mer Design.

c. The Response Time (0 to 63%): shall be 1 minute

d. The sensor element shall resist service contamination.

2. Analog Temperature Module (optional):

a. Linear 0 to 10 VDC for 32 to 122ºF (0 to 50ºC).

3. Relay Output:

a. Maximum 30 V, 0.5 A, Class 2.


230900 � 17

b. Resolution of CO2 Output: 10 ppm (CD�WRD�00�0 only).

c. Recommended External Load:

d. Current Output: Maximum 500 ohms load resistance.

e. Voltage Output: Minimum 1,000 ohms load resistance.

4. Air Flow Range: 0 to 7,500 ft/minute (0 to 2,286 m/minute).

5. Duct Probe Material: duct probe meets plenum�rating requirements of UL 1995, heating

and cooling equipment.

6. Power Supply Range: 20 to 30 VAC (18 to 30 VDC), Class 2.

7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Veris Industries, and Mamac or approved

equal.

2.14 DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. Electronic Damper Actuators:

1. Size for torque required for damper seal at load conditions.

2. Coupling: V�bolt dual nut clamp with a V�shaped, toothed cradle

3. Mounting: Actuators shall be capable of being mechanically and electrically paralleled to

increase torque if required.

4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation�sensing circuitry without the

use of end switches to prevent any damage to the actuator during a stall condition.

5. Fail�Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring�return mechanism.

6. Power Requirements (Spring Return):, 24 or 120 Vac (depending on application),

maximum 10 VA at 24�V ac.

7. Proportional Actuators shall be fully programmable. Control input, position feedback

and running time shall be factory or field programmable by use of external computer

software Diagnostic feedback shall provide indications of hunting or oscillation,

mechanical overload and mechanical travel. Programming shall be through an EEPROM

without the use of actuator mounted switches.

8. Temperature Rating: �22 to +122ºF.

9. Housing: Minimum requirement NEMA type 2 (4/4X) / IP54 (IP67) mounted in any

orientation.

10. Agency Listing: ISO 9001, cULus, and CSA C22.2 No. 24�93.

11. The manufacturer shall warrant all components for a period of 5 years from the date of

production, with the first two years unconditional.

B. Electronic Valve Actuators:

1. Size for torque required for valve close off at 150 percent of total system (head) pressure

for two�way valves; and 100 percent of pressure differential across the valve or 100

percent of total system (pump) head differential pressure for three�way valves.

2. Coupling: Directly couple end mount to stem, shaft, or ISO�style direct�coupled

mounting pad.

3. Mounting: Actuators shall be capable of being mechanically and electrically paralleled to

increase torque if required.

4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation�sensing circuitry without the

use of end switches to deactivate the actuator at the end of rotation.

5. Fail�Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring�return mechanism. Internal chemical storage

systems, capacitors, or other internal non�mechanical forms of fail�safe operation are not

acceptable.

6. Power Requirements: Maximum 10 VA at 24�V ac or 8 W at 24�V dc.


230900 � 18

7. Maximum 1 VA at 24�V ac or 1 W at 24�V dc.

8. Temperature Rating: �22 to +122ºF

9. Housing: Minimum requirement NEMA type 2 / IP54 mounted in any orientation.

10. Agency Listing: ISO 9001, cULus, and CSA C22.2 No. 24�93.



C. Terminal Unit Actuators:

1. Close�Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: 200 psi.

2. Coupling: V�bolt dual nut clamp with a V�shaped, toothed cradle or an ISO�style direct�

coupled mounting pad.

3. Power Requirements: 24V�ac/dc.

4. Temperature Rating: �22 to +122ºF

5. Housing Rating: Minimum UL94�5V(B) flammability.

6. Agency Listing: CE, UL 60730�1A/�2�14, CAN/CSA E60730�1, CSA C22.2 No. 24�93,

CE according to 89/336/EEC.



2.15 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Metal control dampers are specified in section 233300 – Air Duct Accessories. Automatic

control dampers that are not part of factory assembled or packaged equipment shall be supplied

by the BAS subcontractor.

2.16 CONTROL VALVES

A. Control Valves: Factory fabricated of type, body material, and pressure class based on

maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.

B. The manufacturer shall warrant all components for a period of 5 years from the date of


C. Pressure Independent Control Valves

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Forged brass body rated at no less than 400 PSI, chrome plated brass

ball and stem, female NPT union ends, dual EPDM lubricated O�rings and TEFZEL

characterizing disc.

2. Accuracy: The control valves shall accurately control the flow from 0 to 100% full rated

flow with an operating pressure differential range of 5 to 50 PSID across the valve.

3. Flow Characteristics: Equal percentage characteristics.

4. Close�Off Pressure Rating: 200 PSI.

5. All actuators shall be electronically programmed by use of external computer software

for the adjustment of flow. Programming using actuator mounted switches or multi�turn

actuators are not acceptable.

6. The actuator shall be the same manufacturer as the valve, integrally mounted to the valve

at the factory with a single screw on a four�way DIN mounting�base.

7. The control valve shall require no maintenance and shall not include replaceable

cartridges.


230900 � 19



9. The use of pressure independent valves piped in parallel to achieve the rated coil flow

shall be permitted. Actuators shall be electronically programmed to permit sequencing

the flow with a single control output point. The use of external devices to permit

sequencing is NOT acceptable.

10. NPS 2” and smaller pressure independent control valves for individual coil control shall

be provided as part of a pipe package supplied by the valve manufacturer. The supply

side of the coil shall contain an integrated isolation ball valve/manual air vent

strainer/shut�off valve/drain with a P/T port. The return side shall contain a union fitting

with a P/T port, pressure independent control valve, an integrated isolation ball

valve/manual air vent with a P/T port. Shut�off valves as an integrated part of the

pressure independent control valve are prohibited.

11. Provide with hand held programming tool that is to be turned over to the Owner upon

completion of the project.

D. Characterized Control Valves

1. NPS 3 and Smaller: Nickel�plated forged brass body rated at no less than 400 psi,

stainless steel ball and blowout proof stem, female NPT end fittings, with a dual EPDM

O�ring packing design, fiberglass reinforced Teflon seats, and a TEFZEL flow

characterizing disc.

2. Sizing:

a. Two�Position: Line size or size using a pressure differential of 1 psi.

b. Two�Way Modulating: 3 psig or twice the load pressure drop, whichever is more.

c. Three�Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than 3 psig.

3. Close�Off Pressure Rating: 100 PSI.

4. The actuator shall be the same manufacturer as the valve, integrally mounted to the valve

at the factory with a single screw on a four�way DIN mounting�base.

5. NPS 2” and smaller characterized control valves for individual coil control shall be

provided as part of a pipe package supplied by the valve manufacturer. The supply side

of the coil shall contain a strainer/shut�off ball valve/drain an integrated isolation ball

valve/manual air vent with a P/T port. The return side of the coil shall contain a union

fitting with a P/T port, characterized control valve, an integrated manual balancing

valve/union/isolation ball valve/manual air vent with P/T port. Shut�off valves as an

integrated part of the characterized control valve are prohibited.

PART 3 � EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that power is available to control units and operator workstation.

B. Verify that piping and duct, pipe, and equipment�mounted devices are installed before

proceeding with installation. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other

trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may

properly commence.

C. Notify the owner’s representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely

completion of the work.


230900 � 20

3.2 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP

A. Install equipment, piping, and wiring \ raceways parallel to building lines where possible.

B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration.

C. Install all equipment in readily accessible locations.

D. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.

E. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable

local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as defined in section 1 of this specification.

F. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of

workmanship.

1. All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation of the

Building Management System, as herein specified, shall be provided by the BAS

Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings under Division 26

Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of applicable portions of

Division 26 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified otherwise in this

section.

2. All BAS wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with the NEC.

3. The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the

design responsibility of the BAS Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the

incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the BAS Contractor,

the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected

components.

4. Class 2 Wiring

a. All exposed wiring shall be plenum rated.

b. All exposed Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit unless

otherwise specified.

c. Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations. Class

2 wiring not installed in conduit shall be supported every 5’ from the building

structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this application. Wiring shall be

installed parallel to the building structural lines. All wiring shall be installed in

accordance with local code requirements.

5. Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring

120VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring.

6. Provide for complete grounding of all applicable signal and communications cables,

panels and equipment so as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and

conduit at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of

programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.

B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.


230900 � 21

C. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings

and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor.

1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern. In

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

E. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor

temperatures.

F. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section

"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

G. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23

Section "Hydronic Piping."

H. Install duct volume�control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts.

I. BAS Line Voltage Power Source

1. 120�volt AC circuits used for the Building Management System shall be taken from panel

boards and circuit breakers provided by Division 26. Refer to the electrical drawing for

locations where power is provided for control purposes. If not indicated on the electrical

drawings and power is needed for control purposes the power wiring shall be run by the

BAS Contractor.

a. Power for the RTUs shall be taken from the circuit supplying the existing controls.

Provide transformer as required.

b. Power for the VAV boxes shall be taken from the circuit supplying the existing

controls. Provide transformer as required.

c. Power for new VAV boxes will be supplied 120 v on the Div 26 drawings.


d. Power wiring for CH unit to be obtained from the circuit supplying the fan.


2. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low�Voltage Electrical

Power Conductors and Cables." The contractor shall terminate all control and \ or

interlock wiring and shall maintain updated wiring diagrams with terminations identified

at jobsite. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, with no splices permitted

between termination points.

3. Circuits used for the BAS shall be dedicated to the BAS and shall not be used for any

other purposes.

4. DDC terminal unit controllers may use AC power from motor power circuits.

J. BAS Raceway: Refer to Part 4 for project specific requirements.

1. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway except as noted elsewhere in this

specification. Minimum control wiring conduit size 1/2”.

2. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and

Boxes for Electrical Systems." All line�voltage wiring shall be UL listed and installed in

approved raceway according to the NEC and division 26 requirements.

3. Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway

(Wiremold) may be used as approved by the Architect.


230900 � 22

4. All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the building

lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached.

5. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited to 3 feet

in length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal Conduit may be used

within partition walls. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be UL listed.

K. Penetrations

1. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain the

fire rating at all penetrations.

2. Provide fire stopping for all penetrations used by dedicated BAS conduits and raceways.

3. All openings in fire proofed or fire stopped components shall be closed by using

approved fire resistive sealant.

4. All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls shall be in conduit or enclosed

raceway.

5. Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be plumb, true,

and square.

L. BAS Identification Standards

1. Node Identification. All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened to the

enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location.

a. Cable types specified in Item A shall be color coded for easy identification and

troubleshooting.

M. BAS Panel Installation

1. The BAS panels and cabinets shall be located as indicated at an elevation of not less than

2 feet from the bottom edge of the panel to the finished floor. Each cabinet shall be

anchored per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. The BAS contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with other

trades and electrical and mechanical contractors.

N. Input Devices

1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation

2. Locate components of the BAS in accessible local control panels wherever possible.

O. HVAC Input Devices – Genera1

1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation

2. Locate components of the BAS in accessible local control panels wherever possible.

3. The mechanical contractor shall install all in�line devices such as temperature wells,

pressure taps, airflow stations, etc.

4. Outside Air Sensors

a. Sensors shall be mounted on the North wall to minimize solar radiant heat impact

or located in a continuous intake flow adequate to monitor outside air conditions

accurately.

b. Sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover.

5. Water Differential Pressure Sensors

a. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the

flow�sensing device.


230900 � 23

b. Differential pressure transmitters shall be supplied with tee fittings and shut�off

valves in the high and low sensing pick�up lines.

c. The transmitters shall be installed in an accessible location wherever possible.

6. Medium to High Differential Water Pressure Applications (Over 21” w.c.):

a. Air bleed units, bypass valves and compression fittings shall be provided.

7. Duct Temperature Sensors:

a. Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the duct and

be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement.

b. The sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly

including lock nut and mounting plate.

c. For ductwork greater in any dimension than 48 inches or where air temperature

stratification exists such as a mixed air plenum, utilize an averaging sensor.

d. The sensor shall be mounted to suitable supports using factory approved element

holders.

8. Space Sensors:

a. Shall be mounted per ADA requirements.

b. Provide lockable tamper�proof covers in public areas and/or where indicated on the

plans.

9. Low Temperature Limit Switches:

a. Install on the discharge side of the first water or steam coil in the air stream.

b. Mount element horizontally across duct in a serpentine pattern insuring each

square foot of coil is protected by 1 foot of sensor in accordance with the

manufacturers recommendations.

c. For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full coverage of

the air stream, provide additional switches as required to provide full protection of

the air stream.

10. Air Differential Pressure Status Switches:

a. Install with static pressure tips, tubing, fittings, and air filter.

11. Water Differential Pressure Status Switches:

a. Install with shut off valves for isolation.

P. HVAC Output Devices

1. All output devices shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendation. The

mechanical contractor shall install all in�line devices such as control valves, dampers,

airflow stations, pressure wells, etc.

2. Actuators: All control actuators shall be sized capable of closing against the maximum

system shut�off pressure. The actuator shall modulate in a smooth fashion through the

entire stroke. When any pneumatic actuator is sequenced with another device, pilot

positioners shall be installed to allow for proper sequencing.

3. Control Dampers: Shall be opposed blade for modulating control of airflow. Parallel

blade dampers shall be installed for two position applications.

4. Control Valves: Shall be sized for proper flow control with equal percentage valve plugs.

The maximum pressure drop for water applications shall be 5 PSI. The maximum

pressure drop for steam applications shall be 7 PSI.

Q. Electronic Signal Isolation Transducers: Whenever an analog output signal from the Building

Management System is to be connected to an external control system as an input (such as a

chiller control panel), or is to receive as an input a signal from a remote system, provide a

signal isolation transducer. Signal isolation transducer shall provide ground plane isolation

between systems. Signals shall provide optical isolation between systems


230900 � 24

3.4 CONTROL VALVE APPLICATION

A. All control valves shall have a close�off pressure rating higher than the pump differential

pressure rating.

B. All control valves shall be easily accessible for servicing. Do not locate in the unit cabinet or

enclosure unless there is no other option. The preferred location is in the ceiling space or in the

mechanical room.

C. All heating valves, except for VAV boxes shall be spring return and shall fail open. Valves at

VAV boxes shall be floating and fail at last controlled position.

D. All control valve actuators shall be 24 volt unless the application dictates another voltage.

Provide transformers and low voltage control wiring. Coordinate location of the transformers

with the Div 26 trade to obtain line voltage power.

E. Provide control valve types as follows:

1. Baseboard In the ceiling space: Pressure Independent Characterized Control

Valves (two position ball valve type )

2. Cabinet Heaters Pressure Independent Characterized Control Valves (two –way

modulating ball valve type,)

3. HW Bypass Valve Characterized Control Valves (three–way, modulating, ball valve

type)

4. VAV Box Coils Pressure Independent Characterized Control Valves (two –way

modulating ball valve type, floating)


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory�authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust field�assembled components and equipment installation, including connections,

and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating

operation with compatible signal generator.

4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control

set points are as required.

5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence

of operation. Adjust PID actions.

6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.

7. Test software and hardware interlocks.

C. DDC Verification:


230900 � 25

1. Verify that all controllers are calibrated, commissioned, operating under all possible

sequences, and properly represented on the graphic display. Verify that instruments are

installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks.

2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.

3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,

and other applicable considerations.

4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.

5. Check installation of air supply for each instrument.

6. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet

side is identified and that meters are installed correctly.

7. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self�

contained pressure regulators.

8. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.

9. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.

10. Check air�operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper

blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.

11. Check DDC system as follows:

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if

applicable.

b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and

approved tagging system.

c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.

d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.

D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

E. Confirm proper operation of all controls in the presence of the Owner or Owner’s

representative.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Calibrating and Adjusting:

1. Calibrate instruments.

2. Make three�point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog

instrument.

3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and

instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument

being calibrated.

4. Control System Inputs and Outputs:

a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.

b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output.

c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire.

d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.

e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a

precision�resistant source.

5. Flow:

a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3�point

calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span.

b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact.

6. Pressure:


230900 � 26

a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.

b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential

set at minimum.

7. Temperature:

a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span

using a precision�resistance source.

b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.

8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the

manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and

closed.

9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's

recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.

10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system.

11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of

instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on�site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.

Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.7 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. All low voltage wiring for the ATC work shall be plenum rated and shall have orange or

another color coded jacket. The separate color jacket is being done to easily differentiate it

from other cable in the building.

B. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes

for Electrical Systems."

C. All line�voltage wiring shall be UL listed and installed in approved raceway according to the

NEC and division 26 requirements.

D. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low�Voltage Electrical

Power Conductors and Cables." All low�voltage wiring shall meet NEC class 2 requirements.

1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are

exposed.

2. Install exposed cable in raceway.

3. Install concealed cable in accessible areas with plenum rated cable, neatly supported

every 5 feet.

4. Install inaccessible concealed cable in raceway.

5. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where

several cables follow a common path.

6. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against

abrasion. Tie and support conductors.

7. Number�code or color�code conductors for future identification and service of control

system, except local individual room control cables.

8. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration

of piping and equipment.


230900 � 27

E. Connect manual�reset limit controls independent of manual�control switch positions.

Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

F. Connect hand�off�auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch

is in hand position.

G. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

H. Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections installation and

programming required to ensure a complete operating system in accordance with the sequences

of operation and point schedules.

I. Where NEC class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations, including ceiling return air

plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that cables are UL listed for

intended purpose and shall be plenum rated.

J. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, with no splices permitted between

termination points.

K. Install wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain the fire rating at all

penetrations.

L. The contractor shall terminate all control and \ or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated

wiring diagrams with terminations identified at jobsite. All wiring shall be identified at both

ends of the terminations with service purpose and equipment tag.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory�authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01

Section "Demonstration and Training."

B. Fully commission all aspects of the Building Management System work. Meet with the

Commissioning Agent as needed to assist in the commissioning process.

C. Acceptance Check Sheet

1. Prepare a check sheet that includes all points for all functions of the BAS as indicated on

the point list included in this specification.

2. Submit the check sheet to the Engineer for approval

3. The Engineer will use the check sheet as the basis for acceptance with the BAS

Contractor.

D. VAV box performance verification and documentation:

1. The BAS Contractor shall test each VAV box for operation and correct flow. At each

step, after a settling time, box air flows and damper positions will be sampled.

Following the tests, a pass/fail report indicating results shall be produced. Possible

results are Pass, No change in flow between full open and full close, Reverse operation

or Maximum flow not achieved. The report shall be submitted as documentation of the

installation.


230900 � 28

2. The BAS Contractor shall issue a report based on a sampling of the VAV calculated loop

performance metrics. The report shall indicate performance criteria, include the count of

conforming and non�conforming boxes, list the non�conforming boxes along with their

performance data, and shall also include graphical representations of performance.

3. Promptly rectify all listed deficiencies and submit to the Engineer that this has been done.

PART 4 � SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

4.1 SPECIFIC PROJECT CONTROL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. For the PICCV control valves provide with hand held programming tool that is to be turned

over to the Owner upon completion of the project.

B. Provide a battery UPS with surge outlets for the main building controller. It shall be capable of

1 hour run time.

C. Provide a communication cable between the Agency Services Building and the Road Test Field

House Building so the systems in the RTFH Building are part of the BAS system for the ASB.

The underground conduit to be installed by Division 26. Coordinate installation with this trade

contractor.

D. Utilize the direct coupled type actuators where possible. Utilize actuators in the air stream

where access is not possible from the ceiling space. All actuators shall be readily accessible

for maintenance. If installed inside the duct, provide access door. Actuators in exhaust ducts

where interlocked with exhaust fans, shall be 120V. Actuators for the OA and RA dampers in

the ductwork for the GF in the RTFH building shall be 24v.

1. On applications with motorized isolation dampers, provide hardwired interlock to fan

motor control circuit and prevent fan operation until the damper is open.

2. The contractor performing Division 23 responsibilities shall provide and install actuators,

control wiring, set end switches, and perform startup of the control wiring circuit

E. Wiring requirements:

1. Run control wiring in conduit in the following locations:

a. Mechanical rooms.

b. Storage Rooms where exposed.

2. Run control wiring using plenum rated cable in the following locations:

a. Concealed above ceilings.

b. Concealed within walls.

F. Space temperature and humidity sensors shall be as follows:

1. Locations indicated on the plan are diagrammatic. Coordinate exact mounting location

with the Architect and Owner prior to installation. Provide a plan showing locations and

approved by the Owner and Architect. Coordinate with other wall mounted equipment

and use locations of old sensors where possible.

2. Where sensors are being installed on existing walls “fish” the wire in the stud space.

Surface raceway shall not be used.


230900 � 29

3. Mount all sensors such that top of sensor assembly is 48” AFF unless otherwise

indicated.

4. Field�coordinate locations with all cabinetry, shelving, furniture, etc. All mounted

sensors shall be installed such that they conform to all ADA requirements, including, but

not limited to:

a. Sensors located in circulation paths (i.e. corridors, halls, etc) shall be installed such

that element does not encroach more than 4 inches into circulation path.

b. Sensors shall be installed such that there is an unobstructed forward reach. Sensor

may be installed with an obstructed high forward reach when obstruction depth is

less than 20 inches AND there is a clear floor space extending beneath the element

for the entire depth of the obstruction.

5. All space sensors in staff areas are have a display, setpoint adjustment, and occupied

override button.

6. All space sensors in public areas to be sensor only.

G. All system alarms shall e�mail or text the Facility Manager and indicate an alarm number. The

facility manager shall be provided with a list of alarms (by the BAS vendor) and the facility

manager shall decide which high�priority alarms will be sent to an email or text to capable

mobile phone.

H. User shall be capable of Web based monitoring & control over the Internet from any browser,

without any vendor software on the browser.

I. For units with air delivery capacity greater than or equal to 2000 CFM, a supply duct smoke

detector shall be provided under Division 26. Control wiring shall be provided by the BAS

Contractor. Upon sensing the products of combustion, the supply air fan shall be de�energized

and an alarm sounded.

4.2 GLOBAL BAS COMMANDS

A. The following global commands and views shall be capable through the BAS. Assign these

only to the highest password level.

1. Change all heating setpoints to a common temperature.

2. Change all cooling setpoints to a common temperature.

3. Change all humidity setpoints to a common relative humidity.

4. Change the minimum deadband between heating and cooling setpoints.

5. View all temperature and humidity conditions, in each space, in a section of the building.

6. Override outside air temperature. (For use in commissioning of controls)

7. View status of all filter run hour timers in a section of the building.

8. Provide common space temperature and humidity setpoints where multiple units serve a

single zone

4.3 COMMON CONDITIONS

A. Run Conditions: Each HVAC unit shall run according to a user definable, independent, time

schedule.

1. Each HVAC unit shall use an optimal start algorithm for morning start�up. This algorithm

shall minimize the warm�up or cool�down period while still achieving comfort conditions


230900 � 30

by the start of scheduled occupied period. Keep the outside air dampers closed, return

dampers open, and exhaust fans off during the warm�up cycle prior to occupancy.

2. There shall be a 4°F (adj.) deadband between energizing the heating and cooling. On a

rise above setpoint the heat shall disable. In the deadband range, both the heating and

cooling disabled. As space air temperature continues to rise the cooling shall enable.

3. Occupied Mode:

a. Cooling Setpoint: 76°F (adj.)

b. Heating Setpoint: 72°F (adj.)

c. Humidity Setpoint: 60% rh (adj.)

d. Demand Ventilation Setpoint: 1000 ppm (adj.)

4. Unoccupied Mode:

a. Cooling Setpoint: 85°F (adj.)

b. Heating Setpoint: 60°F (adj.)

c. Humidity Setpoint: 60% rh (adj.)

d. The supply air fan shall cycle on/off to maintain unoccupied setpoints.

e. The outside air ventilation system shall de�energize. Keep the outside air dampers

closed, exhaust dampers closed, return dampers open, and exhaust fans off during

the unoccupied period.

4.4 FILTER MONITORING

A. Provide a run timer with notice after set hours for various maintenance tasks such as filter

replacement, grease, HX cleaning, etc. Refer to equipment O&M for complete list for

maintenance tasks.

4.5 TREND LOGS

A. The user shall be able to define trend logs for all points in any individual HVAC unit or zone.

B. The user shall be capable of defining the sample time interval and the duration of the trend.

C. The BAS contractor shall setup trend logs for the following:

1. All system and unit control setpoints, both fixed and dynamically generated

2. All pressure, flow, concentration, temperature and humidity inputs; controlled by setpoint

3. Effective occupancy state for each controller

4. Outside air conditions

4.6 BUILDING ZONING BREAKDOWN

A. Zoning, control type, and fan interlock shall be as follows and as indicated on the drawings.

HVAC UNIT

TAG

HVAC UNIT

DESCRIPTION

AREA

SERVING

TSTAT

LOCATION

INTERLOCKED

EQUIPMENT

SEQUENCE

OF

OPERATION

RTU�1 Packaged RTU

Single Zone�VAV

Public Concourse EF�1, 2

SEQ�1


230900 � 31


VAV

Agency Work�

place

See schedule for

associated VAV

boxes

SEQ�2


VAV

Training Rooms See schedule for

associated VAV

boxes

SEQ�3

GF�1/CU�3 Fieldhouse EF�4 SEQ�9

CONTROL SEQUENCES OF OPERATION (SEQ = Sequence)

4.7 SEQ–1 ROOFTOP UNIT – SZVAV (RT�1)

A. Control Responsibility:

1. The Contractor shall provide all controls under this section, and shall be responsible for a

complete and operational control system and shall coordinate the connection requirements

to all equipment provided with integral controllers. The Contractor shall be responsible

for supplying and mounting of all controls whether done in the field or in the factory.

2. The RTU unit shall have a dedicated control cabinet for ATC equipment.

3. Duct smoke detectors, where indicated shall be provided under Division 26. Control wir�

ing for unit shutdown shall be provided by the BAS Contractor.

4. Power wiring for the control equipment shall be from the unit power. A separate circuit

will not be run.

B. Unit Description:

1. Supply fan with VFD

2. Modulating gas heat

3. Modulating hot gas reheat coil for dehumidification

4. DX cooling coil

5. Air filters

6. Modulating outdoor air damper – fail closed

7. Modulating return air dampers – fail open

8. Exhaust fan with VFD and backdraft damper

9. Two compressors, 1 stage modulating, 1 stage on/off

10. Condenser fan head pressure control

C. Run Conditions:

1. Unit shall be automatically or manually enabled to run in Occupied or Unoccupied mode

as follows:

a. Automatic operation in Occupied/Unoccupied modes shall be as defined below in

the Fan Control and Temperature Control Sections.

b. OR Manually selected by user from graphic interface.

c. When the unit is stopped (manually, automatically in unoccupied, or from safety

functions), the fans shall be de�energized, the outside air (OA) dampers shall close,

and return air (RA) dampers shall open, the DX cooling shall disable and the

heating valve shall be controlled as described in preheat section.


230900 � 32

2. Optimal Start: An adaptive optimal start algorithm shall be used to minimize the energy

required and warm�up or cool�down time during the unoccupied period, necessary to

achieve zone occupied temperature setpoints by the start of scheduled occupied period.

The learning adaptive algorithm shall compare the zone temperature to its setpoint at

beginning of scheduled occupied period and shall automatically adapt the heating or

cooling response time for the next unoccupied period. During this warm�up/cool�down

mode, the outdoor air damper shall be closed and the return air damper shall be open for

full recirculation.

3. Safety Shutdowns:

a. Duct Air Smoke Detection: The unit shall shut down and generate an alarm upon

receiving a duct air smoke detector alarm status.

D. Supply Fan Control:

1. Occupied Mode:

a. Shall be enabled to run continuously, unless shutdown on safeties or faults.

b. Supply Fan Speed Control – Single Zone VAV: The controller shall modulate the

supply fan VFD speed to maintain zone temperature and ventilation demands as

described in Temperature Control sequences.

2. Unoccupied Mode:

a. Unit shall cycle between off� heat/cool modes during unoccupied periods while

allowing for wider temperature offset ranges above and below unoccupied

setpoints.

b. On units without airflow measuring capability, VFD Speed setpoints shall be estab�

lished for each respective design CFM flow rate.

3. Fan Status and Monitoring Alarms

a. Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off.

b. Fan in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.

c. Fan VFD Fault: when the fault condition clears the fan shall restart

d. Fan runtime exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable limit (adj.) for vari�

ous maintenance tasks such as filter replacement, grease, belt change, coil cleaning,

etc. Refer to equipment O&M for complete list for maintenance tasks.

E. Temperature Control:

1. Temperature Control: The unit controller shall use zone temperature to automatically se�

lect heating or cooling mode. The discharge air temperature shall first be reset depending

on zone heating or cooling demand with fan operating at minimum ventilation cfm. Then

supply air fan will modulate through its minimum and maximum cfm range to maintain

the zone temperature setpoint as described below.

2. Heating Mode: When zone temperature drops below heating setpoint unit control shall be

indexed to Heating Mode and cooling shall be disabled.

a. First Stage – Heating DAT reset: Upon zone temperature below setpoint reset DAT

from a minimum of the space heating setpoint to a maximum of 105F (adj.) while

supply air flow stays at minimum ventilation cfm.

b. Second stage – Increase Airflow: Upon continued zone temperature below setpoint,

increase supply airflow setpoint from minimum ventilation cfm to heating design

cfm

c. Reverse shall occur as zone temperature rises above heating setpoint.

3. Deadband: When zone temperature is within deadband, unit controls shall revert to de�

mand based ventilation control mode to maintain minimum ventilation cfm. DAT shall


230900 � 33

remain in control from last mode, and fan shall modulate down to minimum ventilation

cfm.

4. Cooling Mode: When zone temperature rises above cooling setpoint unit control shall be

indexed to Cooling Mode and heating shall be disabled.

a. First Stage – Cooling DAT reset: Upon zone temperature above setpoint, reset

DAT from maximum of the space cooling setpoint to minimum of 55F (adj.) while

supply air flow stays at minimum ventilation cfm.

b. Second stage – Increase Airflow: Upon continued zone temperature above set�

point, increase supply airflow setpoint from min ventilation cfm to cooling design

cfm

c. Reverse shall occur as zone temperature drops below cooling setpoint.

5. Unoccupied mode: Unit shall cycle between off� heat/cool modes during unoccupied pe�

riods while allowing for wider temperature offset ranges above and below unoccupied

setpoints. Unless when economizing the outdoor air damper shall remain closed and the

unit shall be full recirculation.

a. Apply +/� 3 degree (adj.) allowable "drift" from unoccupied heating and cooling

setpoints as described below.

b. Cooling: The zone shall not generate a cooling request to run unit until the zone

temperature drifts 3 degrees above its unoccupied setpoint, the unit shall then be

enabled and shall ramp up in sequence to 100% cooling demand as described

above until space drifts 3 degrees below unoccupied setpoint. Then zone control�

ler shall have no run request, reverse sequence and turn unit off until cycle re�

peats.

c. Heating: The zone shall not generate a heating request to run unit until the zone

temperature has drifted 3 degrees below its unoccupied setpoint, the perimeter ra�

diant heating shall then first be enabled and modulate to maintain zone tempera�

ture at the unoccupied setpoint, upon zone temperature remaining below setpoint

the unit shall be enabled and ramp up in sequence to 100% heating output as de�

scribed above until space drifts 3 degrees above unoccupied setpoint. Then zone

controller shall have no run request, reverse sequence and unit would return to off

until cycle repeats.

6. Monitoring Alarms

a. Zone air temperature condition 5°F (adj.) above or below the effective zone air

temperature setpoint for 30 minutes consecutive (adj.)

b. Discharge air temperature condition 5°F (adj.) above or below the effective

discharge air temperature setpoint for 30 minutes consecutive (adj.)

F. Economizer Control:

1. The controller shall modulate the outdoor and return dampers in sequence to main�

tain the discharge air temperature 2°F (adj.) less than the discharge cooling setpoint.

2. The economizer shall be enabled whenever:


230900 � 34

a. Outside air temperature is less than 68°F (adj.).

b. AND the outside air enthalpy is less than the return air enthalpy.

c. AND the supply fan status is on.

d. The heating control output has been off continuously for at least 10 minutes (adj.).

3. The outdoor damper shall close and the return air damper shall open when the unit is

stopped (manually, automatically in unoccupied, or from safety functions)

4. When the outside air temperature is less than 45°F (adj.), the outside air (OA) damper

opening rate shall be limited to 5% per minute (adj.) When OAT is >45°F, there shall not

be a delayed ramp open period.

5. The controller shall modulate the outdoor air damper close and the return air damper

open to limit the mixed air temperature at the mixed air limit setpoint of 48°F (adj.).


a. Mixed air temperature condition 5°F (adj.) above or below the effective mixed air

temperature limit setpoint for 30 minutes consecutive (adj.)

G. Cooling Control:

1. The controller shall modulate and/or stage the compressor capacity to maintain the

discharge cooling setpoint.

2. The DX cooling control shall be enabled whenever:

a. DAT exceeds effective DAT setpoint.

b. AND the economizer is either disabled or fully open.


d. AND the heating is disabled.

H. Heating Control:

1. The controller shall modulate the gas burner to maintain the discharge temperature

4°F (adj.) less than the discharge cooling setpoint.

2. The heating shall be enabled whenever:

a. Zone heating request for single zone VAV application.

b. AND the supply fan status is on.

c. AND the cooling is not active.

I. Demand Ventilation:

1. When in the occupied mode, the controller shall monitor the return air CO2 level and

modulate the outside air damper position from absolute minimum position to design ven�

tilation cfm as CO2 ppm level increases from low to high range of its setpoint. As the

CO2 drops the amount of ventilation air shall decrease. If CO2 level is below setpoint the

ventilation shall be disabled

a. The return air damper shall control inversely to the outdoor air damper position.

2. On units without airflow measuring capability, outdoor damper position setpoints shall be

established for each respective design CFM flow rate and the ventilation air damper set�

point shall be dynamically reset based on supply fan speed so that the outdoor airflow

rate does not over or under ventilate. The TAB contractor shall assist the contractor with

establishing setpoints to calculate the dynamic ventilation setpoint when Smin = Omax /

Smax = Omin.

a. Smax � the supply fan VFD speed at design cfm (based on H/C mode)

b. Smin � the supply fan VFD speed at minimum ventilation cfm

c. Omax � the outdoor air damper position to maintain minimum ventilation cfm at

minimum supply fan speed


230900 � 35

d. Omin � the outdoor air damper position to maintain minimum ventilation cfm at

design supply fan speed










temperature limit setpoint for 30 minutes (adj.)

b. CO2 concentration 10% (adj.) above the effective control setpoint for 30 minutes

(adj.).

J. Dehumidification:

1. On a rise in humidity above setpoint, the stage(s) of cooling tied into the hot gas reheat

function shall energize.

2. If the space temperature is below the cooling setpoint, the hot gas reheat solenoid valve

shall open to allow reheat and maintain the discharge heating setpoint.

3. Once humidity setpoint has been satisfied the unit shall revert back to normal operation.

4. Unit controls shall override occupancy to maintain the dehumidification setpoint.


a. Humidity 10% (adj.) above the effective control setpoint for 30 minutes (adj.).

K. Exhaust Fan Control:

1. The exhaust fan is turned on when the supply fan is running for longer than the minimum

exhaust fan off timer value of 2 minutes (adj.) and the outdoor air flow rate is greater than

exhaust fan enable setpoint (adj.). The exhaust fan remains on until either of the following

occur:

a. The outdoor air flow rate is less than the exhaust fan enable setpoint (adj.) for longer

than the minimum exhaust fan on timer value of 2 minutes (adj.).

b. The supply fan is turned off.

2. When the exhaust fan is running, its capacity is modulated between its minimum and max�

imum flow rates (adj.) proportional to the outdoor air flow rate.

3. On units without airflow measuring capability, VFD speed setpoints shall be established for

each respective design CFM. flow rate




c. Fan VFD Fault: when the fault condition clears the fan shall restart




L. System Graphic:

1. Provide a dynamic computerized graphical representation of the unit and components. The

user shall be capable of viewing and adjusting setpoints and operational conditions of the

following table representing the minimum data required on the graphical display, override


230900 � 36

capability and alarming, The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete building auto�

mation system (BAS) including all necessary hardware and all operating and applications

software necessary to perform the control sequences of operation in such a manner that the

various systems will operate, function and perform to the true intent and meaning of the

drawings and specifications.

POINTS

Gra

ph

ic

Har

dw

are

Inp

ut

Har

dw

are

Ou

tpu

t

Ov

erri

de

cap

abil

ity

Ala

rm NOTES

Supply air fan start/stop x BO x

Supply fan VFD fault x BI x

Supply fan VFD speed x AO x Controlled speed

Supply fan run status x BI x

Exhaust air fan start/stop x BO x

Exhaust fan VFD fault x BI x

Exhaust fan VFD speed x AO x Controlled speed

Exhaust fan run status x BI x

Return air temperature x AI

Mixed air temperature x AI x

DX coil leaving temperature AI

Unit discharge air temperature x AI x Down�stream of coils

Duct smoke detector x BI x

DX cooling x AO/

BO

x Controlled capacity on

graphic

Modulating gas heating x AO x x Controlled capacity on

graphic

Outside air damper x AO x Controlled position on

graphic

Return air damper x AO x Controlled position on

graphic

Occupancy schedule x x

Outside air temperature x AI x x This can be a global

point

Outdoor humidity x AI x This can be a global

point

Space temperature x AI x Alarm at high/low level

Space temperature setpoint

BAS

x x

Space temperature setpoint ef�

fective

x

Return air CO2 level x AI x Alarm at high level

Ventilation setpoint BAS x x

R/A humidity x AI x Alarm at high level

Dehumidification setpoint x x

Dehumidification OFF�AUTO x x

DX Hot Gas Reheat x AO

BO

x

Run timer x x Alarm at high level

Run time setpoint x x


230900 � 37

Unit control mode(s) x

4.8 SEQ–2: ROOFTOP UNIT – VAV (RT�2)




to all equipment provided with integral controllers. The Contractor shall be responsible for

supplying and mounting of all controls whether done in the field or in the factory.


3. Duct smoke detectors, where indicated shall be provided under Division 26. Control wiring

for unit shutdown shall be provided by the BAS Contractor.

4. Power wiring for the control equipment shall be from the unit power. A separate circuit will

not be run.





4. DX cooling coil

5. Air filters




9. Two compressors, 1 stage modulating, 1 stage on/off


C. Run Conditions:


as follows:

a. Automatic operation in Occupied/Unoccupied modes shall be as defined below in the

Fan Control and Temperature Control Sections.




and return air (RA) dampers shall open, the DX cooling shall disable and the heating

valve shall be controlled as described in preheat section.








full recirculation.



230900 � 38

a. Freeze Protection: The unit shall shut down as described above when the freezestat

senses temperature less than 35ºF on any 12” segment of the sensing element, Manu�

al restart is required.

b. Duct Air Smoke Detection: The unit shall shut down and generate an alarm upon re�

ceiving a duct air smoke detector alarm status.


1. Description:

a. The building automation system (BAS) shall continuously monitor the damper

position of all associated VAV terminal units. The discharge duct static pressure shall

be sensed directly at the discharge of each rooftop unit upstream of any isolation

dampers. The sensor must be mounted in a non�turbulent location.

2. Occupied Mode:

a. The supply fan shall be enabled to run continuously, unless shutdown on faults,

safeties, interlocks, duct smoke detectors, low limit freezestat.

b. When any VAV damper is more than 75% (adj.) open, the supply fan discharge duct

static pressure setpoint shall be reset upward by 0.1 in W.C. (adj.), at a frequency of

15 minutes (adj.), until no damper is more than 75% open or the static pressure

setpoint has reset upward to the system maximum duct static pressure setpoint or the

RTU variable�frequency drive is at the maximum speed setting.

c. When all VAV dampers are less than 65% (adj.) open, the supply fan discharge duct

static pressure setpoint shall be reset downward by 0.1 in W.C. (adj.), at a frequency

of 15 minutes (adj.), until at least one damper is more than 65% open or the static

pressure setpoint has reset downward to the system minimum duct static pressure

setpoint or the RTU variable�frequency drive is at the minimum speed setting.

d. The control bands, setpoint increment values, setpoint decrement values and

adjustment frequencies shall be adjusted to maintain maximum static pressure

optimization with stable system control and maximum comfort control.

3. Unoccupied Mode:

a. Unit shall cycle off between heat/cool modes during unoccupied periods while

allowing for wider temperature offset ranges above and below unoccupied setpoints




c. Fan VFD Fault

d. Safeties, interlocks, duct smoke detectors, low limit freezestat.

e. Fan runtime exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable limit (adj.) for various

maintenance tasks such as filter replacement, grease, belt change, coil cleaning, etc.

Refer to equipment O&M for complete list for maintenance tasks.

f. Static Pressure: duct static pressure is 0.5 in. wc. (adj.) above or below the effective

duct static pressure setpoint for 30 minutes (adj.).


1. Description:

a. The controller shall measure the discharge air temperature and modulate the heating

or cooling capacity to maintain the discharge air setpoint. Upon discharge air

temperature fall below setpoint the heating shall modulate or stage on. In the

deadband range, both the heating and cooling shall be disabled. Upon discharge air

temperature rise above setpoint the cooling shall modulate or stage on.


230900 � 39

b. The discharge air setpoint shall be reset based the amount of cooling or heating

required by the sub�zones.

c. There shall be a 4°F (adj.) deadband between enabling the heating or cooling.

d. In the cooling mode the minimum discharge air temperature shall be 55°F (adj.) and

the maximum supply air temperature shall be 70°F (adj.).

e. In the heating mode the maximum discharge air temperature shall be 110°F (adj.).

2. Cooling Mode:

a. The heating capacity shall be disabled.

b. If outside air can be used for cooling, the outside air damper shall modulate open and

the return air damper shall modulate closed to maintain supply air temperature as

described in Economizer Control.

c. If economizer is not available or outside air cannot satisfy cooling requirements,

mechanical cooling shall be enabled to maintain discharge air temperature at the

discharge air temperature setpoint as described above.

3. Heating Mode:

a. The cooling capacity shall be disabled

b. Heating shall be enabled to maintain discharge air temperature at the discharge air

temperature setpoint as described above

4. Monitoring Alarms:

a. Discharge air temperature condition is 5°F (adj.) above or below the effective

discharge air temperature setpoint for 30 minutes (adj.).

b. The BAS shall have the ability to identify, and display the VAV box that serves the

Critical Zone (that is, the zone with the most wide�open VAV damper). This

information shall update dynamically as the location of the Critical Zone changes

based on building load, and duct static pressure setpoint optimization control.

F. Economizer Control:


















G. Cooling Control:



a. The DX cooling control shall be enabled whenever:

b. DAT exceeds effective DAT setpoint.


230900 � 40

c. AND the economizer is either disabled or fully open.

d. AND the supply fan status is on.

e. AND the heating is disabled.

H. Heating Control:




a. The supply fan status is on.

b. AND the cooling is not active.

I. Demand Ventilation:

4. When in the occupied mode, the controller shall monitor the return air CO2 level and

modulate the outside air damper position from absolute minimum position to design ven�

tilation cfm as CO2 ppm level increases from low to high range of its setpoint. As the

CO2 drops the amount of ventilation air shall decrease. If CO2 level is below setpoint the

ventilation shall be disabled







Smax = Omin.

e. Smax � the supply fan VFD speed at design cfm (based on H/C mode)

f. Smin � the supply fan VFD speed at minimum ventilation cfm

g. Omax � the outdoor air damper position to maintain minimum ventilation cfm at

minimum supply fan speed

h. Omin � the outdoor air damper position to maintain minimum ventilation cfm at

design supply fan speed











b. CO2 concentration 10% (adj.) above the effective control setpoint for 30 minutes

(adj.).

J. Dehumidification:

1. On a rise in humidity above setpoint, the stage(s) of cooling tied into the hot gas reheat

function shall energize.





230900 � 41




K. Exhaust Fan Control:



exhaust fan enable setpoint (adj.). The exhaust fan remains on until either of the follow�

ing occur:




2. When the exhaust fan is running, its capacity is modulated between its minimum and

maximum flow rates (adj.) proportional to the outdoor air flow rate.

3. On units without airflow measuring capability, VFD speed setpoints shall be established

for each respective design CFM. flow rate


a. Fan failure: commanded on, but the status is off.

b. Fan in hand: commanded off, but the status is on.

c. Fan VFD fault: when the fault condition clears the fan shall restart

d. Fan runtime exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable limit (adj.) for various



L. System Graphic:

1. Provide a dynamic computerized graphical representation of the unit and components.

The user shall be capable of viewing and adjusting setpoints and operational conditions

of the following table representing the minimum data required on the graphical display,

override capability and alarming, The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete

building automation system (BAS) including all necessary hardware and all operating

and applications software necessary to perform the control sequences of operation in such

a manner that the various systems will operate, function and perform to the true intent

and meaning of the drawings and specifications.

POINTS

Gra

ph

ic

Har

dw

are

Inp

ut

Har

dw

are

Ou

tpu

t

Ov

erri

de

cap

abil

ity

Ala

rm NOTES

Duct static pressure sensor x AI z Alarm high/low level

Duct static pressure setpoint

BAS

x x

Discharge temperature setpoint

BAS

x x








230900 � 42








Freezestat status x BI x

DX cooling x AO/

BO


graphic


graphic


graphic


graphic



point

Return air CO2 level x AI x Alarm at high level


Return air humidity x AI x Alarm at high level




BO

x




4.9 SEQ–3: ROOFTOP UNIT – VAV (RT�3)




to all equipment provided with integral controllers. The Contractor shall be responsible for

supplying and mounting of all controls whether done in the field or in the factory.


3. Duct smoke detectors, where indicated shall be provided under Division 26. Control wiring

for unit shutdown shall be provided by the BAS Contractor.

4. Power wiring for the control equipment shall be from the unit power. A separate circuit will

not be run.





4. DX cooling coil


230900 � 43

5. Air filters



8. Rotary Energy Recovery Wheel with VFD


10. One compressors, 1 stage modulating.


C. Run Conditions:


as follows:


Fan Control and Temperature Control Sections.




and return air (RA) dampers shall open, the DX cooling shall disable and the heating

valve shall be controlled as described in preheat section.








full recirculation.


a. Freeze Protection: The unit shall shut down as described above when the freezestat

senses temperature less than 35ºF on any 12” segment of the sensing element, Manu�

al restart is required.

b. Duct Air Smoke Detection: The unit shall shut down and generate an alarm upon re�

ceiving a duct air smoke detector alarm status.


1. Description:

a. The building automation system (BAS) shall continuously monitor the damper

position of all associated VAV terminal units. The discharge duct static pressure shall

be sensed directly at the discharge of each rooftop unit upstream of any isolation

dampers. The sensor must be mounted in a non�turbulent location.

2. Occupied Mode:


safeties, interlocks, duct smoke detectors, low limit freezestat.

b. When any VAV damper is more than 75% (adj.) open, the supply fan discharge duct

static pressure setpoint shall be reset upward by 0.1 in W.C. (adj.), at a frequency of

15 minutes (adj.), until no damper is more than 75% open or the static pressure

setpoint has reset upward to the system maximum duct static pressure setpoint or the

RTU variable�frequency drive is at the maximum speed setting.

c. When all VAV dampers are less than 65% (adj.) open, the supply fan discharge duct

static pressure setpoint shall be reset downward by 0.1 in W.C. (adj.), at a frequency

of 15 minutes (adj.), until at least one damper is more than 65% open or the static


230900 � 44

pressure setpoint has reset downward to the system minimum duct static pressure

setpoint or the RTU variable�frequency drive is at the minimum speed setting.

d. The control bands, setpoint increment values, setpoint decrement values and

adjustment frequencies shall be adjusted to maintain maximum static pressure

optimization with stable system control and maximum comfort control.

3. Unoccupied Mode:


allowing for wider temperature offset ranges above and below unoccupied setpoints




c. Fan VFD Fault

d. Safeties, interlocks, duct smoke detectors, low limit freezestat.

e. Fan runtime exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable limit (adj.) for various



f. Static Pressure: duct static pressure is 0.5 in. wc. (adj.) above or below the effective

duct static pressure setpoint for 30 minutes (adj.).

F. Temperature Control:

1. Description:

a. The controller shall measure the discharge air temperature and modulate the heating

or cooling capacity to maintain the discharge air setpoint. Upon discharge air

temperature fall below setpoint the heating shall modulate or stage on. In the

deadband range, both the heating and cooling shall be disabled. Upon discharge air

temperature rise above setpoint the cooling shall modulate or stage on.


required by the sub�zones.

c. There shall be a 4°F (adj.) deadband between enabling the heating or cooling.


the maximum supply air temperature shall be 70°F (adj.).

e. In the heating mode the maximum discharge air temperature shall be 110°F (adj.).

2. Cooling Mode:


b. If outside air can be used for cooling, the outside air damper shall modulate open and

the return air damper shall modulate closed to maintain supply air temperature as

described in Economizer Control.

c. If economizer is not available or outside air cannot satisfy cooling requirements,

mechanical cooling shall be enabled to maintain discharge air temperature at the

discharge air temperature setpoint as described above.

3. Heating Mode:





a. Discharge air temperature condition is 5°F (adj.) above or below the effective

discharge air temperature setpoint for 30 minutes (adj.).

b. The BAS shall have the ability to identify, and display the VAV box that serves the

Critical Zone (that is, the zone with the most wide�open VAV damper). This

information shall update dynamically as the location of the Critical Zone changes

based on building load, and duct static pressure setpoint optimization control.


230900 � 45

G. Economizer Control:


















H. Cooling Control:



a. The DX cooling control shall be enabled whenever:

b. DAT exceeds effective DAT setpoint.

c. AND the economizer is either disabled or fully open.

d. AND the supply fan status is on.

e. AND the heating is disabled.

I. Heating Control:




a. The supply fan status is on.

b. AND the cooling is not active.

J. Ventilation:

1. When in the occupied mode, the controller shall modulate the outside air damper position

from absolute minimum position to design ventilation cfm







Smax = Omin.

a. Smax � the supply fan VFD speed at design cfm (based on H/C mode)

b. Smin � the supply fan VFD speed at minimum ventilation cfm


230900 � 46

c. Omax � the outdoor air damper position to maintain minimum ventilation cfm at min�

imum supply fan speed

d. Omin � the outdoor air damper position to maintain minimum ventilation cfm at de�

sign supply fan speed











K. Dehumidification:

1. On a rise in space humidity above setpoint, the stage(s) of cooling tied into the hot gas

reheat function shall energize.







L. Exhaust Fan Control:



exhaust fan enable setpoint (adj.). The exhaust fan remains on until either of the follow�

ing occur:




2. When the supply fan is running, its capacity is modulated between its minimum and max�

imum flow rates (adj.) proportional to the outdoor air flow rate.

3. On units without airflow measuring capability, VFD speed setpoints shall be established

for each respective design CFM. flow rate


a. Fan failure: commanded on, but the status is off.

b. Fan in hand: commanded off, but the status is on.

c. Fan VFD fault: when the fault condition clears the fan shall restart




e. On units with exhaust airflow measuring: exhaust air flow rate condition 10% (adj.)

above or below the effective exhaust airflow setpoint for 30 minutes (adj.).

M. Energy Recovery Wheel Control:


230900 � 47

1. The energy recovery wheel is turned on whenever the unit exhaust fan is running and the

outdoor air damper is not closed. The energy wheel is turned off when either of the fol�

lowing occur:

a. The exhaust fan is not running.

b. The unit is in the effective economizing operating state (the outdoor air flow rate is

above the effective minimum ventilation setpoint) and the energy wheel bypass

dampers are fully open for greater than 2 minutes (adj.)

2. The energy recovery bypass dampers shall remain closed until the exhaust fan and the

energy recovery wheel are running for greater than 2 minutes (adj.) AND the outdoor air

flow rate is above the effective minimum ventilation setpoint (unit economizer operating

state). When enabled the energy wheel bypass dampers shall modulate to maintain the

discharge air temperature 2°F lower than the controlling setpoint of the economizer, with

the intent of causing the effectiveness of the energy recovery wheel to first decrease, then

fully bypass and finally disable before maximizing the outdoor air damper.

3. On units without airflow measuring capability, damper position setpoints shall be estab�

lished for each respective design CFM. flow rate

4. Provide control functions to limit frost formation and limit the exhaust air temperature

from operating below the dew point.


a. Wheel failure: commanded on, but the status is off.

b. On units with wheel status, wheel in hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.

c. On units with VFD, wheel VFD fault: when the fault condition clears the wheel

shall restart

d. Wheel runtime exceeded: wheel status and/or enable runtime exceeds a user defina�

ble limit (adj.) for various maintenance tasks such as filter replacement, grease, belt

change, coil cleaning, etc. Refer to equipment O&M for complete list for mainte�

nance tasks.

e. Wheel supply leaving air temperature condition 5°F (adj.) below the effective mixed

air temperature limit setpoint for 30 minutes consecutive (adj.)

N. System Graphic:









POINTS

Gra

ph

ic

Har

dw

are

Inp

ut

Har

dw

are

Ou

tpu

t

Ov

erri

de

cap

abil

ity

Ala

rm NOTES

Duct static pressure sensor x AI z Alarm high/low level

Duct static pressure setpoint

BAS

x x

Discharge temperature setpoint

BAS

x x



230900 � 48













Freezestat status x BI x

DX cooling x AO/

BO


graphic


graphic


graphic


graphic

Heat wheel start/stop x BO

Heat wheel VFD speed x AO Controlled position on

graphic

Heat wheel frost protection

sensor

x AI



point


point


Return air humidity x AI x Alarm at high level




BO

x





230900 � 49

4.10 SEQ–4: VAV BOXES

A. Control Responsibility


complete and operational control system and shall coordinate the connection

requirements to all equipment provided with integral controllers. The Contractor shall be

responsible for supplying, mounting and wiring of all controls whether done in the field

or in the factory.

2. Power wiring for the VAV boxes will be under Div 26 responsibilities.


1. Air volume control damper

2. Primary air flow measuring

3. Dedicated control cabinet for ATC equipment.

4. Transformer and means of disconnect.

5. Hot water duct coil

6. Discharge air temperature sensor

7. Associated HW baseboard as indicated on drawings

C. Run Conditions:


as follows:

a. Automatic operation in Occupied/Unoccupied modes shall be as defined below in

the Temperature Control Sections.







cooling response time for the next unoccupied period.

3. The VAV terminal units shall be individually controlled by a DDC VAV controller per

VAV terminal unit.

4. The BAS shall be able to group VAV boxes via keyboard commands. These groups shall

make it possible for the operator to send a common command to all boxes in a group to

operate in the same mode. A sample of this group report must be provided in the

submittal package for approval by engineer and owner. BAS shall also compile on a

group basis, the following:

a. Minimum group temperature

b. Maximum group temperature

c. Average group temperature

d. Current airflow through boxes in group (total)

5. The VAV box minimum and maximum airflow setting shall be adjustable from the BAS.

6. Temperature Control:

a. On a drop in space temperature, the VAV box shall modulate the air valve closed to

the heating air flow cfm.

b. On a further drop in space temperature the local hot water coil valve shall modulate

to the open position.

c. On a rise in space temperature the local hot water coil valve shall modulate closed.


230900 � 50

d. On a further rise in space temperature, the air valve shall modulate to the cooling

airflow cfm.

e. Individual zone setpoint and control logic shall reside at the zone level, and shall not

be dependent upon the BAS for control.

f. In the event of communication loss, the box shall continue to control to current

setpoints.

h. VAV boxes with associated baseboard heating in their zone shall enable the remote

heat as the first stage of heating, on a further drop in space temperature the hot water

coil valve shall modulate to the open position.


a. Zone air temperature condition 5°F (adj.) above or below the effective zone air


b. Airflow condition 10% (adj.) above or below the effective airflow setpoint for 30

minutes consecutive (adj.)

8. System Graphic:

a. Provide a dynamic computerized graphical representation of the unit and

components.

b. The user shall be capable of viewing and adjusting setpoints and operational

conditions of the following table representing the minimum data required on the

graphical display, override capability and alarming.

c. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete building automation system

(BAS) including all necessary hardware and all operating and applications software

necessary to perform the control sequences of operation in such a manner that the

various systems will operate, function and perform to the true intent and meaning of

the drawings and specifications.

POINTS

Gra

ph

ic

Har

d�

war

e. I

n�

Har

d�

war

e.

Ov

erri

de

cap

abil

ity

Ala

rm NOTES

Space temperature x AI x Alarm high/low

Space temperature setpoint lo�

cal

x AI


BAS

x x


fective

Discharge temperature x AI downstream of the VAV

heating coil

Primary air temperature

Airflow x AI

Airflow setpoint effective x

Airflow damper controlled position

Local heating coil valve x AO controlled position

Remote heating valve

(where installed)

x AO/

BO

controlled position


Unit control mode(s) x x


230900 � 51

4.11 SEQ–5: CABINET UNIT HEATERS

A. Provide space thermostat, upon space temperature decrease below space heating setpoint; hot

water valve shall open and hot water aquastat shall energize fan motor when pipe temperature is

above 120°F.

B. Cabinet heaters shall not energize when the outside air temperature is above 50°F (adj).

C. System Graphic:









POINTS

Gra

ph

ic

Har

dw

ire.

Inp

ut

Har

dw

ire.

Ou

tpu

t

Ov

erri

de

cap

abil

ity

Ala

rm NOTES


Space temperature setpoint lo�

cal

x AI


BAS

x x


fective


Heating Setpoint X BO

Control valve X BO Controlled position on

screen.

Supply Fan Status X BI CT on fan power wire

4.12 SEQ–6: DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

A. Unit to have controls provided by unit manufacturer integral to equipment.

B. BAS to monitor room temperature in IT room 122. Provide graphic with the following point

information: space temperature, high temperature alarm condition. Include room name and unit

number.

4.13 SEQ–7: EXHAUST FAN CONTROL



230900 � 52



to all equipment provided with integral controllers.

2. Refer to the Exhaust Fan Schedule on the drawings for identification of the control method

for each exhaust fan. Refer to wiring diagrams on the drawings.

3. The contractor performing Div 23 responsibilities shall provide, transformers, switches,

timers, relays, current sensors and low voltage control wiring, provide and install

actuators, set actuator end switches, and perform startup of the control wiring circuit.

4. The contractor performing Div 23 responsibilities shall provide and install disconnects,

fuses, speed controllers, variable frequency drives, motor starters, overloads.

5. The contractor performing Div 26 responsibilities shall provide and install high voltage

power and control wiring.

6. Where indicated on the drawings exhaust fans shall have a low leak damper in the duct

just below the curb or just inside the louver, with a direct linkage actuator mounted out of

the air stream. Provide hardwired interlock to fan motor control circuit and prevent fan

operation without a proven air path.

7. Fans indicated to be controlled by ATC are to be interlocked with the

occupied/unoccupied schedule.

8. Where indicated exhaust fans shall have current sensing switches wired to the BAS to

indicate run status.

B. System Graphic:


The user shall be capable of viewing and adjusting setpoints and operational conditions of

the following table representing the minimum data required on the graphical display,


building automation system (BAS) including all necessary hardware and all operating and

applications software necessary to perform the control sequences of operation in such a

manner that the various systems will operate, function and perform to the true intent and

meaning of the drawings and specifications.

POINTS

Gra

ph

ic

Har

wir

e.

Inp

ut

Har

wir

e.

Ou

tpu

t

Ov

erri

de

cap

abil

�

Ala

rm Control

EF�1 x BI BO x x ATC RT�1

EF�2 x BI BO x x ATC RT�1

EF�3 x BI x Timer switch

EF�4 x BI BO x x ATC SEQ�9

4.14 SEQ�8: BOILERS AND HOT WATER PUMPS:



complete and operational control system and shall coordinate the connection

requirements to all equipment provided with integral controllers. The Contractor shall be


230900 � 53

responsible for supplying and mounting of all controls whether done in the field or in the

factory.

2. The Contractor shall provide all control wiring of equipment energized, enabled or

interlocked with the boiler control panel.

B. System Description:

1. Two secondary loop pumps –no VFD

2. Modulating gas boiler with dedicated primary pump

3. Modulating hot water bypass valve, (V�1) – fail open

C. Run Conditions:

1. The hot water system shall be enabled when the outside air temperature is below 65°F

(adj.).

2. The lead secondary pump shall energize when enabled by the system.

a. The lag pump shall energize when the lead pump is enabled but not running

b. Alternate pump lead/lag to equalize pump run time

c. When the pumps are disabled by the system controller, they shall remain enabled

until a delay of 5 (adj.) minutes has expired

3. Provide a differential pressure sensor remotely in the hot water system. As hot water

control valves close and water differential pressure increases, the controller shall

modulate the hot water bypass valve to maintain system differential pressure setpoint.

a. When the secondary pumps are not running, the valve shall be controlled to 50%

4. Reset the boiler supply water temperature inversely to ambient air temperature. At 65°F

(adj) outside air temperature the water temperature shall be 140°F (adj) and at 0°F the

water temperature shall be 160°F (adj).

5. When the secondary pumps are running, the boiler system shall enable and modulate

and/or stage boiler capacity to maintain the supply water temperature at the effective hot

water setpoint.

a. When a boiler is enabled, its associated primary pump shall first energize.

b. When a boiler is disabled, its associated primary pump shall remain enabled until a

delay of 5 (adj.) minutes has expired


a. Pump failure: commanded on, but the status is off.

b. Pump in hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.

c. On units with VFD, Pump VFD fault: when the fault condition clears the pump shall

restart.

d. Pump runtime exceeded: runtime exceeds a user definable limit (adj.) for various

maintenance tasks, etc. Refer to equipment O&M for complete list for maintenance

tasks.

e. Supply water temperature condition 5°F (adj.) above or below the effective water


f. Water differential pressure condition 10% (adj.) above or below the effective

differential pressure setpoint for 30 minutes consecutive (adj.)

g. Boiler failure or latching diagnostic.

D. System Graphic:

1. The user shall be capable of viewing and adjusting setpoints and operational conditions




230900 � 54




and meaning of the drawings and specifications:

POINTS

Gra

ph

ic

Har

dw

are.

Inp

ut

Har

dw

are.

Ou

tpu

t

Ov

erri

de

cap

abil

ity

Ala

rm

NOTES

Outdoor temperatures x AI local sensor

System enable setpoint x x

Sec�pump�1 start/stop x BO x

Sec�pump�1 run status x BI

Sec�pump�2 start/stop x BO x

Sec�pump�2 run status x BI

Boiler�1 start/stop x BO x

Boiler�1 firing rate x AO x controlled capacity

Boiler�1 leaving water tem�

perature

x AI

Boiler�1 Failure x BI x

Boiler�2 start/stop x BO x

Boiler�2 firing rate x AO x controlled capacity

Boiler�2 leaving water tem�

perature

x AI

Boiler�2 failure x x

Hot water supply temperature x AI x Alarm high/low level

Hot water return temperature x AI Alarm high/low level

Hot water setpoint effective x

System water differential pres�

sure

x AI x Alarm high/low level

System water differential pres�

sure setpoint

x x

System water bypass valve x AO x controlled position

CO level alarm in boiler room x AI/

BI

Alarm high level

4.15 SEQ–9: GAS FURNACE WITH SPLIT AC (Road Test Field House)

A. Control Responsibility

1. All controls to be provided by the BAS Contractor and field installed.


1. Supply fan,

2. DX cooling coil

3. Two stage gas furnace.

4. Air filters



230900 � 55

6. Modulating return air damper – fail open

7. Two stage compressor

8. Condenser fan head pressure control for low ambient operation

C. Run Conditions:

1. The unit shall run according to a user definable, independent, time schedule.

2. The system shall use an optimal start algorithm for morning start�up. This algorithm shall

minimize the warm�up or cool�down period while still achieving comfort conditions by

the start of scheduled occupied period. During this mode the outside air damper shall be

closed, and internal bypass dampers positioned so the return air is recirculated during the

warm�up cycle prior to occupancy.


as follows:


Associated Control Sections.




and return air (RA) dampers shall open, the cooling and the heating shall be disabled.




c. Fan runtime exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable limit (adj.) for vari�




1. Occupied Mode:


safeties

2. Unoccupied Mode:


allowing for wider temperature offset ranges above and below unoccupied setpoints.

3. Fan Status and Monitoring Alarms:



c. Safeties, interlocks

d. Fan runtime exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable limit (adj.) for various




1. Description:

a. The controller shall measure the discharge air temperature and modulate the heating or

cooling capacity to maintain the discharge air setpoint. Upon discharge air temperature

fall below setpoint the heating shall modulate or stage on. In the deadband range, both

the heating and cooling shall be disabled. Upon discharge air temperature rise above

setpoint the cooling shall modulate or stage on.


230900 � 56


required by the zone.

c. There shall be a 4°F (adj.) deadband between enabling the heating or cooling


the maximum supply air temperature shall be the effective zone cooling setpoint. In

the heating mode the minimum discharge air temperature shall be the effective zone

heating setpoint and the maximum discharge air temperature shall be 110°F (adj.).

2. Cooling Mode:


b. Cooling shall be enabled to maintain discharge air temperature at the discharge air

temperature setpoint as described above.

3. Heating Mode:





a. Discharge air temperature condition 5°F (adj.) above or below the effective discharge

air temperature setpoint for 30 minutes (adj.).

G. Cooling Control

1. The controller shall stage the compressor capacity to maintain the cooling setpoint.

2. The DX cooling control shall be enabled whenever:

a. The DAT exceeds the effective DAT setpoint.


c. AND the heating is disabled.

d. AND Cooling coil condensate overflow switch status is not in fault/alarm.

3. Condensate Overflow Switch: A water level detection device shall be provided that will

send an alarm and disable mechanical cooling in the event that the primary drain is

blocked. The device shall be installed in the overflow drain line, or in the equipment�

supplied drain pan, located at a point higher than the primary drain line connection and

below the overflow rim of such pan.

H. Heating Control

1. The controller shall stage the heating capacity to maintain the discharge temperature at

the discharge heating setpoint.


a. Effective DAT setpoint exceeds DAT.


c. AND the cooling is not active,

I. Ventilation

1. When in the occupied mode:

a. The controller shall modulate the outside air damper position from absolute minimum

position to design minimum ventilation cfm/position.

J. Baseboard Heat Control


230900 � 57

1. Electric baseboard in the RTFH building to be controlled as a second stage of heat for the

room they are in. Provide sensor on the wall for each area. The electric heaters shall not

be allowed to energize when the outside air temperature is above 30 F (adj).

K. System Graphic









POINTS G

rap

hic

Har

dw

are

Inp

ut

Har

dw

are

Ou

tpu

t

Ov

erri

de

cap

abil

ity

Ala

rm NOTES





DX coil leaving temperature x AI

Discharge air temperature x AI x Down�stream of coils



DX cooling stages x AO/

BO


graphic

Gas heating stages x AO x x Controlled capacity on

graphic

Electric Baseboard (each) x BO x


graphic


graphic


point


point

Zone temperature x AI x Alarm at high/low level

Zone temperature setpoint local x AI x

Zone temperature setpoint ef�

fective

x




4.15 SEQ�10: ADDITIONAL POINTS


230900 � 58

A. Monitor the Fire Alarm system panel alarm mode. When the fire alarm notifies it shall also noti�

fy an alarm on the BAS.

B. Domestic hot water heat trace (five locations): Provide DC voltage that will modify temperature

setpoint. Provide monitor for alarm conditions.

C. Provide temperature sensor monitor for alarming space temperature in Vestibule 100. Alarm on

low temperature condition below 35°F (adj.)


HYDRONIC PIPING Delanco MVC

232113 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and

specialties for the following:

1. Hot-water heating piping.

2. Condensate-drain piping.


1. Division 23 Section “Basic Piping Material and Methods”.

2. Division 23 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for general piping

materials and installation requirements.

3. Division 23 Section “Hangers and Supports” for pipe supports, product descriptions and

installation requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for

calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.

2. Hydronic specialties.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty

valves to include in operation, and maintenance manuals.


232113 - 2


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure-seal joint

manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe

couplings and fittings.

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. All grooved couplings, and fittings, valves and specialties shall be the products of a single

manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.



D. International Mechanical Code.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components with

other construction, including light fixtures, plumbing piping, HVAC equipment, fire-

suppression system components, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.

C. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Pressure-Reducing Valves:

a. Amtrol, Inc.


c. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.

d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Watts Regulators.


2. Expansion Tanks:

a. Amtrol, Inc.

b. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.

c. Taco, Inc.


232113 - 3


3. Air Separators and Air Purgers:

a. Amtrol, Inc.

b. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.

c. Taco, Inc.


4. Copper Press Fittings:

a. Viega, 17545 Daleview Dr., Lakewood, OH 44107, 877.620.0016, www.viega-

na.com

b. Nibco Inc., 1516 Middlebury St. Elkhart, IN 46516, 1-800-234-0227,

www.nibco.com

c. Elkhart Products Corporation, 1255 Oak Street, Elkhart IN 46514, 1-800-284-

4851, www.elkhartproducts.com


The Nibco system requires its own special tool. The Elkhart Xpress and Viega Pro-Press

use the same Rigid tool.


MATL

TYPE

PIPE

SIZE

PIPE

TYPE

PIPE

SPEC

FITTING

TYPE

FITTING

SPECIFICATIONS

1 2” & Smaller Sch. 40

Black Steel,

Screwed End

ASTM

A53 /

A53m

Class 150

Black Malleable

Iron, Screwed

ASME B16.3

2 All Sizes Type ‘L’

Hard-Drawn

Copper

ASTM

B88

Wrought or cast

Solder Joint

Grooved

ANSI B16.22

ANSI B16.18

2.3 FITTINGS

A. Press Fittings: Copper press fittings shall conform to the material and sizing requirements of

ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. O-rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern, for threaded joints.

Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for threaded joints.

Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.

D. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints.

E. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern.

http://www.viega-na.com/

http://www.viega-na.com/

http://www.nibco.com/

http://www.elkhartproducts.com/


232113 - 4

F. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 125; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.

G. Cast Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24, Class 150; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.

H. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets.

I. Unions: ASME B16.39 malleable-iron, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints,

metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded ends. Threads shall conform to ANSI

B1.20.1.

J. Dielectric Unions or Waterway Fittings: Threaded, grooved, or soldered end connections for

the pipe materials in which installed; constructed to isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic

action, and prevent corrosion. Basis of Design: Victaulic Style 47 and 647.

K. Flexible Connectors: Stainless steel bellows with woven flexible bronze wire reinforcing

protective jacket; minimum 150 psig working pressure, maximum 250 degree F operating

temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded end connections to match equipment

connected; and shall be capable of 3/4 inch misalignment.

1. Four Victaulic flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors for vibration

attenuation. The couplings shall be placed in close proximity to the source of the

vibration.


A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate

for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper

with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel

1. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds, which produce highly toxic fumes

when heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation.

D. Gasket Material: thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled, and design

temperatures and pressures.

2.5 VALVES

A. Balancing, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves”.

B. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.


232113 - 5

2.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

A. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig working pressure; 240

deg F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with NPS 1/8

discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection.

B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze or cast-iron

body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 240 deg F operating

temperature; with NPS 3/4 discharge connection and NPS 3/4 inlet connection

C. Y-Pattern Strainers: 300-psig working pressure; ductile-iron body (ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-

12) with grooved ends or cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2

and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel

basket, and bottom drain connection.

D. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing

protective jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating

temperature. Connectors shall have flanged- or threaded-end connections to match equipment

connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.

2.7 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

A. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig working pressure; 240

deg F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with NPS 1/8

discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection.

1. Acceptable Product: www.taco-hvac.com Taco Inc. “Taco 417 Vent”Coalescence-Type

Air Separators:

1. Designed, fabricated and stamped per ASME Section VIII Division 1 with a maximum

working pressure of 125 psi at 270°F. Manufacturer shall be holder of ASME U stamp.

2. Units up to three 3-inch in size shall be provided with threaded connections as standard.

Inlet and outlet connections to be inline with piping system. Both inlet and outlet to be in

the same horizontal and vertical planes

3. Each air removal device shall be equipped with a brass conical shaped air venting

chamber designed to minimize system fluid from fouling the venting assembly. The air

vent shall be able to be closed to allow flushing and purging of dirt via side port without

dirt passing through vent on initial system fill

4. A brass flushing cock shall be located on the side of each separator to facilitate system

fast-fill and removal of the floating impurities from the air system interface within the

separator.

5. A blow down valve shall be provided by the unit manufacturer on the bottom of each unit

to allow blow down and cleaning. On units 2 ½” and smaller the valve and all of its

fittings shall be 1”. On units three 3” and larger the valve and all openings shall be 2”

6. The air removal device shall remove air down to 18 microns.

7. The air separator shall employ the use of high surface area pall rings to achieve optimal

separation of air with minimal pressure drop. The pall rings shall be made of stainless

steel. Stainless steel will be the only acceptable material used for suppressing turbulence

http://www.taco-hvac.com/


232113 - 6

and increasing surface area for high efficiency air removal. Inferior materials of

construction such as copper for the straining medium will not be acceptable.

8. The unit shall be manufactured with a removable cover to facilitate removal, inspection,

and cleaning of the pall ring basket. The entire pall ring basket shall be constructed of

stainless steel. For safety and ease of service the unit shall be accessed from the top and

the pall ring basket shall be accessed as one complete assembly housed in a stainless steel

cage

9. Acceptable Product: www.taco-hvac.com Taco Inc. “4900 Series”, Or approved equal.

C. Automatic Air Vent: Spirotop air release valves. All valves shall be cast brass, rated for 150

psig design pressure and 270°F operating temperature. Units to include non-ferrous floats,

stainless steel linkage and a Viton seal which closes against a brass spring operated seat. Units

shall come complete with a 20 year limited warranty against defects in materials and

workmanship, which should be given to owner after installation.

1. Acceptable Product: Spirotops by Spirotherm, Or approved equal.

D. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze or cast-iron

body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 240 deg F operating

temperature; with NPS 3/4 discharge connection and NPS 3/4 inlet connection

1. Acceptable Product: www.taco-hvac.com Taco Inc. “Taco 409 Vent”, Or approved equal.

E. Expansion Tanks: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 240 deg F maximum

operating temperature. Separate air charge from system water to maintain design expansion

capacity by a flexible bladder securely sealed into tank. Include drain fitting and taps for

pressure gage and air-charging fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support

horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Factory fabricate and test tank with taps and supports

installed and labeled according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII,

Division 1.

1. Acceptable Product: www.taco-hvac.com Taco Inc. “CA Series” , Or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


SERVICE PIPE MATERIAL TYPE

Hot Water 1 & 2

Condensate Drains 2

A. Press Fittings may be used for copper heating applications provided approved o-rings are used.

Copper press fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation

instructions. The tubing shall be fully inserted into the fitting and the tubing marked at the

shoulder of the fitting. The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark on the tubing to





232113 - 7

assure the tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting. The joints shall be pressed using the

tool approved by the manufacturer.


A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types:

1. Shutoff Duty: Ball, OS&Y, and butterfly valves.

2. Balancing: Balancing Valves, (Refer to 230523)

B. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to

each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch line.

Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to

each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or cooling element

and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing. Coordinate with the Testing and

Balancing Technician.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS


installation requirements..

B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general

location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and arrangements of piping take into

consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design

considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.

C. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. Install exposed piping at

right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly

indicated. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings,

below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view. Install piping tight to slabs,

beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Provide space to

permit insulation applications, with 1" clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space

above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. Install drains at all low points in

mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4" ball valve, and short 3/4" threaded

nipple and cap.

D. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves six inches

and larger shall be sheet metal.

E. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and

floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. Seal penetrations to maintain assembly UL rating.

F. Install dielectric nipples or unions to join dissimilar metals.

G. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing

of valves.


232113 - 8

H. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

I. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

J. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe,

with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, install the takeoff

coming out the top of the main pipe.

K. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve,

in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown

connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for

strainers smaller than NPS 2.

L. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and

Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment”. Comply with requirements below for maximum

spacing of supports.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable galvanized steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20

feet long.

C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4 Maximum Span: 7 ft Minimum rod size: 1/4 inch

2. NPS 1 Maximum Span: 7 ft Minimum rod size: 1/4 inch

3. NPS 1-1/2 Maximum Span: 9 ft Minimum rod size: 3/8 inch




D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and

minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4 Maximum Span: 5 ft Minimum rod size: 1/4 inch





232113 - 9


A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint construction

requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded, welded, and flanged

joints in steel piping.

3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required

for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system piping,

at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. Extend drain to floor

drain.

3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control valves

are installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, un-insulated and exposed for examination during test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged

joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to

protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to

freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be

used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air.

Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.


232113 - 10

3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of

water.

4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design

pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve,

or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of

vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7

times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping”.

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,

joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing

components and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been

completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.

B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:

1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.

2. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.

3. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).

4. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens.

After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable

fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.


REFRIGERANT PIPING Delanco MVC

232300 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications. Provide liquid,

suction, and hot gas bypass piping between evaporator and condenser for all split system

equipment.


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.

2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include

pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:

1. Thermostatic expansion valves.

2. Solenoid valves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and

fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil

traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show

interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment. The shop drawings shall be

submitted with refrigerant equipment manufacturer’s approval prior to submission to the

Engineer.

1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot.

2. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design

actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes

to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between


232300 - 2

compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and

compliance with warranties of connected equipment.

C. Field quality-control test reports. Submit witnessed evacuation test report for each refrigeration

circuit. Submit report from the manufacturer’s authorized representative that they have

inspected the refrigerant piping and that it has been installed according to their requirements.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in



A. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

B. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior

and exterior are clean when installed.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper

socket fittings on copper pipe.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

F. Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced

protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Socket ends.

3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch

long assembly.


232300 - 3

4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.

5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

2.2 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Access Ports

1. Refrigerant circuit access ports located outdoors shall be fitted with locking type tamper-

resistant caps.

B. Diaphragm Packless Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or

angle pattern.

2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.

3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.

4. Seat: Nylon.

5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.

6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.


C. Packed-Angle Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.

2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.

3. Operator: Rising stem.

4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.

5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.

6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.



D. Service Valves:

1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.

2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.

3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

4. End Connections: Copper spring.


E. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.

2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.

4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.

5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F.

6. Superheat: Adjustable.

7. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications).

8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.



232300 - 4

F. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:

1. Body: Forged brass.

2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by

filter screen.

3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.

4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.

5. End Connections: Socket or flare.



G. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.

3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina charcoal.

4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).

5. End Connections: Socket.

6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential

measurement.

7. Maximum Pressure Loss: [2 psig].



2.3 REFRIGERANTS


following:

1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc.

2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.

3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.

4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.


B. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT

A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications:

Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: Copper, Type

ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.


232300 - 5

C. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR K L, drawn-temper tubing and

wrought-copper fittings with soldered joints.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.

B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if

they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.

C. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter

dryers.

D. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.

2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do

not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.

3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line

pressure at bulb location.

E. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or

at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.

F. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an

integral assembly for device being protected:

G. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.


232300 - 6

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and

fittings.

K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and

specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or

panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment

requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

L. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.

M. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical

injury.

N. Slope refrigerant piping as instructed by equipment manufacturer.

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from

compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.

3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.

4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

O. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve

stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply

heat near expansion-valve bulb.

P. Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.

Q. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.

R. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between

pipes for insulation installation.

S. Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness

insulation.

T. Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls.

U. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section "Identification for

HVAC Piping and Equipment."


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.


232300 - 7

C. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube

Handbook."

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and

Tube."

1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper

pipe.

2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.


A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and

Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.

2. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper

pipe.

C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1”: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

2. NPS 2”: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

D. Support multi-floor vertical runs at least at each floor.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test

pressure.

3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the

pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.

b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of

test.

c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount

of soap and glycerin solution over joints.

d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.


232300 - 8

3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.

2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum

holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.

3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.

4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating

suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system

design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to

manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.

2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.

3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.

4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.

5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.


HVAC WATER TREATMENT Delanco MVC

232500 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 232500 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water-treatment systems for the following:

1. Hot water piping (closed-loop system).

B. This Section includes the following HVAC water-treatment systems:

1. Bypass chemical-feed equipment and controls.

2. HVAC water-treatment chemicals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EEPROM: Electrically erasable, programmable read-only memory.

B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or

for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

C. RO: Reverse osmosis.

D. TDS: Total dissolved solids.

E. UV: Ultraviolet.


A. Water quality for HVAC systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological

growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a hazard to operating

personnel or the environment.

B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system

equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating

personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.


232500 - 2

C. Closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating shall have the following water qualities:

1. pH: Maintain a value within 8.5 to 10.5.

2. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm.

3. TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 5000 ppm.

4. Microbiological Limits:

a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/ml.

b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/ml.

5. Nitrite corrosion inhibitor: CW range 600-1200 ppm, HW 1000-1500 ppm.

6. Molybdenum corrosion inhibitor in the range of 100-200 ppm with Azole min 5 ppm.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


accessories for the following products:

1. Bypass feeders.

2. Chemical material safety data sheets.

B. Shop Drawings: Pretreatment and chemicals showing tanks, maintenance space required, and

piping connections to HVAC systems.


D. Other Informational Submittals:

1. Water-Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the

application equipment required to achieve water quality defined in the "Performance

Requirements" Article above.

2. Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site.


A. HVAC Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water-

treatment service provider capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water-treatment

equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Scope of Maintenance Service: Provide chemicals and service program to maintain water

conditions required above to inhibit corrosion, scale formation, and biological growth for hot-

water piping heating and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period of

one year (monthly checks) from date of Substantial Completion, and shall include the

following:


232500 - 3

1. Initial water analysis and HVAC water-treatment recommendations.

2. Startup assistance for Contractor to flush the systems, clean with detergents, and initially

fill systems with required chemical treatment prior to operation.

3. Periodic field service and consultation.

4. Laboratory technical analysis.

5. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with

government regulations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Water Treatment Companies: Companies that regularly perform these services as a main

business function.

2.2 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT

A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill

opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill

cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system

pressure in the vessel.

1. Capacity: 5 gal.

2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig.

2.3 CHEMICALS

A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are

compatible with piping system components and connected equipment, and that can attain water

quality specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER ANALYSIS

A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEM FLUSHING

A. All hot water loops shall be flushed and cleaned prior to being placed in operation and chemical

treatment added. All dirt and solids shall be flushed out and a cleaned added to remove all oils.

At the end of the flushing process all strainers and filters in the system shall be removed and

cleaned or replaced.


232500 - 4

B. The piping systems shall be flushed and cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer and/or the

water treatment sub-contractor.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain

manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require

servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.

B. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems.

1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise

indicated on Drawings.

2. Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder

inlet.

3.4 CONNECTIONS


general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal

piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Common

Work Results for HVAC."

D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty

valves are specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

Report results in writing.

B. Comply with ASTM D 3370 and with the following standards:

1. Silica: ASTM D 859.

2. Steam System: ASTM D 1066.

3. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067.

4. Iron: ASTM D 1068.

5. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126.


232500 - 5

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment. Refer to

Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

B. Review manufacturer's safety data sheets for handling of chemicals.

C. Review data in maintenance manuals, especially data on recommended parts inventory and

supply sources and on availability of parts and service.

D. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.


VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS Delanco MVC

232923 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 232923 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes solid-state, variable frequency controllers (VFC’s) for speed control of

three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building Automation System.

B. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

C. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.

D. VFC: Variable frequency controller. (May also be referred to as “VFD” or Variable Frequency

Drive)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of VFC, provide dimensions; mounting arrangements; location for

conduit entries; shipping and operating weights; and manufacturer's technical data on features,

performance, electrical ratings, characteristics, and finishes. Include the following:

1. Each installed unit's type and details.

2. Nameplate legends.

3. Short-circuit current ratings of integrated unit.

4. UL listing for series rating of overcurrent protective devices in combination controllers.

5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each motor-control center unit.

B. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for VFC. Provide schematic wiring

diagram for each type of VFC.

C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances,

and required area above and around VFCs where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show VFC

layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical

elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field

measurements.


232923 - 2

D. Field Test Reports: Manufacturer's field service report and written reports specified in Part 3.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs, all installed devices, and components to include

in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1

Section include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for VFCs and all installed components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

F. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed and

arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and

emergency maintenance and repairs.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented

according to ASTM E 548.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain VFCs of a single type through one source from a single

manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Store VFCs indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.

Protect VFCs from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover VFCs to protect them from weather, dirt, dust,

corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials

from inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient wattage to prevent condensation.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of VFCs with construction of the RTU. Locate where it does not

interfere with service access.

B. Coordinate features of VFCs, installed units, and accessory devices with pilot devices and

control circuits to which they connect.


232923 - 3

C. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each VFC and each installed unit with ratings

and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor

and load.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. ABB Power Distribution, Inc.; ABB Control, Inc. Subsidiary.

2. Baldor Electric Company (Graham).

3. Danfoss Inc.; Danfoss Electronic Drives Div.

4. Franklin Control Systems - P Series. 800.962.3787

5. Eaton Corporation – Cutler Hammer Products.

6. Siemens Energy and Automation; Industrial Products Division.


2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A. The VFC package as specified herein shall be enclosed in a NEMA 3R enclosure, completely

assembled and tested by the manufacturer. The VFC shall operate from a line of +30% over

nominal, and the under voltage trip level shall be 35% under the nominal voltage as a minimum.

1. Environmental operating conditions: 0 to 40ºC continuous at rated load and switching

frequency. Altitude 0 to 3300 feet above seal level, less than 95% humidity, non-

condensing.

2. Enclosure shall be rated NEMA 3R and VFC shall be UL listed for use in air plenums

B. VFCs shall have the following standard features:

1. All VFCs shall have the same customer interface, including digital display, and keypad,

regardless of horsepower rating. The keypad is to be used for local control, for setting all

parameters, and for stepping through the displays and menus. The keypad shall be

removable, capable of remote mounting, and shall have its own non-volatile memory.

The keypad shall allow for uploading and downloading parameter settings as an aid to

start-up of multiple VFCs.

2. The keypad shall include Hand-Off Auto membrane selections. When in “Hand”, the

VFC will be started and the speed will be controlled from the up/down arrows. When in

“Off”, the VFC will be stopped. When in “Auto”, the VFC will start via an external

contact closure and the VFC speed will be controlled via an external speed reference.

Manual pilot devices are not acceptable.

3. The VFC shall be capable of starting into a rotating load (forward or reverse) and

accelerate or decelerate to setpoint without safety tripping or component damage (flying

start). The VFC shall also be capable of DC injection braking at start to stop a reverse

spinning motor prior to ramp.


232923 - 4

4. The VFC shall be equipped with an automatic extended control power loss ride-through,

which utilizes the inertia of the load to keep the drive powered. Typical control power

loss ride-through for a fan load shall be 2 seconds minimum.

5. The overload rating of the drive shall be 110% of its normal duty current rating for one

minute every 10 minutes. The minimum FLA rating shall meet or exceed the values in

the NEC/UL table 430-150 as listed for 208-volt or 460-volt, 4-pole motors.

6. The VFC shall have integral 3% line impedance reactors to reduce the harmonics to the

power line and to add protection form AC line transients.

7. The VFC shall be capable of sensing a loss of load (broken belt / broken coupling) and

signal the loss of load condition. The drive shall be programmable to signal this

condition via a keypad warning, relay output and/or over the serial communications bus.

Relay output shall include programmable time delays that will allow for drive

acceleration from zero speed without signaling a false underload condition.

C. VFCs to have the following adjustments:

1. Two (2) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFC from

operating the load continuously at an unstable speed.

2. PID Setpoint controller shall be standard in the drive, allowing a pressure or flow signal

to be connected to the VFC, using the microprocessor in the VFC for the closed loop

control. The VFC shall have 250 ma of 24 VDC auxiliary power and be capable of loop

powering a transmitter supplied by others. The PID setpoint shall be adjustable form the

VFC keypad, analog inputs, or over the communications bus.

3. Two (2) programmable analog inputs shall accept a current or voltage signal.

4. One (1) programmable analog output.

5. Two (2) programmable digital Form-C relay outputs. The relays shall include

programmable on and off delay times. Default settings shall be for run and not faulted

(fail safe).

6. Seven (7) programmable preset speeds.

7. Two independently adjustable accel and decal ramps.

D. The Keypad shall include a back-lit LCD display. The display shall be in complete English

words for programming and fault diagnostics (alphanumeric codes are not acceptable).

E. Serial Communications

1. The VFC shall have an RS-485 port as standard. The standard protocol shall be Modbus.

Optional protocols that must be available are Johnson Controls N2, Siemens Building

Technologies FLN, LonWorks, Profibus and DeviceNet.

2. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to, run-stop control;

speed set adjustment, proportional/integral/derivative PID control adj8stments, current

limit, and accel/decal time adjustments. The drive shall have the capability of allowing

the DDC to monitor feedback. Available feedback information must include the

following: Process variable feedback, output speed/frequency, current (in amps), %

torque, power (kW), kilowatt hours (resettable), operating hours (resettable), relay

outputs, and diagnostic warning and fault information. VFC fault reset shall be possible

through the DDC system. A minimum of 15 field parameters shall be capable of being

monitored. The DDC system shall be able to determine if the motor is running in the

VFC mode or bypass mode over serial communications.

3. The VFC shall allow the DDC to control the drive’s digital and analog outputs via the

serial interface. The serial communications interface shall allow for DO (relay) control


232923 - 5

and AO (analog) control. This control shall be independent of any VFC function. The

outputs can be used for modulating chilled water valves via the analog output, actuate a

damper EP, etc. In addition, all drive digital and analog inputs shall be capable of being

monitored by the DDC system.

F. VFC’s shall include the following features mounted by the drive manufacturer. All features

shall be UL Listed by the drive manufacturer as a compete assembly and carry a UL508 label.

1. Manual Bypass: factory-wired and tested bypass system consisting of an output

contactor and bypass contactor. Overload protection and single-phase protection shall be

provided in both drive and bypass modes.

2. Disconnect: Door interlocked, padlockable circuit breaker that will disconnect all input

power from the drive and all internally mounted options.

3. Fused VFC only disconnect (service switch). Fast acting semi-conductor fuses to allow

the VFC to disconnect from the line prior to clearing upstream branch circuit protection,

maintaining bypass capability. Bypass designs without fuses or designs that incorporate

fuses common to both the VFC and the bypass will not be accepted. Three contactor

bypass schemes are not acceptable, as the input contactor is not an NEC approved

disconnecting device and poses a safety hazard.

4. The following operators shall be provided:

a. Bypass Hand-Off-Auto

b. Drive mode selector

c. Bypass mode selector

d. Bypass fault reset

5. The following indicating lights (LED type) shall be provided. A test mode or push to test

feature shall be provided.

a. Power-on (Ready)

b. External fault (Enable)

c. Drive mode selected

d. Bypass mode selected

e. Drive running

f. Bypass running

g. Drive fault

h. Bypass fault

i. Bypass H-O-A mode

j. Automatic transfer to bypass selected

6. The following relay (form C) outputs from the bypass shall be provided:

a. System started

b. System running

c. Bypass selected

d. Drive fault

e. Bypass fault (motor overload or underload (broken belt))

f. Bypass H-O-A position

7. The digital inputs for the system shall accept 24V or 115V AC (selectable). The bypass

shall incorporate internally sourced 24V power supply and not require an external control

power source.

8. Customer Interlock Terminal Strip – provide a separate terminal strip for connection of

freeze, fire, smoke contacts, and external start command. All external safety interlocks

shall remain fully functional whether the system is in Hand, Auto, or Bypass modes. The

remote start/stop contact shall operate in VFC and bypass modes.


232923 - 6

9. Dedicated digital input that will transfer motor from VFC mode to bypass mode upon dry

contact closure for fireman’s override capability. Two modes of operation are required.

a. One override mode forces the motor to bypass operation and overrides both the

VFC and bypass H-O-A switches and forces the motor to operate across the line.

The system will only respond to the digital inputs.

b. The second override mode remains as above, but will also defeat the overload and

single-phase protection for bypass and ignore all keypad and digital inputs to the

system.

10. The VFC shall include a “run permissive circuit” that will provide a normally open

contact any time a run command is provided (local or remote start command in VFC or

bypass mode). The VFC system (VFC or bypass) shall not operate the motor until it

receives a dry contact closure from a damper or valve end-switch). When the VFC

system safety interlock (fire detector, freezestat, high static pressure switch, etc.) opens,

the motor shall coast to a stop and the run permissive contact shall open, closing the

damper or valve.

11. Class 20 or 30 (selectable) electronic motor overload protection shall be included.

12. There shall be an internal switch to select either manual or automatic transfer bypass.

13. There shall be an adjustable current sensing circuit for the bypass to provide loss of load

indication when in the bypass mode.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs for compliance with requirements,

installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Coordinate roughing-in of conduit connections with electrical installer to verify actual locations

of conduit connections before VFC installation. Allow adequate space for connections by

electrical installer and allow for working clearances as required in the NEC.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Provide a VFCs for each of the three RTUs on the roof of the Agency Services Building. Refer

to the drawings for motor size and other information.

B. Select features of each VFC to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and

motor; required control sequence; and duty cycle of motor, drive, and load.

C. Select rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.

D. Coordinate control signal requirements with section 230900.

3.3 INSTALLATION


232923 - 7

A. Install and anchor each VFC assembly arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Attach by bolting to structure or mounting provisions indicated on the drawings.

B. Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring according to Division 23 Section

“Identification”.

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control

sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions

with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units.

3.5 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install control wiring between VFCs and remote devices according to Division 23 sections.

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where available.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices that

have no safety functions when switch is in hand position.

2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for

safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature

cutouts, and motor overload protectors.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Conduit and power wiring installation requirements are specified in Division 26 Sections.

B. Verify that installer has tightened electrical connectors and terminals according to

manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not

indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test each VFC element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect and

test field-assembled components and equipment installation, including pretesting and adjusting

VFCs.

C. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:


232923 - 8

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection as recommended by the

manufacturer. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

3.8 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation

requirements in Division 26 Sections.

C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. A

certified start-up form shall be filled out for each drive with a copy provided to the owner, and a

copy kept on file at the manufacturer.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, control ranges, safeties, and speed ranges.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean VFCs internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain VFCs.

3.12 EXTENDED WARRANTY

A. Warranty shall be twenty-four months from the date of certified start-up, not to exceed thirty

months from the date of shipment. The warranty shall include all parts, labor, travel time and

expenses. There shall be 365/24 technical support available via a toll free phone number.


METAL AND NONMETAL DUCTS Delanco MVC

233113 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 233113 – METAL AND NONMETAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.

3. Sheet metal materials.

4. Sealants and gaskets.

5. Hangers and supports.

6. Flexible Class I Air Ductwork.


1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting,

and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-

mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible duct connections.

3. Division 23 Section “HVAC Insulation” for fire-rated insulation systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-value): As defined in ASTM C

168. In this section, these values are the result of the formula [(Btu) x (in/hr) x (sq. ft.) x (deg

F)] or [(W/m) x (K)] at the temperature differences specified. Values expressed as Btu or W.

1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-value): 0.26 or 0.037.


A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and distribution

equipment and other components of air systems. Changes to layout or configuration of duct

system must be specifically approved in writing by Engineer. Accompany requests for layout


233113 - 2

modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design

results without increasing system total pressure.


A. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads

and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives.


B. Shop Drawings from duct fabrication shop, drawn to a scale not smaller than 1/4" equals 1 foot,

on drawing sheets same size as the Contract Drawings, detailing:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.

3. Indication of ductwork construction materials.

4. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.

5. Elevation of top of ducts.

6. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.

7. Fittings.

8. Reinforcement and spacing.

9. Seam and joint construction.

10. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

11. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.

12. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels.

13. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, and vibration

isolation.

14. Coordination with building structure and space available based on actual steel shop

drawings.

C. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and

coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction,

building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct

layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components.

3. Structural members to which duct will be attached.

4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.

6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.


233113 - 3

b. Air outlets and inlets.

c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

D. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and installed

accessories and devices.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems,” unless


B. Comply with NFPA 90B, “Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems,”



A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles

with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for

use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. Store and

handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Deliver and store all ductwork so it remains dry and free of any dirt or dust.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-

pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and

other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular

Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types

and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable

sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."


233113 - 4

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on

indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for

static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,

and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

C. Exposed round ducts shall have Longitudinal Seam positioned on the top.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and

Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials

involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct

construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,

seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum

ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner with Reinforced Coating System:

1. General Properties:

a. Operating Temperature (max) – ASTM C 411: 250°F.

b. Air Velocity (max) – ASTM C 1071: 6,000 ft/min.

c. Water Repellency – INDA IST 80.6: ≥6.

d. Fungi Resistance – ASTM C 1338: Does not breed or promote.

e. Fungi Resistance – ASTM G 21: No growth.


233113 - 5

f. Bacteria Resistance – ASTM G 22: No growth.

g. Maximum Flame Spread Index - UL 723, NRTL Certified: 25.

h. Maximum Smoke Developed Index - UL 723, NRTL Certified: 50.

i. UL Listed.

j. Greenguard® Certification meeting ASHRAE 62.1 requirements.

k. Reinforced Coating: Acrylic Polymer Permacote with glass mat reinforcement.

l. Comply with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Installation Standard.

2. Sound Absorption Coefficients:

Thickness

Sound Absorption Coefficient at Frequency

(Cycles per Second)

125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC

1 Inch 0.08 0.31 0.64 0.84 0.97 1.03 0.70

3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following or an approved equal indicating compliance with the above mentions properties

and the published sound absorption coefficients for the Acceptable Product, listed below:

a. Johns Manville.

b. Certainteed

c. Owen Corning


4. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with

ASTM C 916.

5. Acceptable Product: Johns Manville, Model ‘Linacoustic® RC’.

a. Note: Non-reinforced fibrous-glass duct liner systems are not acceptable.

2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and

gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index

of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.


233113 - 6

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.


A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized

rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2,

"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and

bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible

with duct materials.

G. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2.7 FLEXIBLE CLASS I AIR DUCT

A. Ductwork systems shall be UL-181 approved for Class I air ducts. Ductwork systems shall meet

the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B and UMC 6-1. This is pre-insulated, round air duct with

a reinforced grey polyester outside jacket enclosing fiberglass insulation wrapped around

continuous inner air barrier film reinforced with an encapsulated steel wire helix. Installation

shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations including hangers and spacing.

Maximum allowable length of flexible air duct shall be 6’-0”. Install only where indicated on

drawings.

1. Insulation Thickness: Insulation thickness and resulting insulation R-Value shall meet all

requirements stipulated within Section 230700.

2. Acceptable Products:

a. JP Lamborn Co, Model RPR-25R6 (R-6 Insulation Value).

b. JP Lamborn Co, Model RPR-25R8 (R-8 Insulation Value).

c. Or equal


233113 - 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct

system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and

calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.

Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and

Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for

branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness and connective

flanging.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and

enclosures.

J. Install ductwork so as not to encroach on required clearances above or around electrical panels.

K. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to

view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal

flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2

inches.

L. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions seal the penetrations with UL rated

method.

M. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.

Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."


233113 - 8

2. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class C.

3. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.

4. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which

hangers are being attached.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum

Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports

within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,

bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16

feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section

"Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have

duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.

Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.



3.7 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated.


233113 - 9

B. Minimum duct seal level requirements

1. Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the followings static-pressure

classifications:

a. Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg.

b. Return Ducts: 2 inch wg, negative pressure

c. Exhaust Ducts: 2-inch wg, negative pressure

C. Internal Duct Liner:

1. Where indicated on the plans use Reinforced fibrous glass, 1 inch thick.

D. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane

Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-

1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have

proportionately fewer segments.

1) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.

c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.

E. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.

b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

1) Acceptable Product: Acme Model No. 176.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical

Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.

3.8 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A. Install internal liner on ducts as indicated on the drawings.

B. Duct sizes indicated on the drawings are net free area. Increase duct sizes indicated on the

drawings to allow for the internal liner.


233113 - 10

C. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive

at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness are

prohibited.

D. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.

E. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

F. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge

overlapping.

G. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,

unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

H. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12

inches transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not

exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

I. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either

channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the

following locations:

1. Fan discharge.

2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.

J. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane

assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout

means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or

welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire-damper sleeve.


PRE-MANUFACTURED EXTERIOR DUCTING Delanco MVC

233114 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 233114 – PRE-MANUFACTURED EXTERIOR DUCTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior Ductwork Systems


1. Division 23 Section “Metal & Nonmetal HVAC Ducts”

2. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting,

and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

3. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-

mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible duct connections.

4. Division 01 Section “Construction Waste Management”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-value): As defined in ASTM C

168. In this section, these values are the result of the formula [(Btu) x (in/hr) x (sq. ft.) x (deg

F)] or [(W/m) x (K)] at the temperature differences specified. Values expressed as Btu or W.

1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-value): 0.26 or 0.037.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Total installed system shall carry a manufacturer’s 10-year limited warranty.


A. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads

and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"


233114 - 2

B. Fire & Smoke Performance

1. The rigid phenolic insulation panels used in the fabrication of KoolTech ductwork and /

or ductwork sections fabricated from the Kingspan KoolDuct System shall achieve the

following fire and smoke performance requirements:

a. ASTM E 84–08a – unfaced or composite (insulation, facing and adhesive) of low

contribution to fire growth not exceeding 25 Flame Spread and 50 Smoke

Developed indices;

b. UL 723 – unfaced or composite (insulation, facing and adhesive) of low

contribution to fire growth not exceeding 25 Flame Spread and 50 Smoke

Developed indices

c. UL 181 – UL/ULC classification as a Class 1 Air Duct to NFPA Standards 90A &

90B.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Ductwork, Fittings, Supports,


B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer, drawn to a scale not smaller than 1/4" equals 1 foot, on

drawing sheets same size as the Contract Drawings, detailing:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.

3. Indication of ductwork construction materials.

4. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.

5. Elevation of top of ducts.

6. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.

7. Fittings.

8. Reinforcement and spacing.

9. Seam and joint construction.

10. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

11. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.

12. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels.

13. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, and vibration

isolation.

14. Coordination with building structure and space available based on actual steel shop

drawings.


A. Deliver sealant materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels

indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot

life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. Store and handle

sealant materials according to manufacturer's written recommendations.


233114 - 3

B. Deliver and store all ductwork so it remains dry and free of any dirt or dust.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Exterior duct system shall be Dual-Tech system, by PTM Manufacturing, LLC. Newark, DE,

19713 302-455-9733. PTM design guidelines shall be strictly adhered too. Or equal by

www.thermaduct.com/Outdoor-Duct or AQC Industries -Q Duct (www.blueduct.com)

2.2 EXTERNAL DUCTWORK

A. Outdoor Ductwork Insulation:

1. Material

a. Ductwork shall be double wall R8 (30mm) Kingspan KoolDuct. The panels used

in the fabrication of Dual-Tech ductwork from the Kingspan KoolDuct System

shall be Kingspan KoolDuct rigid phenolic insulation panels of nominal

dimensions 12.89 ft x 3.94 ft and minimum compressive strength 29 psi, as

manufactured by Kingspan Insulation Ltd and detailed in App. A1

b. Kingspan KoolDuct rigid phenolic insulation panels shall comprise a 3.4–3.75 pcf

nominal density CFC/HCFC–free rigid phenolic insulation core with zero Ozone

Depletion Potential (ODP), autohesively bonded on both sides to a 1 mil low vapor

permeability aluminum foil facing reinforced with a 0.2” glass scrim.

c. Kingspan KoolDuct rigid phenolic insulation panels are available in thicknesses of

1 3/16” (R-8.1 ft2.hr.ºF/Btu), as per design Thermal Requirements for double wall

and a combined R16 thermal value.

d. All other components required for the fabrication of ductwork from the Kingspan

KoolDuct System including the silicone sealant, contact adhesive, aluminum tape,

self–adhesive gasket, ductwork reinforcements, closures, connectors and flanges

shall be as approved / supplied by Kingspan Insulation Ltd.

e. Weather barrier shall be fabricated of mill finished embossed aluminum sheeting,

0.032” in thickness. Exposed seams to be covered with 1” butyl and a 8” embossed

aluminum beaded bands, secured with #10 self-tapping, stainless screws with

weather seal washers

f. At weather barrier abutment locations, an industrial grade RTV silicone caulk shall

be utilized, where applicable.

g. Seams exposed to the weather shall be covered and sealed with a 1” wide by 1/8”

thick butyl compound.

h. All screws utilized to fasten panel system together shall be #10 x 1/2” self-tapping,

stainless steel, weather seal washer screws.

http://www.thermaduct.com/Outdoor-Duct


233114 - 4

i. Contact cement or 2-sided adhesive tape shall be utilized for laminating insulation

material to the weather barrier sheeting.

j. Foil tape used for sealing the insulation edges shall be a minimum thickness of

1.25 mil.

B. Sealant Materials

1. All internal seams must be fully sealed with an unbroken layer of silicone sealant.

2. Each ductwork section must be duly connected with a jointing system approved Kingspan

Insulation Ltd., and sufficient silicone sealant should be applied in order to seal the rigid

phenolic insulation panel and ensure minimum air leakage.

3. Ductwork reinforcement, if necessary, shall be applied to protect against side

deformation from both positive and negative pressure.

4. All external seams where two separate panels join must be taped to achieve a permanent

bond and a smooth wrinkle free appearance.

C. Hangers & Supports

1. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel

fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

a. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or

for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

b. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-

aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

2. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.

a. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or

galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

b. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction

Standards—Metal and Flexible” for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel

rod diameters.

c. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces

painted with zinc-chromate primer.

3. Penetration into duct is not permitted.

4. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

a. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

b. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.

c. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are

electrolytically separated from ducts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT (LEED)

A. The contractor, subcontractors, and their personnel shall follow the procedures and practices for

waste separation, collection and transport as defined in the contractor’s “Waste Management

Plan” as required by Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management."


233114 - 5

3.2 FABRICATION

A. Sizing: Panel system shall be sized in four overlapping sections to provide a complete seal

surrounding KoolDuct ducting.

B. Shall be laminated to the weather barrier and sized to allow for sufficient overlap as indicated in

section 3.0 above. Second wall ducting shall be adhered utilizing appropriate contact method.

C. Where feasible all general fabrication shall be performed in the shop and be based off of

approved project drawing or direct field measurements.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Ducting system sections shall be fitted into place and connected using aluminum flange and

KoolDuct gasket as designed by Kingspan.

B. Once fitted, joints will be covered with 1 3/16” (30mm) R8 KoolDuct with overlap seams and

covered with an 5” beaded banding fabricated of mill finished embossed aluminum sheeting,

0.032” in thickness. Edges to be covered with 1” butyl. Embossed aluminum beaded bands,

secured with #10 self tapping, stainless screws with weather seal washers.

C. At weather barrier abutment locations, an industrial grade RTV silicone caulk shall be utilized,

where applicable. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

3.4 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.5 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and

Balancing for HVAC."

3.6 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. All exterior-mounted ductwork shall be manufactured with the system specified here within.


AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Delanco MVC

233300 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual volume dampers.

2. Control dampers.

3. Flange connectors.

4. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.


6. Turning vanes.

7. Duct accessory hardware.


1. Division 23 Section "Ductwork”.

2. Division 23 Section “HVAC Insulation”

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Manual-volume dampers.

2. Control dampers, including leakage rate data in (cfm/ft2 @ in. wg).

3. Access Doors.

B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and

attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.

Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field

assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings and manual- and control-volume damper installations

b. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


233300 - 2

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and



A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with

NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise

indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches

2.2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS – STEEL:

A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for

stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without

vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure

class.

1. Pressure Classifications of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts

with axles, full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

B. Standard Volume Dampers: Single blade or multiple, opposed-blade design unless otherwise

indicated on drawings, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside air stream, and suitable for

horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 20 gauge thick,

with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges for attaching to walls; and

flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch thick, galvanized, sheet steel.

3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.


233300 - 3

4. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

5. Provide with standoff bracket on ducts that are insulated.

C. Acceptable Volume Damper: www.greenheck.com Greenheck Fan Corporation Model MBD-

15 rectangular or MBDR-50 round. Or equivalent by Ruskin or Nailer, Or approved equal

2.3 LOW LEAK CONTROL DAMPERS - STEEL


following:

1. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

2. McGill AirFlow LLC.

3. METALAIRE, Inc.

4. Nailor Industries Inc.

5. Ruskin Company.

6. Vent Products Company, Inc.

7. Young Regulator Company.


B. Damper actuators are specified in section 230900 – “Automatic Control Systems”.

C. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside air stream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings

Seal for both air performance and air leakage.

1. Minimum leakage rating: 4 cfm/ft2 @ 1 in. wg.

D. Frames:

1. Hat shaped.

2. Galvanized steel channels, 0.064 inch thick.

3. Mitered and welded corners.

E. Blades:

1. Blades shall be double-skin, airfoil type.

2. Multiple blades with maximum blade width of 8 inches.

3. Opposed blade design.

4. Galvanized Steel.

5. 0.064 inch thick.

6. Blade Edging: EPDM rubber blade seals.

F. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel

and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.

1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

G. Bearings:

1. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wag or less shall have axles, full length

of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

http://www.greenheck.com/


233300 - 4

2. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

H. Acceptable Low Leak Control damper: www.greenheck.com: Greenheck Fan Corporation

Model No. VCD-33.

2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.

3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.


B. Description: Roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets,

and components.

C. Material: Provide material compatible with duct materials.

D. Gauge and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.5 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS



1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

2. Acudor Products, Inc.

3. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

4. Greenheck Fan Corporation.


6. Nailor Industries Inc.

7. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.


B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"

and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular.

b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class.

c. Vision panel.

d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.

http://www.greenheck.com/


233300 - 5

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.

d. Access Doors Larger than 24 by 48 inches: Four hinges and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.

4. Acceptable Duct-Mounted Access Door: www.acudor.com: Acudor Model No. HD-

5070

2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCTS



1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.


3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.


B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound,

spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.

4. Insulation R-Value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.

5. Acceptable Product: www.flexmasterusa.com: Flexmaster USA Product No. Type 5B

Flex Duct.

C. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Nylon strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.

2.7 TURNING VANES

A. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

B. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger

dimensions.

2.8 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap

and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to

suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline

and grease.

http://www.acudor.com/

http://www.flexmasterusa.com/


233300 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in

galvanized-steel

C. Low leak dampers shall be used when separating conditioned air and outside ambient air and as

follows:

1. Provide low leak dampers in the duct or fan throat for all exhaust fans.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend

from larger ducts. Dampers are to be installed at a minimum of two duct diameters from fitting.

Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of

same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install turning vanes so that the leading and trailing edges are in the direction of the desired

airflow direction.

H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining

accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of new and existing duct coils.

2. Control devices requiring inspection.

I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

J. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

K. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.

L. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.



1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.


233300 - 7

3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.


VAV TERMINAL UNITS Delanco MVC

233600 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 233600 – VAV TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Single-duct shutoff VAV terminal units.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include rated capacities, furnished specialties,

sound-power ratings, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances,

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Include a schedule showing unique model designation, room location, model number,

size, and accessories furnished.

2. Wiring Diagrams: signal and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and

Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes.

2. Instructions for adjusting software set points.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, accessories, and performance requirements of air

terminal units and are based on the specific system indicated."



intended use.

C. NFPA Compliance: Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the

Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."


233600 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHUTOFF SINGLE-DUCT VAV AIR TERMINAL UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide variable air volume (VAV)

products by one of the manufacturers specified:

1. Carnes

2. Carrier

3. Environmental Technologies, Inc.; Enviro-Air Div.

4. Krueger.

5. Titus.

6. Trane Co. (The);

7. Tuttle & Bailey.


B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components located

inside a protective metal shroud.

C. Casing: reinforced galvanized steel or aluminum housing, airtight seams.

1. Casing Lining: 3/4-inch-thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with

ASTM C 1071; secured with adhesive. Cover liner with nonporous foil.

2. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.

3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.

4. Access: Removable panels for access to dampers and other parts requiring service,

adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket.

5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

D. Regulator Assembly: Extruded-aluminum or galvanized-steel components; key damper blades

onto shaft with nylon-fitted pivot points located inside unit casing.

1. Automatic Flow-Control Assembly: Combined spring rates shall be matched for each

volume-regulator size with machined dashpot for stable operation.

2. Factory-calibrated and field-adjustable assembly with shaft extension for connection to

externally mounted control actuator.

E. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 3 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg

inlet static pressure.

2. Damper Position: Normally open.

F. Multioutlet Attenuator Section: With quantity and diameter of collars indicated; each with

locking butterfly balancing damper.

G. Hot-Water Heating Coil: Copper tube, mechanically expanded into aluminum-plate fins; leak

tested underwater to 200 psig, and factory installed.


233600 - 3

H. DDC Controls: Single-package unitary controller and actuator specified in Division 23 Section

"Building Automation and Control System."

I. DDC Controls: Bidirectional damper operators and microprocessor-based controller and room

sensor shall be compatible with temperature controls specified in Division 23 Section

"Automatic Temperature Controls" and shall have the following features:

1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed, powered open.

2. Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure-independent, variable-air-volume controller with

electronic airflow transducer with multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet, factory

calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes, and having the following features:

a. Proportional, plus integral control of room temperature.

b. Time-proportional reheat-coil control.

c. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode.

d. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.

e. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.

f. Communication with temperature-control system specified in Division 23 Section

"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."

3. Room Sensor: Wall mounting, with temperature set-point adjustment and access for

connection of portable operator terminal.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Identification: Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and

minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal.

B. Verification of Performance: Rate air terminal units according to ARI 880.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and

maintenance.

3.2 CONNECTIONS


general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to air terminal units to allow service and maintenance.

C. Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping,"

connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange;

and to return with balancing valve and union or flange.

D. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Division 23 Section "Ductwork."


233600 - 4


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing air terminal units and after controls circuitry has been energized, test for

compliance with requirements.

2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After controls circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do

the following:

1. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer

to achieve proper performance.

2. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible.

3. Verify that control connections are complete.

4. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible.

5. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.


PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION Delanco MVC

234100 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 23

SECTION 234100 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes factory-fabricated air-filter devices and media used to remove particulate

matter from air for HVAC applications.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. HEPA: High-efficiency particulate air.

B. Air Handling Unit: Any HVAC unit that moves air, such as, central air handlers, packaged

rooftop units, cabinet heaters, unit ventilators, fan coil units, dehumidification units, make-up

air units, gas furnaces, air to air heat exchangers, etc.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include dimensions; operating characteristics; required clearances and access;

rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency and test

method; fire classification; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details to illustrate component

assemblies and attachments.

1. Show filter rack assembly, dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of

components.

2. Include setting drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor bolts and

anchorages.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and rack to include in operation, and

maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Comply with ARI 850.


234100 - 2

B. Comply with ASHRAE 52.1 and ASHRAE 52.2 for method of testing and rating air-filter units.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 for installing electrical components.

D. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and number of filters with manufacturer of each unit requiring air filters.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS



1. Provide one complete set of filters for each filter bank. If system includes prefilters,

provide only prefilters.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:

1. Air Filters, and Filter-Holding Systems:

a. Camfil/Farr

b. AAF International.

c. Airguard Industries, Inc.


2.2 DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel-type, replaceable air filters. Filters

shall be 1” or 2” thick UL Class 2 throwaway media material; construct media of interlaced

glass fiber, spray with non-flammable adhesive, frame in throwaway fiberboard casings, and

sandwich between perforated metal grills. Provide filters with rated face velocity of 500 fpm,

initial resistance of no greater than .15” w.g., final rated resistance of .30” w.g., and average

arrestance of 80%.

2.3 PLEATED MEDIUM EFFICIENCY DISPOSABLE FILTERS

A. Air filters shall be medium efficiency ASHRAE pleated panels consisting of synthetic media,

welded wire media support grid, and Kraft board enclosing frame.

B. Construction


234100 - 3

1. Filter media shall be lofted moisture resistant synthetic media formed into a uniform

radial pleat.

2. A welded wire grid, spot welded on one-inch centers and treated for corrosion resistance

shall be bonded to the downstream side of the media to maintain radial pleats and prevent

media oscillation.

3. A biodegradable enclosing frame of virgin-origin Kraft board shall provide a rigid and

durable enclosure. It shall be produced under an initiative for sustainable forest

management. The frame shall be bonded to the media on all sides to prevent air bypass.

Integral diagonal support members on the air entering and air exiting side shall be bonded

to the apex of each pleat to maintain uniform pleat spacing in varying airflows.

C. Performance

1. The filter shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value of MERV 13 when

evaluated under the guidelines of ASHRAE Standard 52.2-2007. It shall meet the

minimum requirements as published by the United States Green Building Council for

LEED credit(s) as prescribed in published manuals for new or existing buildings.

2. Initial resistance to airflow shall not exceed 0.41” for a 2” deep or 0.35” for a 4” deep

filter at a velocity of 500 fpm.

3. The filter shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as UL Class 2.

4. Manufacturer shall guarantee the integrity of the filter pack to 2.0” w.g.

5. Manufacturer shall provide evidence of facility certification to ISO 9001:2000.

D. Acceptable Product: www.camfilfarr.com ,Camfil Farr Air Filters AP Thirteen

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Install pleated media efficiency disposable filters in the following air handling units:

1. Packaged HVAC units

2. Air-to-air heat exchangers

B. Install disposable panel filters for the following air handling units.

1. Cabinet Heaters

2. Ductless Split air conditioning units.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install filter frames according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter

holding frames to substrate.

C. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling unit installations.

http://www.camfilfarr.com/


234100 - 4

3.3 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling and air-

distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media.


GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Delanco MVC

260010 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 260010 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Sections

and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 26, 27

and 28.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for Electrical,

Communications, and Safety/Security system installations. It is intended to supplement

Division 1 sections. Any conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer

for clarification.

B. Furnish and install all work indicated and specified in accordance with these specifications

and accompanying contract drawings. This shall include all required labor, materials,

equipment, programming, testing, and supervision.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following definitions used in mechanical and electrical sections are in addition to those

listed in Supplementary General Conditions:

1. Provide: Shall mean "furnish and install" indicated work

2. Install: Installation of item and all necessary related work to provide fully operational

devices.

3. Furnish: Procurement and delivery to jobsite of equipment for installation.

4. Remove: Disconnect and take from existing location, including accompanying sealant,

supports, anchors, and associated materials, and remove from the site for legal disposal

or recycling, or store and protect for reinstallation when noted.

5. Replace: Remove and provide new.

6. Re-install: Install existing item in same or new location as indicated. Provide all

necessary hardware, supports, extension of existing services, etc as required.

7. Herein: shall mean the contents of a particular section where this term appears.

8. Indicated: Indicated on contract drawings.

9. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,

unpainted storage areas without ceilings, chases and shafts, attics, ceiling plenums,

unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.


260010 - 2

10. Exposed Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished

occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

11. Exposed Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient


12. Concealed Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical

contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in walls or shafts.

13. Concealed Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather

conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

14. Listed or labeled shall mean as defined in NFPA 70 Article 100, by a Testing Agency

acceptable to Authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ) and marked for intended use.

15. Wiring: Conduit, fittings, wire, junction and outlet boxes, switches, and items necessary

or relating to such wiring.

16. Work: The labor, equipment, and materials required as part of the project.

17. Trades: refers to those specifically skilled in the work performed under a particular

section of this contract.

18. Electrical Contractor/E.C. shall mean the contractor or sub-contractor responsible for the

work described in Division 26, 27, and 28 and indicated on the electrical drawings.

1.4 DRAWINGS

A. The Electrical work is generally indicated on the Electrical Drawings, but additional related

information and details may appear on other project drawings, and these shall become a part of

each Contract. All project drawings are intended to be complimentary.

1. Refer to the Architectural drawings, when applicable, for information such as locations

of fire rated assemblies, ceiling types and heights, chase dimensions, structural steel

dimensions, etc.

2. The Architectural Drawings and details shall govern the location and arrangement of

equipment, mounting heights, and similar conditions within finished spaces.

3. Notify the Architect of any discrepancies between any of the drawings and/or the

specifications.

B. The Drawings are diagrammatic in nature and indicate the general configuration of the work.

All work that will be required for the actual installation is not necessarily indicated due to the

scale of the drawings. Coordinate the actual installation of all work with all other building

system components and other Contractors, and provide all necessary coordination, offsets,

accessories, materials, etc. as part of the work.

1.5 TRUE INTENT

A. The Drawings and Specifications are intended to describe a complete operating system. All

labor, material or equipment, which is not specified or indicated but is necessary for the

operation and completion of a properly operating system, according to the true intent of the

Specifications and Drawings and as interpreted by the Architect/Engineer, shall be furnished

as a part of the Contract, as though it were specifically detailed and described.

B. Coordinate and assign work such that all work and materials are provided and coordinated

between all subcontractors and suppliers to provide complete and operational systems. The


260010 - 3

specification format, section numbers and drawing numbering or nomenclature is not intended

to assign work within the Contract.

1.6 DIMENSIONS, GRADES AND SURVEYS:

A. Dimensions, grades, elevations and locations shown on the Drawings are approximate. Verify

all lines, grades and dimensions prior to starting the work. All necessary measurements,

surveys, lines, grades, and elevations are the responsibility of the Contractor. Verify all lines

and grades with the local controlling agency, AHJ or other party where required.

1.7 PERMITS, FEES AND CODES:

A. Perform all work in compliance with the codes, laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of

federal, state, or local Authorities Having Jurisdiction over the premises. All such codes, laws,

ordinances, rules and regulations are hereby incorporated and made a part of these

specifications.

B. Work shall be done in accordance with, but not limited to, the applicable sections of the latest

edition and supplement to the following Codes and Standards:

1. ANSI American National Standard Institute

2. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

3. FS Federal Specification

4. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

5. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

6. NFPA National Fire Protection Association

7. UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

8. IBC International Building Code

9. NEC National Electric Code

10. All relevant sub-codes adopted by the local AHJ.

C. The drawings and specifications are not intended to conflict with the above documents.

Request clarifications from the Architect/Engineer regarding discrepancies between relevant

codes and the drawings and specifications prior to bidding. Submission of a bid shall indicate

that bidder is familiar with the applicable code requirements and has included such work in the

bid.

D. All work performed on this project and all equipment furnished for this project shall be in

conformance with the regulations and requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act

(OSHA). The Contractor is solely responsible for compliance with OSHA regulations. All

purchased equipment shall be designed, manufactured, and furnished with the necessary

accessories to meet OSHA requirements. All construction facilities, including ladders,

platforms, guard rails, safety features, etc. shall meet OSHA requirements.

1.8 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

A. All materials and equipment shall be new, and shall conform to the grade, quality and standards

specified. Where required by applicable bidding requirements and Division 1 sections, materials

and equipment shall meet applicable USA steel certifications and/or shall be manufactured in the


260010 - 4

USA.Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions for type

and capacity of equipment used. Manufacturer’s instructions shall be considered part of the

specifications. Type, capacity and application of equipment shall be suitable and shall operate

satisfactorily for the purpose intended.

C. Equipment used as the basis-of-design as indicated on the Drawings defines the general space

requirements, weights and related services (electrical services, piping connections, etc.).

Provide equipment of similar size, requirements and clearances which shall not necessitate

revisions to the building construction or other trades. If revisions are required due to

substitution the Contractor shall pay all costs for any required revisions. No revisions shall be

made without Architect/Engineer’s written approval.

1.9 PERFORMANCE OF EQUIPMENT

A. All materials, equipment and systems specified or required for the completion of the work,

shall be completely satisfactory and acceptable in operation, performance, and capacity. No

approval, either written or verbal, of any drawings, descriptive data of samples of such

material, equipment and/or appurtenances, shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to

provide systems in complete working order at the completion of the work.

B. Any material, equipment, or appurtenances, which does not comply with the drawings and/or

specification requirements, or which is not new, or which is damaged prior to acceptance by

the Architect/Engineer, shall be removed and replaced with acceptable materials, equipment

and/or appurtenance or put in acceptable working condition, to the satisfaction of the

Architect/Engineer.

C. All equipment and systems shall be electrically and mechanically correct. All equipment and

systems shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration as determined by the

Architect/Engineer. Eliminate any objectionable noise or vibration produced and transmitted

to occupied portions of the building by any system or equipment, to the satisfaction of the


1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING:

A. All Cutting and Patching shall be completed in accordance with Division 1, Cutting and

Patching section.

B. New Construction: Each Contractor shall furnish complete information as to size and exact

location of openings and/or sleeves required in new floors, walls, or roofs to the General

Contractor or applicable sub-contractor(s) such that openings are provided in new construction

as the work progresses.

1. Supports: The General Contractor will provide framed roof or floor openings and lintels

in new masonry walls.

2. Roofing: The General Contractor will provide roof flashing work in conjunction with the

project’s roofing installation.

3. If openings are omitted or are incorrect through failure to follow these instructions, the

Contractor shall be responsible for cutting and patching of the construction in a manner

approved by the Architect/Engineer.


260010 - 5

C. Existing Construction: Each Contractor shall cut and patch existing building construction as

required for the installation of new work, unless otherwise noted. All cutting and openings

shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer.

1. Patching: All patching of existing surfaces shall match the existing construction finish.

2. Supports: All openings made in existing floors, walls, roof decks, etc. shall be supported

in a manner approved by the Architect/Engineer to maintain the structural integrity of the

construction. The Contractor shall provide lintels in all masonry wall openings and

structural steel angle framed openings for all roof and floor penetrations. Submit

drawings depicting each framed opening and lintel size, type, and location to the


3. Roof Work: Cutting and patching of the existing roof as required to install new systems

and equipment, and/or the removal of existing systems, shall be performed by an

approved and certified roofing contractor. Patching and flashing of the existing roof

shall be made with materials and methods certified by the existing roofing manufacturer.

D. General: All cutting and patching shall be done by mechanics experienced in their respective

lines of work.

1. All cutting shall minimize damage to adjacent surfaces. If damage occurs the Contractor

shall replace or repair the damaged materials with new materials in a manner approved

by the Architect/Engineer.

2. When necessary to cut and remove portions of any walls, floors, ceilings, roof or

sitework to perform the work, Contractor shall perform cutting and fitting, remove all

excess material, and patch or replace all damaged construction in a manner approved by

the Architect/Engineer.

3. No cutting shall be done which may affect the building structurally or architecturally.

Any damage incidental to cutting or other causes in the performance of this Contract

shall be made good by replacement or repairs. Cutting shall be done only with the prior

approval of the Architect

4. Patch all openings left in existing walls, floors and ceilings when obsolete materials are

removed. Match adjacent construction and finishes.

E. Patch and/or seal all openings or penetrations made in fire rated floors, ceilings or partitions

after work has been installed. The material used for sealing the openings shall have a fire

rating equal to or greater than the rating of the floor, ceiling or partition material. All fire

sealant material shall be U.L. classified and approved by the Architect/Engineer.

1.11 RUBBISH REMOVAL AND CLEAN-UP

A. Periodically, and at the completion of the work, remove from the building and site all rubbish

and accumulated materials, and leave the workplace in a clean, orderly and acceptable

condition. Provide dumpsters, trash containers, hauling and approved disposal fees associated

with the work.

B. Clean all installed materials and equipment of paint splashes, grease stains, dust, finger marks,

and all other unsightly marks prior to substantial completion inspection.

1.12 TESTS AND CERTIFICATIONS


260010 - 6

A. The following requirements are supplementary to test requirements specified in individual

equipment or systems Sections.

1. Written notice of test date shall be given to Architect/Engineer and other parties at least

72 hours prior to tests.

2. Concealed work shall remain uncovered until required tests have been completed

3. Conduct preliminary test of equipment as soon as conditions permit. Make changes,

adjustments, or replacements based on test results prior to final acceptance tests.

4. Conduct performance and operating tests for each system or equipment in presence of

the Architect/Engineer. Coordinate testing with the manufacturer’s representative and/or

AHJ when required.

5. Furnish labor, material, and instruments and include all other costs in connection with

tests.

6. Obtain certificates of approval and/or acceptance in compliance with regulations of AHJ.

Work shall not be complete until such certificates have been delivered to the


B. Contractor shall certify after testing that all systems and equipment operate safely, efficiently,

and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and the intent of the drawings and

specifications.

1.13 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect work and materials against dirt, water, chemicals, plaster or damage. All openings in

stored or installed materials (pipes, ductwork, conduit, etc.), shall be sealed to exclude dirt,

sand, and other foreign substances. Any damaged materials shall be removed and replaced

regardless of the cause of the damage.

B. Protect all surfaces against damage from welding, cutting, burning, soldering or similar

construction functions. Special care shall be directed to exposed finished masonry, metal or

wood surfaces, painted surfaces, finished flooring, and finished ceilings.

C. Any damage caused by Contractor’s neglect or by the elements due to the Contractor’s neglect,

either to existing work, or to his work or to the work of any other Contractor, shall be repaired

or replaced in a manner approved by the Architect/Engineer.

D. Clean all materials and equipment to remove all paint, grease, oil, scale, rust, dirt, mud, dust,

sand, and other foreign material prior to substantial completion inspection. Remove traces of

any cleaning materials. Clean the interior of all cabinets, fixtures and equipment and remove

dust, dirt and debris.

1.14 QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP

A. All work shall be installed in a first class, neat and workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled

in the trade involved. The quality of workmanship shall be subject to the approval of the

Architect/Engineer. Any work of inferior quality and/or workmanship shall be corrected in a

manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.

1.15 SUBSTITUTIONS


260010 - 7

A. Various products are used as the Basis-of-Design for systems and equipment and are specified

by a manufacturer's name and model number. Unless otherwise indicated, other manufacturer's

products may be submitted for consideration as a substitution in accordance with the

requirements set forth in Instructions to Bidders and/or Division 1 sections, and as follows.

1. The Architect/Engineer shall be the sole judge as to the acceptance of a product that is

submitted for acceptance as a substitution

2. The proposed substitute shall include all labor and materials required to install and

operate the equipment in accordance with the original design concept, including the cost

of any changes to work under this section, or other sections or Contracts, such as; access

openings, equipment pads, supports, pipe or duct connections, motors, controls, electrical

and control wiring.

3. Contractor shall verify that substitute equipment will fit into the designated spaces,

verify that dimensions provide adequate space for the equipment and allow clearances

for connections and servicing, and verify acceptance of any additional costs from other

Contractors resulting from the substitute product, prior to submission to the

Architect/Engineer for acceptance.

1.16 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 "Submittals".

B. Prepare and submit a Submittal Schedule which shall include a list of products to be submitted

and indicate the product manufacturer, model, and date the information will be submitted to

the Architect/Engineer. The schedule shall be submitted within two weeks after notice-to-

proceed and prior to the submission of individual product submittals.

C. After acceptance of the Submittal Schedule, submit Shop Drawings and Submittals and obtain

acceptance of the Architect/Engineer before any equipment is ordered or work is

accomplished. Verify the required number of copies of each submittal to be submitted.

1. Submittals shall be in the form of clearly legible manufacturers printed catalogs, CAD-

generated drawings, pamphlets, technical data, test information, and installation

instructions. Clearly indicate the location, service and function of each particular item.

Identification shall be made in ink with specific model numbers highlighted and

accessories highlighted.

2. Submittals shall be completely referenced and identified. Descriptive information and

data shall be complete. Submittals which only show partial or general information will

not be acceptable and will be returned.

3. Contractor shall inform the Engineer, in writing, of any deviations in the shop drawings

and submittals where the submitted item deviates from the Contract Documents. This

written advisory shall accompany the initial submittal and shall state the reasons for the

deviations.

D. The Architect/Engineer will check the Shop Drawings and Submittals for conformance with

the Contract Documents. The Engineer’s acceptance of the Shop Drawings and Submittals

does not release the Contractor from providing all specific requirements of the equipment and

installation not listed in the Submittal but required by the Contract Documents.


260010 - 8

E. Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions that are to be confirmed at the job site, for

coordination in the ordering and assembly of systems and equipment, for information that

pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction, and for coordination

of the work of all trades.

F. The following specific items and information shall be included in all Shop Drawings and

Submittals:

1. Capacity and performance data as shown on the Equipment Schedules or as specified.

2. Complete descriptive data on the systems, equipment and specialties which are specified,

scheduled, or shown, so that compliance with the Contract Documents can be

determined.

3. Electrical wiring diagrams (power and control) for electric motor driven equipment.

1.17 COORDINATION AND COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 “Coordination Drawings”.

B. All Contractors and sub-contractors shall coordinate the installation of all equipment and

material.

C. Layout of building systems, equipment, fixtures, piping, ductwork, conduit, specialty items,

and accessories indicated on the Contract Drawings is diagrammatic. Variations in alignment,

elevation, and detail will be required to avoid interference and satisfy architectural and

structural limitations. All such variations are not necessarily indicated.

D. Coordination drawings shall be prepared, reviewed and coordinated in advance of any work

being performed in any area. The drawings and coordination shall follow the project phasing

schedule where applicable.

1. Prepare plans, sections and elevations to indicate the proposed locations of fixtures,

piping, ductwork, conduit, equipment, and materials. Include the following:

a. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.

b. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including access door

openings and component removal

c. Equipment connections, mounting and support details.

d. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.

e. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.

f. Sizes and locations of equipment pads and bases.

E. Prepare overall coordinated reflected ceiling plans which shall include, but not be limited to,

air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, access

doors, and other ceiling-mounted equipment or items.

1. All Contractors and sub-contractors shall carefully check all the drawings and coordinate

their work with all other trades to provide a symmetrical and coordinated ceiling.

Ceiling T-bars, lights, diffusers, and other equipment shall all be symmetrically installed

with provisions made for integrating the T-bars and this equipment. Failure to


260010 - 9

coordinate the work will result in relocation of ceiling components as directed by the

Architect/Engineer at the Contractor's expense.

1.18 ALIGNMENT

A. Where several devices, panels, controllers, bells, alarms, thermostats, switches, handles, etc.,

are to be installed in a common location, this equipment shall be lined up in a horizontal or

vertical plane. Request interpretation from the Architect/Engineer for any unusual alignment

conditions.

1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 "Record Documents".

B. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the following installed

conditions:

1. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building

lines.

2. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials

installed. Revise schedules on the drawings.

3. Exterior underground equipment and materials located with triangulated dimensions.

1.20 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare and provide minimum of three (3) maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1

“Operation and Maintenance Data”.

B. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for

equipment items:

1. Written description of system operation.

2. An equipment list for each piece of equipment furnished. The list shall be in order of

equipment label and shall indicate the manufacturer, model number, serial number, and

motor horsepower and voltage ratings.

3. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance

curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and list of replacement

parts.

4. A copy of all final corrected equipment submittals, control diagrams, descriptive

brochures, and a list of all parts of each piece of equipment.

5. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine

and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and

emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

6. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;

disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, and lubrication

charts and schedules


260010 - 10

C. The purpose of this manual is to assist the Owner in routine operation, maintenance, servicing,

trouble shooting and procurement of replacement parts. All information in the manual shall

be as-built and only material pertinent to the project shall be included.

1.21 TRAINING AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 "Demonstration and Training".

B. At the completion of the work, and before final acceptance of the building by the Owner, each

Contractor, together with manufacturers’ representatives, shall instruct the Owner’s designated

representatives in the care, adjustment, maintenance and operation of equipment and systems

in accordance with Division 1.

C. A manufacture’s representative of each major component or system shall inspect his work,

make final adjustments, place them in a satisfactory working condition, and instruct the owner

in their operation. Each representative shall also provide a letter to the Architect/Engineer

indicating that an inspection has been performed, instruction given, and the equipment is

installed and operating in conformance with the manufacturer’s written installation

instructions.

1.22 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC

A. Provide temporary electric facilities in accordance with Special Requirements, Division 1

Temporary Facilities and Controls and applicable Division 26 sections. All work specified

below is by the Electrical Contractor or sub-contractor unless otherwise noted.

B. Temporary Power and Lighting - Facilities: Provide the following minimum facilities in

addition to any other temporary facilities indicated or specified.

1. Provide temporary electric service to all construction and storage trailers

2. Provide temporary power receptacles and light fixtures within the construction area for

use by all trades.

3. Each Contractor shall provide extension cords, with ground fault protection, when

required

C. Temporary lighting and power shall meet minimum OSHA requirements. All power outlets

shall be ground fault protected. Contractor shall insure compliance with all OSHA regulations.

1. Comply with applicable provisions of NEC regarding temporary electric materials and

methods.

D. Remove all temporary construction power wiring, poles, panels, hardware, accessories etc.

when it is no longer required, and prior to substantial completion.

1.23 METHOD OF PROCEDURE

A. The Drawings accompanying these Specifications are diagrammatic and intended to indicate

the approximate and relative locations of the materials and systems. Installation, connection,


260010 - 11

and inter-connection of all components of the systems shall be complete and made in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and best practices of the respective trades.

B. Care shall be used in the erection and installation of all equipment and materials to avoid

marring surfaces of the work of other Contractors. Each Contractor will be held responsible

for all such damage caused by the lack of precaution and due to negligence on the part of his

workmen.

1.24 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the

actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to Architectural interior and exterior elevations and equipment specifications for rough-

in requirements.

1.25 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of systems, materials, and

equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Coordinate systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building

components.

2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of

construction.

4. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of materials and equipment for efficient

flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning

prior to closing in the building.

5. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and

equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

6. Coordinate connection of systems with utilities and services. Comply with requirements

of governing regulations, service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required

connection for each service.

7. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,

including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements

indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown

only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual

system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect/Engineer.

8. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to

other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

9. Install equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of

disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease

fittings to an accessible location.

10. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces.

11. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required

to be installed at a specified slope.


260010 - 12

12. Install materials and equipment firmly supported and secured to the building construction

where required, and according to manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)



260030 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 260030 – ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Condition

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components for connection to

equipment furnished under Division 26 and other Divisions of the Specifications. These

components include, but are not limited to motors, starters, and disconnect switches. It also

specifies Contractor responsibility for furnishing and/or installing various components.

B. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower, kilowatts, and electrical characteristics) for

mechanical and other equipment are scheduled on the Drawings or available from submittal

(shop) drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.

Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switch and circuit breaker.

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and

service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment

features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Enclosure types and details.

b. Current and voltage ratings.

c. Short-circuit current rating or UL listing for series rating of installed devices.

d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual over current

protective devices and auxiliary components.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Maintenance data for motor disconnects and starters for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance

Manual specified in Division 1 through Division 26. Maintenance data equipment furnished

under Division 1 through Division 23 shall be provided to owner by respective contractor.


260030 - 2

1.4 REFERENCES

A. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators

B. NEMA Standards ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies

C. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

D. NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches

E. Comply with National Electrical Code NFPA Bulletin 70, latest addition.

F. Electrical components and materials shall be UL listed.




intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer’s instructions for equipment

furnished under other Divisions.

B. Determine connection locations and requirements.

C. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule of

equipment.

D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment.


A. All electrical connections shall be made by the Electrical Contractor. Motors and controls for

equipment furnished by each Contractor shall be furnished and set by the Contractor furnishing

the equipment. Where electrical work is specifically indicated to be performed by the other

Contractors, that Contractor shall perform the Work in conformance with the Electrical

Specifications for this project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Design and specification is based on equipment as manufactured by Square D Company or ap-

proved equal. Subject to the compliance with these specifications the following manufacturers


260030 - 3

may provide equivalent in quality products; however, in the event that incorporation of an

equivalent item or assembly into the work will require revisions or additions to the requirements

of other contracts, the Contractor electing to use such items or assemblies must coordinate their

installation and bear all costs of revisions or additions to the work, including costs to other con-

tractors, at no charge in the Contract Sum.

1. General Electric Co.

2. Eaton-Cutler Hammer

3. Siemens

4. ABB Automation

5. Allen Bradley


B. Disconnects, starters, controls, accessories and associated devices shall be furnished by Con-

tractors as indicated in Part 3 - Execution, of this section. Devices furnished by each Contractor

shall be consistent with Part 2 - Products, of this section.

2.2 MOTORS

A. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors, more

detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications or

motor specification.

1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads.

2. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to op-

erate in the service factor range.

3. 2-speed motors shall have two separate windings on poly-phase motors.

4. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 degrees C. environment with maximum 50ºC tempera-

ture rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation).

5. Starting capability: Frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control system, and not

less than 5 evenly time spaced starts per hour for manually controlled motors.

6. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors.

2.3 STARTERS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND WIRING

A. Motor Starter Characteristics:

1. Enclosures: NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, except in wet loca-

tions shall be NEMA 4 with conduit hubs, or units in hazardous locations which shall

have NEC proper class and division.

2. Type and size of starter shall be as recommended by motor manufacturer and the driven

equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition.

B. Manual motor-starter switches: (Basis-of-design: Square D class 2510)

1. Pilot lights and extra positions for multi-speed motors.

2. Overload protection: melting alloy type thermal overload relays.

3. Handle guard kit with padlock provision.

C. Magnetic Starters: (Basis-of-design: Square D class 8536)


260030 - 4

1. Maintained contact push buttons and pilot lights, properly arranged for single speed or

multi-speed operation as indicated. Provide with H-O-A switch.

2. Trip-free thermal overload relays, each phase.

3. Interlocks, pneumatic switches and similar devices as required for coordination with con-

trol requirements of Temperature Controls sections.

4. Built-in 120 volts control circuit transformer, fused from line side, where service exceeds

240 volts.


6. Under-voltage release or protection.

7. Hand-Off-Auto switch mounted on cover.

D. Motor connections:

1. Flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords are specifically indicated.

2.4 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. General: Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches in types, sizes duties, features ratings,

and enclosures as required or indicated. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure except for outdoor

switches, and other indicated locations provide NEMA 4 enclosures with rain tight hubs. For

motor and motor starter disconnects, provide units with horsepower ratings suitable to the loads.

B. Fusible Switches: heavy duty switches, with fuses of classes and current ratings indicated. See

Section "FUSES" for specifications. Where current limiting fuses are indicated, provide

switches with non-interchangeable feature suitable only for current limiting type fuses.

C. Non-fusible Disconnects: heavy duty switches of classes and current ratings as required or

indicated.

D. Double-Throw Switches: heavy duty switches of classes and current ratings as required or

indicated.

E. Electrical Interlocks: Provide number and arrangement of interlock contacts in switches when

indicated.

2.5 COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTER/DISCONNECT

A. Provide device with same features as magnetic motor starters and disconnect switches, in

common enclosure.

1. Basis-of-design is Square D class 8538.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Review equipment submittals prior to installation and electrical rough-in. Verify location, size,

and type of connections. Coordinate details of equipment connections with supplier and

installer.


260030 - 5

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.


A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid tight flexible conduit

with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures

encountered in heat producing equipment.

D. Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is indicated. Provide cord

and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.

E. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and

equipment connection boxes.

F. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices as indicated.

G. Verify proper rotation of three phase equipment.

H. Where applicable, extend power wire and conduit through external disconnect switches,

combination starter/disconnect switches, magnetic or manual starters, thermal switches, local

control switches, remote mounted control panels, etc. and connect to terminals in the

equipment. Otherwise, extend power wire and conduit to equipment and connect to terminals.

I. Where indicated on the drawings, extend control wire and conduit between control switch and

equipment.

3.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT RESPONSIBILITY

A. The General(GC), Mechanical(MC), Fire Protection(FC) and Plumbing Contractor(PC) shall

furnish all motors, starters, thermal overloads, push buttons for local and remote control,

controllers, pressure switches, aquastats or similar items together with all appurtenances,

accessories and control wiring required to operate the equipment furnished under their

respective sections of the contract, and necessary to perform the operating functions as

specified, shown on the drawings or as otherwise required.

B. The General, Mechanical, Fire Protection (FC) and Plumbing Contractors shall set and mount

all motors, starters and controls. The Electrical Contractor shall, unless noted otherwise, furnish

and install all safety switches at the equipment and make all power connections to the safety

switches, starters and the motors. All control wiring necessary for the required performance and

operation of the equipment shall be installed and connected under each respective and

associated contract unless otherwise noted on drawing. Where the starter and/or safety switch is

an integral part of the equipment assembly, the assembly shall be furnished with the wiring

being complete between the starter, controller and motor and the Electrical Contractor shall

make the power connections only at the unit.


260030 - 6

C. If procurement requirements necessitate a change in the electrical characteristics of any motor

or equipment being furnished under the General, Mechanical, Fire Protection and Plumbing

Contracts, the respective contractor shall first obtain approval of such changes from the

Engineer. This same contractor shall also be responsible for all necessary arrangements and

shall pay all costs, if any, for all required changes to the Electrical Contract.

D. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish, install and connect all power wiring to all equipment

and all associated controls and appurtenances provided under this section of the contract. In

addition, the Electrical Contractor shall furnish, install and connect all power wiring to all

equipment, associated controls and appurtenances provided under other sections of this contact,

unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the drawings.

3.5 WIRING FOR HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

A. All equipment, unless otherwise indicated, for the heating, ventilating and air conditioning

systems shall be furnished and installed under the Mechanical Contract. The Electrical

Contractor shall however, be responsible for furnishing all labor and materials required for the

installation and connection of all electrical power wiring to and for this equipment.

B. In general, all starters and special control equipment required for the heating, ventilating and air

conditioning equipment will be furnished and installed by the Mechanical Contractor. Interlock

and sequence control wiring for main heating and cooling equipment will be furnished and

installed under the temperature control section of the Mechanical Contract.

C. All interconnecting control wiring in connection with the temperature control system for all

heating and air conditioning systems shall be furnished, installed and connected under the

Mechanical Contract.

D. The Electrical Contractor shall provide a source of power and make final power connection at

each air handling unit and at each apparatus control panel location where noted on the plans.

Control panels shall be furnished and installed under the Mechanical Contract.

3.6 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED IN OTHER DIVISIONS

A. All electrical equipment specified in other Divisions shall be furnished with full complement of

control equipment, control wiring, conduit and all other items necessary for satisfactory

operation.

B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install disconnect switches for all three phase

equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. The Electrical Contractor shall install thermal overload switches for each single phase motor

except where units are furnished with built-in thermal protection, in which case furnish and

install a single pole switch, with or without pilot light as require by drawings.

D. The Electrical Contractor shall complete all power wiring through the disconnect and/or the

thermal cutouts and local control stations to the equipment as required.

E. The Electrical Contractor shall complete all electrical connections, through the disconnect,

starter and motor terminals of all three phase equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall be

responsible for final connections.


260030 - 7

F. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for proper rotation of three phase equipment.

G. Combination motor starters shall be furnished and installed under the contracts providing the

equipment. Electrical Contractor shall provide disconnect switches at motors when motors are

located away from combination starters.


BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) Delanco MVC

260050 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 260050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL)

PART 1 - GENERAL



and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Divisions 26, 27,

and 28.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application

with electrical installations as follows:

1. Miscellaneous metals and lumber.

2. Access panels



5. Joint sealers

6. Fire stop systems

7. Concrete and masonry work

8. Earthwork

1.3 DEFINITIONS














260050 - 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: For all specified materials and products.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage

for electrical materials and equipment.


construction, dimensions, description of materials and finishes, component connections,

anchorage methods, hardware and installation procedures, plus the following:








C. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities near excavation areas. If utilities are

indicated to remain, support and protect services during excavation operations.

D. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions


substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS











2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS


260050 - 3

A. Access Doors and Frames: Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment

devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously welded

steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Doors and frames shall be

non-rusting aluminum, stainless steel, or galvanized material.

B. Doors and Panels shall be of suitable size and construction for each specific location. Panels to

be installed in fired rated ceilings or walls shall have a UL fire rating.

C. Frames: 16-gauge with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in unit

masonry, pre-cast, or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling.

1. For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling: 1 inch-wide-

exposed perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors.

2. For gypsum wallboard or plaster: perforated flanges with wallboard bead.

3. For full-bed plaster applications: galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing

bead, welded to perimeter of frame.

D. Flush Panel Doors: Fourteen-gauge sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed

continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint.

1. Fire-Rated Units: Insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and self-

closing mechanism. Provide UL rating on each Fire rated access door.

E. Locking Devices: Flush, cylinder locks, all keyed alike; provide twenty keys.

F. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Bar-Co., Inc.

2. J.L. Industries.

3. Karp Associates, Inc.

4. Milcor Div. Inryco, Inc.

5. Nystrom, Inc.


2.3 PAINTING

A. Refer to Division 9, Painting, for material requirements related to Painting and Finishing.

2.4 SLEEVES

A. Provide sleeves where required to protect conduit and cable penetrations. Each sleeve shall

extend through its respective foundation, floor, or wall and shall be cut flush with each surface

unless otherwise required.

2.5 JOINT SEALERS

A. Refer to Division 7 Sections for material requirements related to Joint Sealants.


260050 - 4


A. Refer to Division 7 Sections for material requirements related to Firestop Systems.

2.7 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around

conduit and an OD that completely covers opening.

2.8 CONCRETE

A. Refer to Division 3 Concrete for materials requirements related to Concrete work.

2.9 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Division 31 Earth Work for materials requirements related to Earth Work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



not indicated.







3.2 EARTHWORK

A. Provide all labor, equipment and services required for underground or underslab systems

excavation and backfill. Coordinate work with the work of other trades.

B. Refer to Division 31 Earth Work, for requirements related to Earth Work.

3.3 ERECTION OF SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and

elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."


260050 - 5

C. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location,

alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

D. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to

view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install

fasteners without splitting wood members.

3.4 CONCRETE WORK

A. Refer to Division 3 Concrete for installation requirements related to concrete work.

B. Provide all labor, equipment and services required for indoor and/or outdoor concrete work

related to electrical installations in conformance with ACI (American Concrete Institute)

guidelines and practices.

C. Provide and set in place at the time the foundations, bases, or curbs are poured, all anchor bolts

required for the equipment specified. Anchor bolts shall be of the type and proper sizes and

length to suit the application and concrete thickness.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in

both directions than supported unit and 4 inches high.

2. New Concrete Base: Pour new base integral with new floor slab, or else roughen existing

concrete surface and install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of

the base, unless otherwise indicated, to connect new concrete base to new or existing

concrete floor. Use L-hook type anchor bolts imbedded the full slab depth.

3. Existing Base: For equipment installation on existing concrete floors or bases, install

epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through and anchor into existing structural

concrete floor or base. Install epoxy-type anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt


4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be

embedded. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported

equipment






D. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or



E. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads


260050 - 6

3.6 JOINT SEALER APPLICATION


sealants at wall and roof penetrations.

B. Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and

cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to

Division 07 Sections.



Firestop Systems.

B. Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at conduit and cable

penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials.

3.8 ACCESS DOOR INSTALLATION

A. Where required, all ceiling and wall access doors (panels) shall be furnished by this Contractor

and set by this Contractor. The location of these access panels must be approved by the

Architect prior to their installation. Provide an access panel where junction boxes, and other

serviceable items are installed behind plaster, tile, or similar type non-removable surfaces.

B. Set frames accurately in position and securely attached to supports, with face panels plumb and

level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.

C. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.


A. Painting of systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections.



C. Paint and finish all electrical equipment and material which is not provided with a galvanized

or factory applied finish, as follows:

1. where exposed within Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Rooms or similar spaces

2. where exposed outdoors

3. where exposed within finished areas of the building, unless otherwise indicated to be


D. No equipment or raceways shall be painted before testing and approval.


brushing and cleaning or otherwise prepped as recommended by the manufacturer, before

finish painting.


260050 - 7

F. Polished chrome plated surfaces shall be cleaned. Replacement will be required if surfaces

have been damaged during installation.

G. Where factory finished units are installed, obtain approval of finish color before units are

shipped.

I. Painting generally shall be as follows:

1. Exposed Work:

a. One prime coat and two finished coats on, equipment, specialties, access doors,

supports, hangers and other ferrous metal work which is not galvanized or factory-

painted.

2. Concealed Work:

a. Concealed conduits, hangers, and supports need not be painted.




touching-up.


LOW-VOLTAGE POWER CONDUCTORS Delanco MVC

260519 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

3. Sleeves for cables.


1. Division 27 and 28 Sections for cabling used for communications, voice and data circuits

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data for each type of product, indicating cable and accessory construction,

materials and ratings.

B. Submit manufacturer’s installation instruction.





intended use. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. Conductor sizes based on copper. Aluminum conductors will not be accepted unless specifically

noted.


260519 - 2

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they

are constructed.

B. Wire and cable routing, if shown on Drawings, is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire

and cable as required to meet project conditions. Field verify all dimensions.


A. Deliver wires and cables according to NEMA WC26.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES



1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company

2. General Cable Corporation

3. Senator Wire & Cable Company

4. Southwire Company

5. Carol Cable Company


B. Copper Conductors: Insulated soft-drawn copper conductors with dual-rated type

THHN//THWN-2 600v insulation, to comply with NEMA WC 70, unless otherwise noted.

Conductors shall be rated for 90 degrees C. wet or dry.

C. Metal-Clad Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Type MC metal-clad cable,

600v insulated copper conductors, with full size insulated copper ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES



1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.

3. 3M; Electrical Products Division.

4. Tyco Electronics Corp.

5. Amp Incorporated


B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,

and class for application and service indicated.


260519 - 3

2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: Schedule 40, galvanized steel, ASTM A 53/A 53M Type E, Grade B, plain

ends.

B. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping

specified in Division 07.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires and

cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Verify that all conduits or raceways are clean and dry prior to installation of conductors or

cables. If conduits or raceways are not clean and/or dry, clean and dry conduits or raceways

prior to installation of new conductors or cables.

3.2 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for

No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.3 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders or Branch Circuits; Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Branch Circuits (concealed in hollow partitions or above ceilings): Type THHN/THWN-2,

single conductors in raceway, or Type MC metal-clad cable for 6 foot long (maximum)

connection from outlet box to light fixtures or run between wiring device boxes.

D. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO hard service cord with stainless-

steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

E. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN/THWN-2 in raceway.

F. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN/THWN-2 in raceway, or power-limited cable where

concealed in building finishes.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Install conductors in conduit in areas of open structure. Exposed cables shall not be used in

areas of open structure unless otherwise indicated. Conceal cables in finished walls or above

ceilings.


260519 - 4

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. Use pulling means, including fish tape,

cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway.

C. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

D. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification

for Electrical Systems”. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation

indicated on drawings, at each end and in all pull boxes.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A and UL 486B. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at the terminal.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent

or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

D. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to

terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than No. 10

AWG cabled in individual circuits. .


A. Perform conductor tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,

test the following conductors for compliance with requirements:

a. feeder conductors serving distribution equipment (panelboards, switchboards,

motor control centers, etc)

b. conductors feeding critical equipment (generators, UPS systems, etc.)

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning conductors or cables and retest as specified above.


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR Delanco MVC

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding electrical systems and equipment.

B. Refer to Section Lightning Protection System for related grounding work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.




intended use.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by

applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.



3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-

5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches in cross section by 10

inch length (minimum) or as indicated on drawings, with insulators and standoff brackets.

Chatsworth Products No. 13622-010.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of

conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type,

with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, solid or sectional type; 5/8 inch diameter by 96 inches in

length unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No.8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG

minimum unless indicated otherwise

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.

C. Grounding Bus: Install where indicated in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in

electrical rooms containing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top

of doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to horizontal bus.



D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those

required by NFPA 70:

1. Metal-clad cable runs.

2. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from

grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment

grounding bar terminal on busway.

3. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment

grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and

power-distribution units.

C. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other

communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in

raceway or cable tray from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal

cabinet, equipment rack, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding

conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus unless otherwise indicted.

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless


1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if

any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length

from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes,

and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.



C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so

vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations or use a bolted clamp.

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes,

using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using

one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed,

connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor

conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment

shutoff valve.

E. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at column(s) indicated.

F. Ground Ring: When indicated, install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each

building structure ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of

building. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building foundation

1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps

to building steel.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance

level is specified below, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at

individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power System with Capacity 500 kVA and less: 10 ohms.

2. Power System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.

3. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.

4. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify

Architect/Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



3.5 GRADING AND PLANTING

A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, grass, or paving, at areas disturbed by Work of

this Section. Reestablish original grades unless otherwise indicated. Restore areas disturbed by

trenching, and other activities to their original condition.




DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 260530 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.


1. Section 260050 - Basic Materials and Methods

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Steel slotted support systems.

2. Each type product.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the

following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.

2. Slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.


C. Welding Certificates

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.




A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems and its contents.




A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70. Provide electrical components which are UL listed and labeled

C. Comply with NECA “Standard of Installation” pertaining to anchors, fasteners, hangers,

supports and mounting equipment.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Refer to

Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field

assembly.


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

c. GS Metals Corp.

d. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

e. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

f. Ideal Industries Inc

g. Hilti

h. Panduit.

i. Or approved equal.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating.

4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed

for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.



D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of

threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or

cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces

as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,

shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or

their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used. Verify suitability of fasteners for use

in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers


1) Hilti Inc.

2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

3) MKT Fastening, LLC.

4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

5) Panduit.


2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate

for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers


1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.

3) Hilti Inc.

4) MKT Fastening, LLC.

5) Panduit.


3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS

Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with

ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions

of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel

shapes and plates.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical

equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for

EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in

diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other

support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without

exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps, single-bolt

conduit clamps or single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in

support channel.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this

Article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb.

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods

unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or

greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than

4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers

and nuts or Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69

or Spring-tension clamps.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means

that meet anchorage requirements.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-

fabricated metal supports.


to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply

with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

C. Refer to Division 9 for requirements related to Painting of exposed hangers and supports.


RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR Delanco MVC


DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For conduits and fittings, surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes,

hinged-cover enclosures, cabinets, and other products.

B. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.

2. Mechanical and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups

with common supports.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.






intended use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING



1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Alflex Inc.

3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.

4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

5. Electri-Flex Co.

6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.

7. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

8. Wheatland Tube Company.


B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. Intermediate Metal Conduit: ANSI C80.6.

D. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. Comply with NEMA RN 1, 0.040

inch minimum coating thickness

E. Electrical Metallic Tubing: ANSI C80.3.

F. Flexible Metal Conduit: Zinc-coated steel.

G. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

H. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:

NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and

environment in which installed.

1. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, set-screw or compression type.

I. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies,

and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and

enhance their conductivity.



2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT



1. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

2. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.

3. ElecSYS, Inc.

4. Electri-Flex Co.

5. Carlon Electrical Products.

6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.

7. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

8. Thomas & Betts Corporation.


B. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC): NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, or EPC-80-PVC as

indicated.

C. Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit (LFNC): UL 1660.

D. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS



1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

2. Hoffman.

3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

4. Panduit

5. Wiremold


B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, 12, or 3R as

required by the installation. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-

down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for

complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type, Screw-cover type or flanged-and-gasketed type as indicated or

required for application.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Size and capacity as indicated.

Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect/Engineer.




following:

a. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

d. Panduit


2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS



1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Hoffman.

3. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.

4. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

5. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

6. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.

7. Thomas & Betts Corporation.


B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, aluminum, Type FD, with

gasketed cover.

D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum or galvanized, with

gasketed cover.

G. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

2.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.

1. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray or Green.

2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open or integral closed

bottom as indicated.

3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure.

4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.



5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." or "TELEPHONE." as indicated for

each service.

6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: For integral closed-bottom units, provide conduit-

terminating fittings to mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure

wall.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and

aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a

combination of the two.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product

indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Armorcast Products Company.

b. Carson Industries LLC.

c. CDR Systems Corporation.

d. NewBasis.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit, or rigid non-metallic conduit Type EPC-80-PVC

where indicated.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit, or Intermediate metal conduit

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40 or 80-PVC, direct buried.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Motor-Driven

Equipment); Liquidtight flexible metal conduit

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R or 4.

6. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring:

a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations,

Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer

concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.

b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety

Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer-concrete units, SCTE 77,

Tier 8 structural load rating.

B. Indoors; Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

a. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit or IMC.

2. Embedded in concrete slab or within slab-on-grade fill: Rigid nonmetallic conduit

3. Concealed above Ceilings and in Walls and Partitions: EMT.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Motor-Driven

Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.

6. Raceways for Communications Cable: EMT, cable tray where indicated, or J-hooks.



7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 in damp or

wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that

material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing

conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.

3.2 RACEWAY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2

except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. Use temporary closures to

prevent foreign matter from entering raceway.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. Protect

stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise

indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run RNC conduit parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles

to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion

fittings.

3. Stub-up connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to

freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for

plugs set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel

conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver operated,

threaded flush plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound




J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings

to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

L. Raceways for Communications Cable: Install raceways as follows:

1. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes

or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these

requirements.

M. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway

sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

N. Expansion-Joint Fittings: Install in each run of aboveground conduit where indicated

1. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the

time of installation.

O. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for equipment

subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

P. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall.

Q. Set floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. Trim after installation to fit flush

with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench

bottom as specified in Division 31 Sections for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal

diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Sections.

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction

as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to



provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12

inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete

backfilling with normal compaction.

4. Install rigid steel conduit for all bends 45-degree and greater.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and

at building entrances through the floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit

horizontally in trench a minimum of 36 inches from edge of equipment pad or

foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with

connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from

1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. In other areas,

set covers of enclosures 1 inch above finished grade and taper same material as adjacent area to

top of cover.

D. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut

wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings

to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping

specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed

openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. Coordinate locations with

contractor installing slabs and walls.

C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies

unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor

or wall.

D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

E. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless

sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

F. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with

approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

G. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve

and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.



H. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply

with Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

I. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type

flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. All products shall be compatible with

roofing system and acceptable to roofing installer.

J. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and sealant. Select

sleeve size to allow for 1/4-inch annular clear space between conduit and sleeve for installing

watertight sealant.

K. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron or galvanized sleeves. Size sleeves

to allow for required annular clear space between raceway and sleeve.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements

are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping”.

3.7 APPLICATIONS FOR BOXES, CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES

A. Cabinets: Flush mounted, NEMA enclosure type 1 except otherwise indicated.

B. Hinged Door Enclosures: NEMA type 12 enclosure except as indicated.

C. Hinged Door Enclosures Outdoors: Install drip hood, factory tailored to individual units.

D. Outlet Boxes and Fittings: Install outlet and device boxes and associated covers and fittings of

materials and NEMA types suitable for each location and in conformance with the following

requirements.

1. Interior Dry Locations: Sheet steel, NEMA type 1.

2. Locations Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Cast metal, NEMA type 3.

3. Wet locations: NEMA type 4 enclosures.

E. Pull and Junction Boxes: Install pull and junction boxes of materials and NEMA types suitable

for each location except as otherwise indicated.

F. Floor boxes: In slabs on grade and wet locations use NEMA type 4 boxes. At other locations in

slabs, use concrete-tight NEMA 1 boxes. Contractor shall verify floor construction and verify

adequate thickness to accommodate floor box.

G. Carpet/Tile Flange: Coordinate style flange with General Contractor and/or Architect.



3.8 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES

A. Outlet Boxes at Windows and Doors: Locate close to window trim. For outlets indicated above

doors, use 12” mounting height above finished above the door opening except as otherwise

indicated.

B. Locations in Special Finish Materials: For outlet boxes for receptacles and switches mounted in

desks or furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block, marble, brick, stone or wood walls,

use rectangular shaped boxes with square corners and straight sides. Install such boxes without

plaster rings. Saw cut all recesses for outlet boxes in exposed masonry walls.

C. Gasketed boxes: At the following locations use cast metal, threaded hub boxes with gasketed

weatherproof covers.

1. Exterior locations.

2. Where surface mounted on unfinished walls, columns or pilasters (Cover gaskets may be

omitted in dry locations).

3. Where exposed to moisture laden atmosphere.

D. Cast-Iron Boxes: Iron alloy, waterproof, with threaded raceway entries and features and

accessories suitable for each location, including mounting ears, threaded screw holes for devices

and closure plugs.

E. Mounting: Mount outlet boxes for switches with the long access vertical or as indicated.

Mount boxes for receptacles either vertically or horizontally but consistently either way. Three

or more gang boxes shall be mounted with the long axis horizontal. Locate box covers or

device plates so they will not span different types of building finishes either vertically or

horizontally. Locate boxes for switches near doors on the side opposite the hinges and close to

door trim, even though electrical floor plans may show them on hinge side.

F. Ceiling Outlets: For fixtures, where wiring is concealed, use outlet boxes 4 inches square by 1

½ inches deep minimum.

G. Cover Plates for Surface Boxes: Use plates sized to box front without overlap.

H. Protect outlet boxes to prevent entrance of plaster, and debris. Thoroughly clean foreign

material from boxes before conductors are installed.

I. Concrete Boxes: Saw cut opening for box in center of masonry block cell. Coordinate with

masonry installer. Use extra deep boxes to permit side conduit entrance without interfering

with reinforcing, but do not use such boxes with over 6-inch depth.

J. Floor Boxes: Install in concrete floor slabs so they are completely enveloped in concrete except

for the top. Where normal slab thickness will not envelop box as specified above, provide

increased thickness of the slab below box; coordinate with floor slab installer. Provide each

compartment of each floor box with grounding terminal consisting of a washer-in-head machine

screw, not smaller than no. 10-32, screwed into a tapped hole in the box. Adjust covers of floor

boxes flush with finished floor.



3.9 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES, CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES

A. Box Selection: For boxes in main feeder conduit runs, use sizes not smaller than 8 inches

square by 4 inches deep. Do not exceed 6 entering and 6 leaving raceways in a single box.

Quantities of conductors (including equipment grounding conductors) in pull or junction box

shall not exceed the following:

Size of Largest

Conductors in Box

Maximum no. of

Conductors in Box

No. 4/0 AWG 30

250MCM 20

500MCM 15

Over 500 MCM 10

1. Cable supports: Install clamps, grids or devices to which cables may be secured.

Arrange cables so they may be readily identified. Support cable at least every 30 inches

inside boxes.

B. For pull boxes in inaccessible ceilings, mount with the covers flush with the finished ceiling.

C. In finished spaces, set flush with walls.

D. Size: Provide pull and junction boxes for telephone, signal and other systems at least 50%

larger than would be required by Article 370 of NEC, or as indicated. Locate boxes

strategically and provide shapes to permit easy pulling of future wires or cables of types normal

for such systems.

E. Mount with fronts straight and plumb.

F. Install with tops 78 inches above floor.

3.10 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.

Remove burrs, dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips scratches,

and abrasions.

3.11 GROUNDING

A. Electrically ground metallic cabinets, boxes, and enclosures. Where wiring to item includes a

grounding conductor, provide a grounding terminal in the interior of the cabinet, box or

enclosure.



3.12 IDENTIFICATION

A. Every concealed cabinet, pull box, junction box or enclosure shall have identification label on

exterior cover indicating equipment, feeder circuit or other device installed within or connected

through enclosure.

B. Every box exposed to view in finished spaces shall have same information listed on inside of

box cover.


RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS CABLING Delanco MVC

260535 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 260535 – RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Related Sections – including, but not limited to:

1. Section 260533 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems

2. Section 260536 – Cable Trays

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section specifies empty raceway systems intended for low-voltage communications cabling.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Wall outlets: Shall consist of outlet boxes and trim plates or sectional masonry boxes as

indicated, and as required to suit the particular type of wall construction being used and the

device to be installed.

B. J-Hooks: Non-metallic body with 2” throat, wall mounting provisions or threaded rod hanger

clip and 1/4 inch threaded rod with beam attachment for locations where J-hooks are

supported from structure. Cable tie channel for cable tie bundling of cables. UL 2043 listed

for air plenum ceilings. Panduit “J-Pro” JP2W-L20, JP2WP-L20, or equal.

C. Innerduct: Comply with UL 2024; HDPE corrugated flexible type, 1-1/4 inch diameter

minimum, orange color, approved for underground general-use as required by the

installation.

D. Provide conduit, wireway, boxes, insulated bushings and fittings as indicated, and as

specified in Section 26 0533.

E. Provide approved cable straps for individual cabling runs

RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS CABLING Delanco MVC

260535 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate with the Owner at the site, the exact location required for device outlets.

B. Provide insulated bushing on end of all conduits. Provide all empty conduit and wireway

with nylon pull wire.

C. Conduit sizes shall be generally noted on the drawing. The minimum size shall be 1” unless

otherwise specified.

D. Blank covers shall be provided on all outlets where devices are not installed (under separate

contract).

E. Conduit shall rise vertically from wall outlets and be extended in to accessible ceiling space

from each outlet. Provide horizontal offsets as required where outlets are below windows or

other obstructions.

F. Install cable straps and J-Hooks at a maximum of 4 feet on center to support low voltage

cables. Coordinate pathway with other trades to provide straight runs, both horizontally and

vertically, where possible.


CABLE TRAYS Delanco MVC

260536 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 260536 - CABLE TRAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes steel wire basket cable trays and accessories. Provide all necessary

hardware and supports for a complete system.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray

indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray.

1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable tray, including plans, elevations, and

sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate

components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate

connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.

2. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale. Include scaled cable

tray layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural, electrical, and

mechanical elements. Refer to Section 260010 for additional coordination drawing

information.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single

manufacturer.



intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. Comply with NEMA VE-1 – Metallic Wire Basket Tray Systems.


260536 - 2


A. Store indoors to prevent water or other foreign materials from staining or adhering to cable tray.

Unpack and dry wet materials before storage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Chalfant Manufacturing Company.


3. Cope, T. J., Inc.; a subsidiary of Allied Tube & Conduit.

4. MPHusky.

5. PW Industries.

6. Thomas and Betts Corp.

7. Panduit.


2.2 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Wire Basket Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Steel, complying with NEMA VE 1. Wire

mesh shall be formed into a 4 inch x 2 inch grid system from 0.16 inch diameter mill-galvanized

wire. Provide continuous top edge wire. Weld all wire intersections. Provide all required

hardware in galvanized finish. UL Listed.

B. Cable tray dimensions as indicated on drawings

C. Configurations:

1. Wire mesh openings to be 4” x 2”.

2. Inside radius of fabricated fittings: 12 inches.

2.3 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES

A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, expansion splice plates, dropouts, and other fittings as

indicated, field fabricated of same materials as cable tray.

B. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray

manufacturer.

1. Wire basket trays to be center supported with a minimum of ½” diameter all threaded

rod. Supports and hold-down clamps are to be supplied by cable tray manufacturer. All

thread rod and beam clamps by Contractor.

2. For multiple tier cable tray installations, stack smaller cable tray 6” above larger cable

tray on same threaded rod.


260536 - 3

2.4 WARNING SIGNS

A. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch- high, black letters on yellow background with legend "WARNING!

NOT TO BE USED AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT FOR LADDERS OR

PERSONNEL."

B. Materials and fastening are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical

Systems."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with recommendations in NEMA VE 2 and manufacturer’s instructions. Install as a

complete system, including all necessary fasteners, hold-down clips, splice-plate support

systems, barrier strips, horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, and crosses.

B. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays. Provide rubber end caps on all cut ends.

C. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure.

1. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans per manufacturer. No span

shall exceed 8’-0”.

2. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances

furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Center hang cable tray. Arrange supports in

trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by application.

3. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.

4. Manufacture center-hung support, designed for 60 percent versus 40 percent eccentric

loading condition, with a safety factor of 3.

D. Install expansion connectors where cable tray crosses building expansion joint and in cable tray

runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA VE 1. Space connectors and set gaps

according to applicable standard.

E. Make connections and changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings.

F. Provide “Cable Dropouts” at all backboards or racks. Dropouts to be full width of cable tray(s).

Dropouts to have minimum 2” bend radius.

G. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Section "Penetration

Firestopping”.

H. Sleeves for Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable

tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.

I. Workspace: Install cable trays with enough space to permit access for installing cables.

J. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data

processing; or of different insulation levels.


260536 - 4

K. After installation of cable trays is completed, install warning signs in visible locations on or

near cable trays.

3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Install cables only when cable tray installation has been completed and inspected. Allow

“slack” at all bends in cable tray and at expansion fittings.

B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties as recommended by

NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable

jacket. Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.

C. On vertical runs, fasten cables to tray every 18 inches. Install intermediate supports when cable

weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs.

3.3 BONDING AND GROUNDING

A. Ground cable trays according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor with cable tray, in addition to those required

by NFPA 70.

1. Provide continuity between tray components.

2. Provide 6 AWG insulated green copper equipment grounding conductor through entire

length of tray; bond to each component. Connections to tray may be made using

mechanical or exothermic connectors.

3. Extend 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor to ground bar at all data closets, cabinets

or racks.


A. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for

compliance with requirements. Perform the following field quality-control survey:

1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Verify that there is no intrusion of such

items as pipe, hangers, or other equipment that could damage cables. Correct sharp

corners which may cause damage.

2. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable tray do not exceed that

permitted by NFPA 70.

3. Verify that communication or data-processing circuits are separated from power circuits

by barriers.

4. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that

all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable tray. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and

each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between

sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed cable trays.


260536 - 5

1. Repair damage to finishes with matching coating or paint recommended by cable tray

manufacturer.

2. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to protect exposed cables from

falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable

tray can be constructed of wood or plastic materials until the risk of damage is over.


IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Delanco MVC

260553 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceway and metal-clad cable.

2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.

3. Underground-line warning tape.

4. Warning labels and signs.

5. Equipment labels.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Identification Schedule: A list of nomenclature for electrical equipment and system

components identification signs and labels.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in

the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation

and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes and standards. Use consistent

designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.


260553 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAY AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of

color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and

chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend

label.

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameter

sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches wide;

compounded for outdoor use.

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1

to 2 inches wide.

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification

legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Description: Permanent, bright red colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape.

1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.

2. Formulated to resist degradation in direct-burial service.

3. Embedded continuous solid metallic foil strip or core.

4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line.

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,

configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners,

with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for

mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-

acetate butyrate signs with galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required

for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.


260553 - 3

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN

FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES "

2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white

letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

B. Stenciled Legend: In non-fading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall

be 1 inch.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon cable ties, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking,

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine

screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes,

manholes, and handholes use color-coding conductor tape and wraparound marker labels.

Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables,

identify phase in addition to the above.

B. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Identify conductors for branch circuits in junction,

pull boxes and panel board gutters. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source

and circuit number using wraparound marker labels.

C. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker labels-on tags to conductors and list

source and circuit number.


260553 - 4

D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,

signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and

pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used

by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and

Operation and Maintenance Manual.

E. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,

lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install underground-line

warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

F. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply

with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with

black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.

b. Controls with external control power connections.

2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise

indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar

equipment in finished spaces.

G. Instruction Signs:

1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and

maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction

signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment

operation.

2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red

background with minimum 3/8-inch-high letters for emergency instructions at equipment

used for power transfer or similar equipment .

H. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label

that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm

systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

Provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label;

where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. Increase sizes of labels

and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Stenciled legend 2 inches high.

2. Examples of equipment to be labeled:

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.

b. Electrical switchgear, switchboards, substations.

c. Transformers.

d. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.


260553 - 5

e. Contactors, motor starters, motor-control centers.

f. Disconnect switches, enclosed circuit breakers.

g. Push-button stations.

h. Generators (if more than one).

i. Uninterruptible power supply equipment ( if more than one)

j. Duct Detector remote test switches

k. Outlet jacks, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for

signal and control functions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing

without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish, after completing finish work.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and

methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

D. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall

completely encircle cable or conduit. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of

walls and floors, at 30-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 15-foot maximum

intervals in congested areas.

E. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed

below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied, or field applied for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG if

authorities having jurisdiction permit,

2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black.

b. Phase B: Red.

c. Phase C: Blue.

d. Neutral: White.

3. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum

distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made.

Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands

to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous

underground-line warning tape directly above line at 12 inches below finished grade. Use

multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope

exceeds 16 inches overall.


LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM Delanco MVC

260944 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 260944 - LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a Digital Lighting Management System for time-based and sensor-based

control of interior and exterior lighting fixtures.

B. The system shall be capable of turning lighting loads on/off, as well as dimming lights where

dimming capability is specified. All system devices shall be individually addressable and

networked together.

C. The system architecture shall be capable of enabling stand-alone groups of devices to

function in a default capacity if network communication is lost. The architecture shall

facilitate remote operation via a computer connection. The system shall not require any

centrally hardwired switching equipment.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

(ANSI/IEEE)

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

1. 508 – Industrial Control Equipment

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION & OPERATION

A. The Lighting Control and Automation system as defined under this section covers the

following equipment:

1. Room Power Packs and Auxiliary Relays with 0-10v dimming where indicated.

2. Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors – Auto adjusting, MicroSet technology NEMA WD7

compliant occupancy sensors.

http://www.ansi.org/

http://www.nema.org/

http://www.ul.com/


260944 - 2

3. Wallstations – Smart device that is pre-configured, pre-engraved digital pushbutton

wallstations and dimmers.

4. Control Communication Network – Pre-defined lengths of QuickConnect cable

(RJ45) for power and data to smart devices.

5. Bridge for connecting multiple power packs to the lighting control network.

6. Gateway Kit for connecting the lighting control network to the building LAN.

7. Bridge Hub for connecting multiple bridges to the lighting control network.

8. 4-relay control panel for exterior lighting control.

9. Outdoor photocell for daylight sensing, and photocell interface for exterior lighting

control.

1.5 LIGHTING CONTROL FUNCTIONS

A. General: Provide the following lighting control capabilities:

1. Occupancy/Vacancy requirements – Provide occupancy sensors with Automatic On/

Automatic Off functionality and vacancy sensors with Manual On/Automatic Off

functionality as shown.

2. Provide the ability to provide occupancy status to a Building Automation System.

Occupancy status shall happen automatically and be provided to the BAS without the

need of programming any device in the System..

3. Provide an interface device for connection to a USB port on any computer running on

the facility LAN network.

4. System shall provide secure, restricted access software using intuitive graphics,

providing identification of system settings and permitting users to identify, modify,

and store settings and reconfigurations of lighting devices.

B. Space Control Descriptions. Refer to drawings for locations where specific control method

and quantity of control devices are required:

1. Spaces with dimming controls:

a. Ceiling mounted occupancy/vacancy sensor(s) – automatically turns off

all room lights after room is unoccupied, per adjustable time delay.

b. Dimmer wall switch (0-10v) allows user to manually adjust light level,

wired on load side of occupancy sensor.

2. Spaces without dimming controls:

a. Ceiling occupancy/vacancy sensor(s) automatically turns off all room

lights after room is unoccupied, per adjustable time delay. Low voltage

wall station allows user to manually control lights on/off.

b. Wall mounted occupancy/vacancy sensor(s) with manual override;

automatically turns off all room lights after room is unoccupied, per

adjustable time delay. Override button (on wall mounted sensors only)

allows user to manually control lights on/off.


A. The Lighting Control System shall include: the power pack, auxiliary relay, wallstations,

matching color screwless wallplates, occupancy/vacancy sensors, daylight sensors

QuickConnect cable (plenum rated), pre-terminated bridge ports and gateway kit.


260944 - 3

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Composite wiring and/or schematic diagram of each control circuit, as proposed, to

be installed (standard diagrams will not be accepted).

2. Scale drawing for each area showing exact location of each sensor, room controller

and digital switch.

B. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions.

C. Warranties: Standard and special warranty information.


A. Products: All electrical components and devices shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency and marked for intended use.



A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive

equipment:

1. Ambient temperature: 32° to 104° F

2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall supply a 5-year warranty on all materials, hardware and software. These

warranties will be in effect for all installations.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. The design drawings and specifications are based on “nLight Network Control System”

products as manufactured by Sensor Switch, an Acuity Brands Company.

B. Subject to the compliance with these specifications, the following manufacturers may offer

equivalent products:

1. Wattstopper

2. Leviton

3. Cooper Controls

4. Lutron



260944 - 4

2.2 WALL OR CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY/VACANCY PERFORMANCE

REQUIREMENTS

A. Sensing mechanism:

1. Dual technology:

a. Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust

and residue build-up.

b. Incorporate Passive Dual Technology (PDT) to sense motion and sounds.

B. Power failure memory:

1. Controls incorporate non-volatile memory. Should power be interrupted and

subsequently restored, settings and parameters saved in protected memory shall not

be lost.

C. Sensor shall have time delays from 10 to 30 min.

D. When specified, sensors shall automatically adjust time delay and sensitivity settings.

E. All sensors shall provide an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to verify that

motion is being detected during both testing and normal operation.

F. All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay and

sensitivity. Settings shall be located on the sensor (not the control unit) and shall be recessed

to limit tampering.

2.3 CEILING MOUNTED SENSORS

A. Product: nLight PDT series.

B. Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions.

C. Sensors shall be Class 2 devices.

D. Connect to other components via Click & Go cable to eliminate wiring errors.

1. Occupancy Sensor and Daylight sensor shall be capable of a daisy chain connection

to the Room Controller.

E. Device calibration and features:

1. Sensitivity – 0-100% in 10% increments.

2. Time delay – 1-30, self-adjusts to 10 min based on room occupancy.

3. Test mode – Fifteen second time delay.

4. Detection technology – PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation and/or re-

activation.

5. Walk-through mode.

6. Ultrasonic and Dual Technology Sensors utilize two independent sensor detection

circuits simultaneously to ensure optimum performance, regardless of location or

proximity to walls and structures.


260944 - 5

7. Automatically and continually self-adjust ultrasonic frequency to ignore specific

frequency, continuous noise from airflow to prevent detuning which can lead to

inadvertent lights out. Sensors that require detuning shall not be acceptable.

8. All load parameters including Automatic On/Manual On, blink warning and daylight

enable/disable when daylight sensors are pre-defined with the Room Controller local

network.

F. Device Status LEDs including:

1. PIR Detection

2. Ultrasonic detection

G. Occupancy sensors are pre-defined to specific loads within the room without wiring or

special tools for maximum energy savings.

H. Manual override of controlled loads.

I. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply daisy-chaining them

together to the Room Controller via Click & Go cable. No additional configuration will be

required

2.4 WALL/CORNER MOUNTED SENSORS

A. Product: nLight PDT series

B. Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions.

C. Sensors shall be Class 2 devices.

D. Connect to another component via Click & Go cable to eliminate wiring errors.

1. OCC-RJ45 Room Controller accessory is used to allow any standard

occupancy/vacancy sensor to utilize Click & Go cable connections.

2. Two RJ45 connection ports for connection to Room Controller.

3. Occupancy Sensor and Daylight sensor shall be capable of a daisy-chain connection

to the Room Controller.

E. Device calibration and features:

1. Sensitivity – 0-100% in 10% increments.

2. Time delay – 1-30, self-adjusts to 10 min. based on room occupancy.

3. Test Mode – Fifteen second time delay.

4. Detection technology – PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation and/or re-

activation.

5. Walk-Through Mode.

6. Automatically and continually self-adjust ultrasonic frequency to ignore specific

frequency continuous noise from airflow to prevent detuning which can lead to

inadvertent lights out. Sensors that require detuning shall not be acceptable.


260944 - 6

7. All load parameters including Automatic On/Manual ON, blink warning, and

daylight enable/disable when daylight sensors are pre-defined with the Room

Controller local network.

F. Device Status LEDs including:

1. PIR Detection

2. Ultrasonic detection

G. Occupancy sensors are pre-defined to specific loads within the room without wiring or

special tools for maximum energy savings.

H. Manual override of controlled loads.

I. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply daisy chaining them

together to the Room Controller via Click & Go cable. No additional configuration will be

required

2.5 WALLSTATIONS

A. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 button configuration;

available in white, ivory, grey and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening.

Wallstations shall include the following features:

1. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttons. Button replacement

may be completed without removing the switch from the wall.

2. Intuitive button labeling to match application and load controls.

3. Pre-defined digital button configurations. Each wallstation is shipped with pre-

defined digital button configurations which are automatically sensed by the

connected Room Controller and mapped to specific load controls for immediate out

of the box functionality.

B. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to other system components.

C. Multiple digital wallstations may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the

lighting system control network. No additional configuration will be required to achieve

multi-way switching.

D. Digital wallstations are delivered with pre-defined functions including, raise, lower, A/V

Mode, Quiet Time, manual and scene control. No additional configuration is required to

provide a fully functional system. Systems that require configuration or load binding and do

not deliver maximum energy savings out of the box shall not be acceptable.

2.6 COMMUNICATION BRIDGE

A. Bridge device shall be capable of aggregating communication from multiple lighting

control zones for purposes of minimizing backbone wiring requirements back to Control

Gateway

B. Device shall surface mount to a standard 4” x 4” square junction box.


260944 - 7

C. Device shall have (8) RJ-45 ports.

D. Device shall be powered with Class 2 low voltage supplied locally via a directly wired

power supply or delivered via a CAT-5 cabled connection.

E. Device shall be capable of redistributing power from its local supply and connect lighting

control zones with excess power to lighting control zones with insufficient local power.

2.7 DAYLIGHT PHOTOSENSORS/ IR RECEIVER

A. Daylight photosensors work with Room Controllers to provide automatic daylight switching

capabilities for any load type connected to a room controller. Open loop daylight sensors

measure incoming daylight in the space, and are capable of controlling up to three lighting

zones. Daylight sensors shall be interchangeable without the need for rewiring. Daylight

sensors shall be capable of daisy-chaining with occupancy sensors in each room.

B. Digital daylight sensors include the following features:

1. An internal photodiode that measures only within the visible spectrum and has a

response curve that closely matches the photopic curve.

2. The daylight sensor has three light level ranges: Low (3-300 lux), High (30-3000

lux), and Direct Sun (300-30000 lux).

3. Optional digital wallstations to allow occupants to reduce lighting level to increase

energy savings and lower lighting levels for a selected period of time or cycle of

occupancy.

4. Infrared (IR) transceiver for daylight sensor range and daylight zone gain adjustments

via handheld remote programmer.

5. Infrared (IR) receiver for personal control and scene programming via handheld

remote programmer.

6. Red configuration LED that blinks to indicate data transmission.

7. Green Mode status LED that blinks to indicate Daylight Commissioning Mode.

8. Green Mode status LED that remains constant ON when daylight range is set to low

for available natural light.

9. RJ45 ports for connection to lighting control network.

10. An adjustable head and an optional mounting bracket to accommodate multiple

mounting methods and building materials. The daylight sensor may be mounted on a

ceiling tile, skylight well, suspended lighting fixture or backbox.

C. Open loop digital daylight sensor includes the following additional features:

1. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 60 degree angle cutting off the

unwanted light from the interior of the room.

2.8 LIGHTING CONTROL NETWORK

A. The lighting control network is a physical connection and communication protocol designed

to optimally control a space within a building. Control devices connect to the lighting control

network using CAT 6 green jacketed cables with RJ45 QuickConnect cables which provide

both data and power to room devices. Features of the network include:


260944 - 8

1. Click & Go default functionality of occupancy sensors, wallstations, slider station,

daylight sensors, receptacle controls, BMS status output and lighting loads to the

most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the device attached.

2. Replacement of any device in the network with a standard off the shelf unit without

requiring commissioning, configuration or setup.

2.9 CONTROL MODULE (GATEWAY)

A. Control module shall be a device that facilitates communication and time-based control of

downstream network devices and linking into an Ethernet. Devices shall have a user interface

that is capable of wall mounting, powered by low voltage, and have a touch screen.

B. Device shall have one RJ-45 10/100 BaseT Ethernet connection. Device shall have a USB

port. Control device shall have three RJ-45 ports for connection to other backbone devices

(bridges) or directly to lighting control devices. Each control gateway device shall be capable

of linking 1500 devices to the management software. Device shall automatically detect all

devices downstream of it.

C. Device shall have a standard and astronomical internal time clock.

2.10 SYSTEM POWER PACKS

A. Power Pack shall incorporate one or more Class 1 relays and contribute low voltage power to

the rest of the system. Power Pack must install inside standard electrical enclosure and

provide UL recognized support to junction box. All devices shall have two RJ-45 ports

1. Power Packs shall accept 120 or 277 VAC, be plenum rated, and provide Class 2

power to the system.

2. Power Pack parameters shall be available and configurable remotely from the

software and locally via the device push-button.

3. Power Pack shall securely mount to junction location through a threaded ½ inch

chase nipple or be capable of being secured within a luminaire ballast channel. All

Class 1 wiring shall pass through chase nipple into adjacent junction box without any

exposure of wire leads.

B. Secondary Packs shall incorporate the relay(s), shall have a second relay, 0-10 VDC dimming

output, or line voltage dimming output, but shall not be required to contribute system power.

1. Secondary Packs shall be available that provide up to 16 Amp switching of all

lighting load types.

2. Secondary Packs shall be available that provide up to 5 Amps switching of all

lighting load types as well as 0-10 VDC dimming or fluorescent ballasts/LED drivers

3. Secondary Packs shall be available that provide up to 5 Amps of switching as well as

0-10 VDC dimming of fluorescent ballasts/LED drivers.

4. Secondary Packs are UL924 listed for switching of Emergency Power circuits


260944 - 9

C. Power Supplies shall provide system power only, but are not required to switch line voltage

circuit. Auxiliary Relay Packs shall switch low voltage circuits only.

2.11 NETWORKED SYSTEM RELAY & DIMMING PANELS

A. Panel shall incorporate up to 4 normally closed latching relays capable of switching 120/277

VAC or up to two Dual Phase relays capable of switching 208/240/480 VAC loads. Relays

shall be rated to switch up to a 30A ballast load at 277 VAC.

B. Panel shall provide one 0-10VDC dimming output paired with each relay.

C. Panel shall power itself from an integrated 120/277 VAC supply. Panel shall supply current

limited low voltage power to other networked devices connected via CAT-5. Panel shall

provide auxiliary low voltage device power connected wired directly to a dedicated terminal

connection

2.12 MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE

A. Every device parameter (e.g. sensor time delay and photocell set-point) shall be available and

configurable remotely through the software

B. Status monitoring information shall be available from the software for all devices for which it

is applicable: current occupancy status, current PIR Status, remaining occupancy time

delay(s), current photocell reading, current photocell inhibiting state, photocell transition time

remaining, current dim level, device temperature, and device relay state(s).

C. The following device identification information shall be made available from the software:

model number, model description, serial number, manufacturing date code, custom label(s),

and parent network device.

D. A printable network inventory report shall be available via the software. A printable report

detailing all system profiles shall be available via the software.

E. Software shall require all users to login with a User Name and Password. Software shall

provide at least three permission levels for users. All device firmware and system software

updates must be available for automatic download and installation via the internet. Software

shall be capable of managing systems interconnected via a WAN (wide area network)

2.13 BAS/BMS COMPATIBILITY

A. System shall include a BACNET IP gateway as a downloadable software plugin. The

gateway shall communicate lighting control information outward to a BAS system. The

gateway shall also translate and forward lighting relay and other select commands from a

BAS system to networked control devices.


260944 - 10

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The control system shall be installed and fully wired as shown on the plans by the installing

contractor. The contractor shall complete all electrical connections to all control circuits.

B. All low voltage smart devices shall connect using QuickConnect wire provided by Eaton's

Lighting Systems. When using wire for connections other than the QuickConnect low voltage

wire (pre-defined lengths of RJ45 cable), provide detailed point to point wiring diagrams for

every termination. Provide wire specifications and wire colors to simplify contractor

termination requirements.

C. Install the work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions unless


D. Provide written or computer-generated documentation on the commissioning of the system

including room by room description including:

1. Sensor parameters, time delays, sensitivities and daylighting setpoints.

2. Sequence of operation, (e.g. manual ON, Auto OFF. etc.).

3. Load parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.).

3.2 STARTUP, COMMISSIONING AND TRAINING

A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be commissioned by the manufacturer's

factory authorized representative who will verify a complete fully functional system.

B. Provide written notice of the system startup and adjustment date to the Architect/Engineer

and to schedule initial training session with Owner.

C. Upon completion of the system commissioning the factory-authorized technician shall

provide training to the owner's personnel on the adjustment and maintenance of the system.

Include (2) two-hour sessions, one at completion of project and one approximately one month

after occupancy for followup adjustments and re-training.


SERVICE ENTRANCE MODIFICATIONS Delanco MVC

261250 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 261250 – SERVICE ENTRANCE MODIFICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Extent of service-entrance work electrical and telecommunications work is indicated by

Drawings and Schedules.

B. The project work requires a new utility-approved CT cabinet and meter, new secondary service

entrance conduits and conductors from utility pad-mount transformer to a new CT cabinet and

to the new service panelboard.

C. The project work requires new telecom service entrance conduits into the Communications

Room.

D. Refer to other Division 26 Sections for wires/cables, raceways, and equipment work required in

connection with service-entrance equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on service-entrance equipment and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned layout of service-entrance equipment, including spatial

relationships to proximate electrical equipment.

C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit power, signal and control wiring diagrams for service-entrance work.

Differentiate between portions of wiring/cabling that are installed by the Utility Company and

portions that are field-installed.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of service-entrance

equipment, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in

similar service.

B. Codes and Standards:


261250 - 2

1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the

authority having jurisdiction and NEC, including Articles 230, 250, and 338, as

applicable to installation, and construction of service-entrances.

2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable construction and installation requirements

of the applicable NEMA standards for service-entrance equipment and accessories.

3. UL Compliance: Comply with construction and installation requirements of the

following UL standards for service-entrance equipment and accessories:

a. UL 50: Electrical Cabinets and Boxes.

b. UL 854: Service-Entrance Cables.

c. UL 869: Electrical Service Equipment.

4. Provide service-entrance equipment and accessories which are UL-listed and labeled, and

marked, "SUITABLE FOR USE AS SERVICE EQUIPMENT."

5. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Std 241 pertaining to

service entrances.


A. Deliver service-entrance equipment components properly packaged and mounted on pallets, or

skids to facilitate handling of heavy items. Utilize factory-fabricated type containers or

wrappings for service-entrance equipment and components which protect equipment from

damage. Inspect equipment to ensure that no damage has occurred during shipment.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Schedule delivery of service-entrance equipment which permits installation in their designated

installation spaces, and with minimum impact on utility service to building. Coordinate

delivery of equipment with the disconnect and demolition of the utility service and other

building components.

B. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad.

Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SERVICE-ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide service-entrance equipment and accessories; of types, sizes, ratings and

electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design

and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for

complete installation; and as herein specified.

B. Meter Sockets: Contractor shall provide a utility-approved meter or obtain direct from utility if

necessary. Contractor shall install in compliance with local utility requirements.

C. Cables/Wires:

1. General: Provide cables/wires complying with Division 260519-Low-Voltage Electrical

Power Conductors and Cables.


261250 - 3

2. Provide all cable connectors, terminal ends, bolts, washers, hardware, accessories and

labor required to connect cables to Utility Company transformer(s).

D. Meter Cabinet: Provide an outdoor utility (PSE&G) –approved current transformer cabinet with

hinged padlockable doors. Coordinate requirements with PSE&G regulations and provide all

required accessories.

E. Raceways:

1. General: Provide raceways complying with Division 260533-Raceways and Boxes for

Electrical Systems in accordance with the following listing:

a. Rigid Steel Conduit and fittings.

b. PVC Plastic Conduit and fittings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UTILITY COMPANY CORDINATION

A. Contractor shall coordinate and schedule with PSE&G..

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which service-entrance equipment and components are to

be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of

the work. Do not proceed with the work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a

manner acceptable to the Installer.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE-ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT

A. Install service-entrance equipment as indicated, in accordance with the written instructions, and

with recognized industry practices, to ensure that service-entrance equipment fulfills

requirements. Comply with applicable installation requirements of NEC and NEMA Standards.

B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with

equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where

manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to

comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B, and the National Electrical

Code.


A. Prior to energization of service-entrance equipment, check accessible connections for

compliance to manufacturer's torque tightening specifications.

B. Prior to energization of service-entrance equipment, check with ground resistance tester, phase-

to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.

C. Prior to energization, check circuitry for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits.

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]


261250 - 4

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for service-entrance equipment as indicated. Tighten

connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent

and effective grounding.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.

B. Touch-up scratched or marred enclosure surfaces to match original finishes.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Upon completion of installation of service-entrance equipment and electrical circuitry, energize

circuitry and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible,

correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove

and replace with new units, and retest to demonstrate compliance.


PANELBOARDS Delanco MVC

262416 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 262416 – PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

3. Surge protection devices

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each specified product, accessory, and component indicated. Include

dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of

installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective

devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces.

D. Field Quality-Control Test Reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. NRTL: Nationally recognized testing laboratory


262416 - 2

B. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

D. SPD: Surge Protection Device


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and

accessories from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for

panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.

Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Remove loose packing and shipping materials from inside equipment. Handle and prepare

panelboards for installation according to manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Store in clean, dry environment. Maintain in factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy

canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect enclosure(s) from dirt, water, construction debris, and

traffic.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and

weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and

ambient temperature and humidity conditions are at occupancy levels for the remainder of the

construction period:

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and other components with other construction

that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,

raceways, piping, obstructions to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors

and panels to allow complete swing and/or removal.


262416 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Subject to the compliance with these specifications, the following manufacturers may offer

specified or equivalent products:

1. Panelboards and Accessories:

a. Square D Company (Basis of Design)

b. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.

c. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div.

d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.


B. Enclosures:

1. Refer to panel schedules for recessed or surface-mounted cabinet type. Cabinets shall be

rated for environmental conditions as scheduled or required by location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: Type 1

b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match

box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel factory finished immediately after cleaning and pre-

treating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime

coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel for recessed mounting and surface mounting in

unfinished spaces. Same painted finish as panel front and trim for surface

mounting in finished spaces or for Type 3R cabinets.

4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent

protective cover.

5. Provide four (4) extra keys for each style lock.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum.

2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

D. Conductor Connectors: Compression type suitable for use with copper or aluminum conductor

material and sizes.

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum.

2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Top or bottom as Installer’s option

3. Ground Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with copper or aluminum conductor

material.

4. Feed-Through Lugs: Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.


262416 - 4

E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use where indicated as service equipment for

panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent

protective devices.

F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances

required for future installation of devices.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or

remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type

of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit

rating by an NRTL.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, type and ratings as scheduled.

B. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

C. Mains: Circuit Breaker or Main Lugs only. Refer to panel schedule on drawings.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger than 125 A:

Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device

requires mechanical release for removal.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

B. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only. Refer to panel schedules on drawings.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without

disturbing adjacent units.

D. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating to

meet available fault currents. Provide type and trip ratings as scheduled.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Provide adjustable

magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Main Circuit Breaker (Panel MDP): shall be electronic trip circuit breaker with rms

sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following

field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.

b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.


262416 - 5

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

3. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault

protection (6-mA trip).

4. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault

protection (30-mA trip).

5. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Lugs: with mechanical connectors for copper feeders and branch-circuit ground

conductors, or compression connectors for aluminum feeders; style, suitable for

number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type HACR-rated for use on

refrigeration equipment circuits, Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting

loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID)

lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Shunt Trip: 120 or 24 volt trip coil energized from separate circuit, voltage as

indicated.

f. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a

single unit.

g. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle

in ‘on’ or ‘off ’ position.

h. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment for holding circuit-breaker handle in on

position.

2.5 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering


1. Square D Company (Basis of Design) – “Surgelogic” EMA SPD

2. General Electric Company;

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

5. Advanced Protection Technologies

6. Leviton


B. Surge Protection Device (SPD) Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, externally mounted,

solid-state, parallel-connected, modular type (with field-replaceable modules), with sine-wave

tracking suppression, UL 1283 EMI/RFI filtering modules, listed to UL 1449 third edition, and

with the following features and accessories:

1. UL Listed Short Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR): 200-kA

2. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per phase

3. Replaceable modules in a NEMA 1 cabinet.

4. Surge current paths for ten modes of protection

5. Field wired connections to phase buses (circuit breaker), neutral bus, and ground bus.

6. LED indicator lights for protection status on each phase.

7. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.


262416 - 6

8. Transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges, audible alarm with switch.

9. Ten year product warranty

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.Examine

panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been

subjected to water saturation

B. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation

only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to manufacturer’s instructions and NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Mounting: Install panelboards using anchorage devices appropriate for the substrate. Mount top

of trim a maximum of 90 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Mount

panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with

fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration

and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

2. The operating handle of top-most switch or circuit breaker, in on position, shall not

exceed 79 inches above finished floor or grade.

3. Install filler plates in unused spaces

E. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing

load balancing.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors and components. Provide warning signs complying with

Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;

incorporate Owner's final room designations.

1. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not

acceptable.


262416 - 7

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard cover with an engraved laminate nameplate

with 3/8 inch lettering, white letters on a black background (normal power) or red background

(emergency power). Use panel designation referenced on the drawings.

D. Circuit Breaker Nameplates: Label each branch circuit breaker in distribution panelboards with

an engraved laminate nameplate, 1/4 inch high white letters.

E. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for

Electrical Systems."


A. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

C. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards tested

and that describes deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial

action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes as follows.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.

2. Perform phase load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working

schedule of the facility and at time directed.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings

before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 10 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is

not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.


262416 - 8

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed equipment from damage, paint, moisture, dirt and dust during remainder of

construction period.

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in

cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.


WIRING DEVICES Delanco MVC

262726 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL





1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles

2. Switches and wall-box dimmers.

3. Device cover plates

4. Motion/occupancy sensors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre-marking

wall plates.


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing

label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.


262726 - 2


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one

source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and

associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.



intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following

manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).

2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).

3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).

4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

5. Crouse-Hinds Electrical Co


2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).

b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).

c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).

d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).


2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1,

NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when

device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:




262726 - 3

a. Cooper; GF20.

b. Hubbell.

c. Leviton.

d. Pass & Seymour; 2084.


2.4 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.



a. Cooper; L520R.

b. Hubbell; HBL2310.

c. Leviton; 2310.

d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.


2.5 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of

equipment being connected.

1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with

green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of

30 percent.

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for

connection.

2.6 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 amp, specification grade commercial duty, back and side wired.

Hubbell – CSB120xx (single pole), CSB220xx (two pole), CSB320xx (three way), CSB420xx

(four way), or equal.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products by other

manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

a. Cooper

b. Leviton

c. Pass & Seymour


C. Pilot Light Switches, 120/277V, 20 amp, single pole, with neon-lighted red handle, illuminated

when switch is "ON." Hubbell - HBL1221PL


262726 - 4

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products by other

manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

a. Cooper

b. Leviton.

c. Pass & Seymour


D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.



a. Hubbell; HBL1221L

b. Cooper

c. Leviton

d. Pass & Seymour


2.7 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Wall-Switch Sensors:

1. Description: Adaptive-technology dual technology type, 120/277 V, single circuit,

photocell override, adjustable time delay 4 to 30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with

a minimum coverage area of 1,000 sq. ft., rated for 1,000 watt fluorescent load at 120

volts.



a. Hubbell; AD1277

b. Leviton

c. Lutron


B. Ceiling Mount Occupancy Sensors:

1. Dual technology, with both passive-infrared- and ultrasonic-type sensing, 120/277 V,

adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 360-degree field of view, and a minimum

coverage area of 2000 sq. ft.



a. Hubbell; OMNIDT2000.

b. Leviton

c. Watt Stopper

d. Lutron


2.8 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.


262726 - 5

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch thick, satin-finished stainless steel

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-

resistant , die-cast aluminum or thermoplastic with lockable cover.

2.9 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Almond, Brown, Ivory, or White

as selected by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise

noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish

materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by

riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,

paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and

cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint

unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on

devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.

c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show

signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.


262726 - 6

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles ‘up’, and on horizontally mounted

receptacles to the left.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount

outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension

vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under

single, multi-gang wall plates.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated, identify

area of space or type luminaire(s) each switch controls on wall plate. Also, Identify

panelboard and circuit number from which served. Identify panelboard and circuit

number from which served. Use machine-printed, pressure-sensitive, abrasion-resistant

label tape on face of plate and durable wire markers or tags on conductors inside outlet

boxes.

2. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot,

stamped or engraved machine printing with black on light and white on dark lettering on

face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags on conductors inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.

2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.


262726 - 7

3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.

4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar

problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new

ones, and retest as specified above.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean devices, device outlet boxes and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall

plates on devices.


LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Delanco MVC

264113 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 264113 – LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL





1. Section 260526 – Grounding and Bonding.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies a lightning protection system (LPS) for the building(s) or structure(s).

This system provides facility protection for the building and occupants by preventing damage

to the structure caused by lightning and induced transient currents. The design of this system is

to be in strict accordance with this section of the specification and all contract drawings that

apply.

B. The work covered under this section of the specifications consists of furnishing labor, materials

and engineering services required for the completion of a functional and unobtrusive lightning

protection and facility grounding system.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit certifications that the LPS installer has the following minimum qualifications:

1. Has at least one LPI Certified Master Designer on staff at the Lightning Protection

Installation firm.

2. Name(s) and credentials of LPI Master and Journeyman installers who will be on site to

complete actual installation.

B. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 26 0010.

C. Submit shop drawings showing layout of air terminals, roof penetrations, detailed cable routing,

grounding electrodes, and bonding connections to structure and other metal objects. Include

terminal, electrode, and conductor sizes, and connection and termination details. All cable and

conduit routing shall be coordinated with the general construction contractor.

D. Submit product data showing dimensions and materials of each component, and include

indication of listing in accordance with ANSI/UL 96A.


264113 - 2


A. The entire lightning protection system shall be designed and installed in accordance with:

1. Lightning Protection Institute (LPI) Standard #175

2. National Fire Protection Assoc. (NFPA) Document #780

3. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (U/L) Standard #96A

4. National Electric Code, as adopted by the AHJ.

B. Lightning Protection System: ANSI/NFPA 78; Class I, UL 96A; Master Labeled system

protection consisting of air terminals on roofs, bonding of structure and other metal objects;

grounding electrodes; and interconnecting conductors.

C. Quality Assurance:

1. The LPS installer/contractor shall furnish an LPI-IP Certificate or a UL Certificate upon

completion of the installation.

2. The System Design shall be completed and the shop drawing stamped by an LPI

Certified Master Designer - Installer of Lightning Protection Systems.

3. The installing contractor shall be listed with the Lightning Protection Institute, and

Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. The installation contractor shall have personnel on staff

Certified by the LPI as a Master Installer/Designer of lightning protection systems. LPI

qualified staff, Journeyman or higher, shall provide on-site supervision of the installation

to the Standards.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit project record documents under provisions of Section 260010 and Division 1.

B. Accurately record actual locations of air terminals, grounding electrodes, bonding connections,

and routing of system conductors.

C. Provide LPI System Certification Certificate.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the work of this section with roofing and exterior and interior finish installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Design and specification is based on lightning protection systems and products as manufactured

by firms listed below. Subject to compliance with these specifications additional

manufacturers may provide equivalent in quality products.

1. ERICO, Inc. (www.erico.com)

2. Thomas & Betts / Furse (www.tnb.com)

3. Lyncole (www.lyncole.com)

http://www.erico.com/

http://www.tnb.com/

http://www.lyncole.com/


264113 - 3

4. VFC ZPen® (www.vfcinc.com)


2.2 MATERIALS

A. All LPS materials shall be copper or copper alloy and of the size, weight, and construction for

use on steel framed buildings in accordance with LPI and NFPA Code requirements for Class I

structures and as per manufacturer recommendations.

B. All fasteners and miscellaneous bolts, nuts and screws shall be brass, bronze, or stainless steel.

C. Materials – Service Entrance Grounding

1. A servicGrounding System similar to Lyncole XIT shall be installed at electrical service

entrance. Either a vertical or horizontal 10’ unit shall be used. Lyncole part numbers

K2-10CS, or K2L-10CS

2. A Main Ground bar shall be installed at the electrical service with minimum dimensions

of ¼” x 4” x 24” with 2-hole lug spacing.

D. Materials – Lightning Protection

1. Class I materials shall be used for systems on structures not exceeding 75 feet in height

above grade.

2. Copper shall be of the grade ordinarily required for commercial electrical work,

generally designated as being 95 percent conductive when annealed.

3. Aluminum conductors shall be of electrical grade aluminum.

4. Lightning protection materials shall be coordinated with building construction materials

to assure compatibility. Aluminum lightning protection materials shall not be embedded

in concrete or masonry, installed on or below copper surfaces, or used for the in-ground

system. Copper lightning protection materials shall not be installed on aluminum

surfaces or on exterior sheet metal surfaces. Copper system components within 2 feet of

chimney exhausts shall be tin coated to protect against deterioration.

5. Strike termination devices shall be provided to place the entire structure under a zone of

protection as defined by the Standards. Air terminals shall project a minimum of 10

inches above protected areas or objects. Air terminals shall be located within 2 feet of

exposed corners and roof edges.

6. Metallic bodies having a thickness 3/16” or greater may serve as strike termination

devices without the addition of air terminals. These bodies shall be made a part of the

lightning protection system by connection(s) according to the Standards using main size

conductors and bonding fittings with 3 square inches of surface contact area.

7. Cable conductors shall provide a two-way path from strike termination devices

horizontally and downward to connections with the ground system.

8. Cable conductors shall be free of excessive splices and sharp bends. No bend of a

conductor shall form a final included angle of less than 90 degrees nor have a radius of

bend less than 8 inches. Structural elements and design features shall be used whenever

possible to minimize the visual impact of exposed conductors.

9. Cable down conductors may be concealed within the building construction or enclosed

within PVC conduit from roof to grade level. Down conductors shall be spaced at

intervals averaging not more than 100 feet around the protected perimeter of the

structure. In no case shall any structure have fewer than two down conductors. Where

down conductors are exposed to environmental hazards at grade level, guards shall be

used to protect the conductor to a point 6 feet above grade.

http://www.vfcinc.com/


264113 - 4

10. In the case of structural steel frame construction, cable down conductors may be omitted

and roof conductors shall be connected to the structural steel frame at intervals averaging

not more than 100 feet around the protected perimeter of the structure.

11. Exposed cable conductors shall be secured to the structure at intervals not exceeding 3

feet – 0 inches.

12. Connectors and splicers shall be of suitable configuration and type for the intended

application and of the same material as the conductors or of electrolytically compatible

materials.

13. Ground terminations suitable for the soil conditions shall be provided for each downlead

conductor. Where the structural steel framework is utilized as main conductors for the

system, perimeter columns shall be connected to the grounding system at intervals

averaging 60 feet or less on the protected perimeter. For any structure in excess of 60 ft.

in vertical elevation above grade, a ground loop interconnecting all ground terminals and

other building grounded systems shall be provided.

14. Common interconnection of all grounded systems within the building shall be

accomplished using main size conductors and fittings. Grounded metal bodies located

within the calculated bonding distance as determined by the formulas of the Standards

shall be bonded to the system using properly sized bonding conductors.

E. Materials – Surge Suppression

1. Surge Suppression devices shall be provided at every system entrance to the structure to

prevent lightning overvoltages from entering the Structure.

2. Surge Suppression devices shall be provided at the switchgear. The unit installed must

meet the minimum requirements set out by NFPA 780 and UL 1449 3rd edition type 1 or

type 2 units.

3. Surge suppression devices must be installed as per the manufacturer’s instructions and

the NEC.

4. Surge Suppression products for the communication service shall meet NFPA 780 Sec

4.18 and shall be installed as per the manufacturer’s requirements and NFPA 780

Paragraph 4.18.6 and 4.18.7.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on shop drawings.

C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.3 PROTECTION OF SURROUNDING ELEMENTS

A. Protect elements surrounding work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.

3.4 INSTALLATION – XIT Grounding System


264113 - 5

A. General: To achieve specific earth resistance, the manufacturer / LPS installer shall provide

engineering design assistance. Preliminary step in grounding design requires a "Wenner four-

point" soil resistivity test be performed on the earth at the job site.

B. Install ground rod system in compliance with manufacturer's instructions or recommendations.

C. Excavation - Bore minimum 6" diameter hole 6" deeper than the length of rod to be buried.

This insures that the top of the copper XIT rod will not come in contact with the metal grate of

the protective box or hand-hole cover. If the electrode is longer than 10', a minimum 8"

diameter hole should be utilized. This is to insure that the system will be completely

surrounded by the backfill material. Remove sealing tape from leaching holes. Place XIT unit

in hole, so that the top of unit is about 6" below grade. Install specific clay backfill as

recommended by the manufacturer and included with the system. Mix each 50# backfill grout

material with 14 gallons water to form a thick slurry and pour around XIT rod up to "bury to

here sticker". Place protective box so top is flush with grade level and finish. Remove sealing

tape from top breather holes to activate.

D. Connection: Connect grounding electrode conductor(s) to ground rod pigtail exothermically.

Bury grounding conductor 30" below grade. Cover bare conductor with a small amount of

backfill for protection against corrosion.

3.5 INSTALLATION – Lightning Protection

A. The installation of the lightning protection system components shall be done in a neat and

workmanlike manner.

B. Roof penetrations required for down conductors or for connections to structural steel

framework shall be made using through-roof assemblies with solid bars and appropriate roof

flashings. The roofing contractor shall furnish the methods and materials required at roofing

penetrations of the lightning protection components and any additional roofing materials or

preparations required by the roofing manufacturer for lightning conductor runs to assure

compatibility with the warranty for the roof. The roofing contractor will be responsible for

sealing and flashing all lightning protection roof penetrations as per the roof manufacturer’s

recommendations. The lightning protection roof penetrations and/or method of conductor

attachment are specified in the roofing section of the specifications.

3.6 INSTALLATION – Surge Suppression

A. At locations indicated on drawing(s), install Surge Protection Devices in full accordance with

manufacturer’s written instructions and comply with all applicable codes.

B. The Surge Protection Device shall be installed with the shortest possible leads, or wire length

maximum 18”.

3.7 FIELD INSPECTION AND QUALITY CONTROL

A. The contractor shall furnish an LPI-IP Certificate or a UL Certificate upon completion of the

installation.


264113 - 6

1. LPI certification requires a signature by a representative of the owner at multiple stages

of installation & by the Architect/Engineer.

B. Final Inspection Report – A final test and inspection report shall be completed based on

ANSI/TIA/EIA 607, NEC, NFPA 780, and UL96A industry standards as applicable. The scope

of the inspection and report shall include;

1. Test and evaluation the grounding system. Record final system-to-ground resistance

level.

2. Evaluation and Testing of the internal bonding and grounding systems.

3. Evaluation and Testing of equipment grounding.

4. Evaluation of AC surge suppression installation.

5. Evaluation of telco surge suppression installation.

6. Copy of the LPI-IP Lightning Protection Certification.

C. Final As-Built Review and submission. As-Built Drawings shall be completed and stamped by

an LPI Certified Master Designer - Installer of Lightning Protection Systems.

D. Report shall include detailed reporting and test results with corresponding photos of each

evaluation category.


LIGHTING FIXTURES Delanco MVC

265100 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 265100 – LIGHTING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior and exterior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.

a. All fixtures shall utilize LED light sources as scheduled.

2. Emergency lighting units and Exit fixtures

3. Lighting fixture supports and accessories

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.

Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.

2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.

3. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for LED driver and light source.

4. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture

type, outfitted with LED drivers and accessories identical to those indicated for the

lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions,

weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each luminaire and accessory;

including product data, and shop drawings in accordance with requirements of Division 1.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers'

laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program

for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.


265100 - 2


Article 100, by UL or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and

marked for intended use.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-

suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver luminaires in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly protect

luminaires from damage. Handle luminaires carefully to prevent damage, breaking and scoring

of finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new.

B. Store luminaires in original packaging. Store inside well ventilated area protected from

weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity, laid flat and blocked off

ground.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Design and specification is based on the manufacturers’ products noted or scheduled on

drawings. Subject to the compliance with these specifications and Architect/Engineer approval,

the following manufacturers may provide equivalent products. In the event that an equivalent

item will require revisions or additions to any Work, the costs of such Work, including costs to

other contractors, shall be performed at no change in the Contract Sum.

1. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to reject any submitted products which do not

meet the same level of quality, photometric performance, energy efficiency, finish,

aesthetic qualities, features, or other criteria as determined by the A/E to be not

acceptable. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to request samples of alternate

manufacturers’ products prior to completing review of fixture submittal. Samples shall

be delivered to the designated location for review at no cost to the Owner or

Architect/Engineer.

B. Troffers, recessed and surface mounted, industrials, strips

1. Finelite

2. Columbia

3. Metalux

4. DayBrite

5. Lithonia


C. Downlights


265100 - 3

1. Prescolite

2. Kirlin

3. Gotham

4. Halo

5. Juno


D. Suspended/stem-mounted fluorescent.

1. Finelite

2. Linear Lighting

3. Litecontrol

4. Ledalite

5. Peerless


E. Exterior units

1. Architectural Area Lighting

2. Kenall

3. Hubbell

4. Sternberg

5. Bega


F. Exit Fixtures and Emergency Battery Units

1. Dual-Lite

2. Emergi-Lite

3. Sure-Lites

4. Chloride

5. Lithonia


2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide luminaires, of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with housing, LED

drivers and light bourds, reflectors, trim, accessories and wiring.

B. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

C. Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent

warping and sagging. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Construct luminaires with concealed hinges and

latches, with metal parts grounded as common unit, and so constructed as to dampen ballast

generated noise. Housing shall be free of light leakage under operating conditions, and

designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Construct to prevent doors, frames, lenses,

diffusers, and other components from falling during relamping and when secured in operating

position.


265100 - 4

F. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic UV stabilized plastic, high

resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV

radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: minimum of 0.125 inch unless different thickness is indicated.

2.3 LED LIGHTING

A. LED Light Engine: Light engine shall utilize remote phosphor lens and mixing chamber to

ensure perfectly mixed light, resulting in uniform colors and superior color consistency from

fixture to fixture. Provide 2700K, 3000K, 3500K and 4100K color temperatures as scheduled or

selected by Architect/Engineer. CRI shall be greater than 80. Cast aluminum heat sink

integrated directly with housing provides thermal management. LEDs shall operate below

manufacturer’s published junction temperature to ensure attainment of rated life of the LEDs .

Light engine shall mount directly to heat sink and be easily replaceable.

B. LED Driver: Universal driver accommodates 120V to 277V input volts AC at 50/60Hz . Power

factor shall be greater than 0.9. Unit shall be easily replaceable from above or below the ceiling.

Rated life shall be a minimum of 50,000 hours at 70% lumen maintenance.

1. Dimming: Where scheduled, driver shall be dimmable via 0-10V protocol, increasing

efficiency up to 30% while dimming.

2.4 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting

fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously at an output of 700

lumens minimum each. Connect un-switched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched

circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously.

3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or

entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power

and demonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.

5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay.

6. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is

annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.


265100 - 5

2.5 EXIT SIGNS

A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size,

comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide red lettering, universal mounting and field

adjustable faces and arrows.

B. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Housing and canopy constructed of thermoplastic.

Integral automatic charger with a self-contained power pack.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type, capacity as scheduled or

required for connected load.

2. Lamps: strip-type LEDs, 20-year minimum rated lamp life.

3. Charger: 120/277 volt universal input, fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed

transfer relay.

4. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops

to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay

disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on

charger.

5. Provide unit-mounted lamp head where indicated

6. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and

demonstrates unit operability.

7. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;

bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

8. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is

annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.

2.6 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel-

and angle-iron supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy.

Factory-finish shall match fixture or as selected.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single

fixture. Factory-finish shall match fixture or as selected.

D. Hanger Wires (concealed lay-in fixtures): ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-

coated steel, 12 gauge.

E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, zinc or cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod, for use

in unfinished areas.

F. Cable Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and equipped with factory-furnished

attachments, flexible cord, and canopy.


265100 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Connect wiring

according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support

element.

1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate

not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each

fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans

or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-

inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install two support rods or wires from structure and attach directly to lighting fixture.

Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.

3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

D. Install flush mounted luminaires properly to eliminate light leakage between luminaire frame

and finished surface.

E. Provide plaster frames for recessed luminaires installed in other than suspended grid type

acoustical ceiling systems. Brace frames temporarily to prevent distortion during handling.


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify

transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and

interpreting results.

3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Clean interior lighting luminaires of dirt and construction debris upon completion of

installation, or at date of substantial completion, whichever is the nearest to final completion.

B. Adjust aimable luminaires to provide required light intensities and directional aiming.

C. At Date of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in interior luminaires which are observed to

be noticeably dimmed after Contractor’s use and testing, as judged by Engineer.


265100 - 7

1. Refer to Division 1 sections for the replacement/restoration of lamps in interior

luminaires, where used for temporary lighting prior to Date of Substantial Completion.

3.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for LED Drivers and Light Engines: Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer agrees to repair or replace LED light engines and/or drivers that fail in materials

or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for LED Drivers and Light Engines: Five years from date of Substantial

Completion.

B. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace

components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 5 years from date of

Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty

for the remaining nine years.

2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign

Batteries: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for

first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining 4 years.


EXTERIOR LIGHTING Delanco MVC

265600- 1

DPMC #T0548-00

DIVISION 26

SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior light fixtures.

2. Poles, bases, and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CRI: Color-rendering index.

B. HID: High-intensity discharge.

C. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

D. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.

E. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.

1.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION

A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and

supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf (2224 N), distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft. (143.6 Pa), applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied as stated in

AASHTO LTS-4.


265600- 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting

unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected

area, and verification of indicated parameters.

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories.

3. Details of installation and construction.

4. Luminaire materials.

5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with

indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

a. For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified

independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be

certified by manufacturer.

b. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current

accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for

Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

6. Photoelectric relays.

7. Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data.

8. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles.

9. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for

components involved.

10. Anchor bolts for poles.

11. Manufactured pole foundations.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.

C. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that

products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4 and that load

imposed by luminaire has been included in design.

D. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.

G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


265600- 3


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers'

laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program

for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent

agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.



intended use.

D. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Comply with standards and codes as indicated by the luminaires and poles specified herein.


A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.

B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches (300 mm) above grade and

vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

C. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For

poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.

1.8 WARRANTY


replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain,

perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty

period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or

unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.

1. Warranty Period for LED fixtures, arrays, drivers and integral control devices: Free

from defect in material and workmanship for a period of five years from date of

shipment. The LED arrays in the Product(s) will be considered defective in material or

workmanship only if a total of 15% or more of the individual light emitting diodes in

the Product(s) fail to illuminate. The painted finish of the Product(s) will be considered

defective in material or workmanship only if there is substantial deterioration, in the

form of blistering, cracking, or peeling. The painted finish is not warranted against

fading or chalking, as Product(s) may naturally fade or chalk over time due to normal

aging.


265600- 4

2. Warranty Period for Poles: Free from defect in material and workmanship for a period

of one year from date of shipment. The painted finish of the Product(s) will be

considered defective in material or workmanship only if there is substantial

deterioration, in the form of blistering, cracking, or peeling. The painted finish is not

warranted against fading or chalking, as Product(s) may naturally fade or chalk over

time due to normal aging.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS



1. Lamps (including light engine, driver, and lenses): Furnish One of each type.

2. Poles: Furnish One of each type.

3. Arms: Furnish One of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements and specifications,

provide Lithonia Lighting D-Series LED or comparable products from one of the following,

or equivalent:

a. Gardco

b. BetaLED

c. Philips Lumec

The MVC will consider one of the products/manufacturers specified above, or will consider

equivalent substitute products of manufacturers other than those specified provided that the Bid

Proposal identifies one or more locations in New Jersey, New York, Connecticut, or

Pennsylvania where the substitute product is installed, operating, and available for inspection.

The substitute product must be equal in quality and meet the standards set herein for pole

structural criteria, quality assurance, warranty, and photometric and other performance

specifications.

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR INDIVIDUAL EXTERIOR LIGHTING DEVICES

A. Exterior Lighting Device Types:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Lithonia Lighting D-Series LED

2. Voltage: 277-V AC.

3. Nominal Dimensions: Varies


265600- 5

4. Lamps/ Light Engine: Composed of 4 main components: LED lamp / Optical System /

Heat Sink / Driver Electrical components are RoHS compliant, maximum ambient

operating temperature up to 40C(104F) degrees.

Lamp: (Included), Composed of high performance white LEDs. Operating lifespan,

70,000 hours after which the system emits 70% of its original lumen output, all of

those parameters are tested for 100% of light engines.

5. Ballast Types and Features: Driver: High power factor of 90%. Electronic driver,

operating range 50-60 Hz. Auto-adjusting to voltage, Class II, THD of 20% max.

Maximum ambient operating temperature from -40F(-40C) to 130F(55C) degrees.

Lamp starting capacity -40F(-40C) degrees. Certified in compliance to CUL

requirement. Weather tightness rating IP66. Assembled on a unitized removable tray

with quick disconnect plug resisting to 221F(105C) degrees, located in a separate

enclosure in order to protect from heat generated by the LEDs.

6. Lens: Full cutoff optical system. Composed of high performance acrylic collimators,

optimized with varying beam angles to achieve desired distribution. System is rated

IP66. Performance shall be tested per LM63 and LM79 (IESNA) certifying its

photometric performance. Dark Sky compliant.

7. Reflector: no reflector . LED optical lens provided

8. Focusing and Aiming Provisions: None

9. IESNA Cutoff Category: Full Cutoff.

10. Nominal Beam Spread for Floodlights: N/a

11. Internal Light Shield: not needed.

12. Pole Description:

a. Material or Type: Aluminum.

b. Luminaire Support Components and Accessories: Metal pole bracket, Handholes,

Banner arms, GFI, Grounding and bonding lug and other accessories where noted

within the plans and specifications.

c. Mounting Provisions: Concrete foundation.

d. Luminaire Mounting Height above Finished Grade: Varies, see plans.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.


265600- 6

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the

application and approved by manufacturer.

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric

device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources.

3.2 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their

mounting provisions on the pole.

B. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by

pole manufacturer. Provide NJDOT Class B pre-cast concrete bases, in accordance with

specifications Section 033010.

C. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level

recommended by pole manufacturer.

1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application

and approved by manufacturer.

2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete

grout firmly packed to fill space.

3. Install base covers, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter pipe to make a drain hole through

grout. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.

D. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).

3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a

dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground metal poles and support structures as follows:

1. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding

system.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires

and energizing circuits with normal power source.

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.


265600- 7

C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST

standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s):

a. IESNA LM-50, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Lighting Installations."

b. IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas."

D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate

compliance with standards.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain luminaires and control devices.


COMMUNICATIONS AND SECURITY CABLING Delanco MVC

271506 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 27

SECTION 271506 – COMMUNICATIONS AND SECURITY CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes low voltage wiring for telephone/voice, data, security/intrusion detection,

and CCTV camera systems.

1. Furnish, install and test voice and data jacks and cabling. Telephones, computers, servers,

switches are provided by others.

2. Furnish, install and test CCTV camera system cabling and jacks. The cameras and

monitoring equipment will be furnished and installed, connected and tested by others.

B. Security/intrusion detection system and paging system cabling, devices, equipment and

pathways will be furnished, installed, connected and tested by others.

C. Section Includes:

1. Category 6 enhanced UTP cabling for Voice, Data, and CCTV Cameras.

2. Fiber Optic Cable for inter-building connectivity

3. Cable connecting hardware and patch panels

4. Telecommunications outlet/connectors.

5. Cabling system identification products.

6. Equipment racks and cable management system.

7. Grounding and bonding

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection

or cross-connection.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.


271506 - 2

E. LAN: Local area network.

F. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet

cable terminates.

G. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

H. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between

the telecommunications workstation outlet/connector and the horizontal patch panel located in

the communications equipment room.

1. Horizontal cabling shall not contain a transition point or splices between the patch panel

and the telecommunications workstation.

2. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.

B. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable length

does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment or for the

length of 16 feet in the horizontal cross-connect.

1.5 BACKBONE (RISER) CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipment

rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling system

structure. Cabling system consists of backbone and/or riser cables, intermediate and main

cross-connects, mechanical terminations,

B. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at

entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.


A. General: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in the latest

edition of:

1. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 “Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises”

2. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 “Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard”

3. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 “Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling Standard”

4. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 “Generic Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard”

B. Structured Cabling Performance: The specified “Enhanced Category 6” horizontal cabling

system shall provide a total usable bandwidth of 250 MHz and shall deliver verified channel

performance of 5 dB above all Cat 6 crosstalk and 3 dB return loss requirements for standards-

compliant installations.


271506 - 3

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cable and product specified.

B. Samples: For UTP and fiber optic cable, workstation outlets, identification labels

C. Qualification Data: For installation supervisor and field inspector.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2

Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at

Project site.

2. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site

testing.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of

applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.


by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet

work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining

ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the

construction period.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at

each work area.

B. Coordinate telecommunications cabling within modular furniture system with furniture vendor.

C. Coordinate exact locations and rough-in requirements of CCTV cameras with system installer.


271506 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Cable Supports: UL labeled for support of Category 6e cabling, designed to prevent

degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. Use products as

recommended by the cable manufacturer.

1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.

2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.

3. Straps and other devices.

C. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for


1. Conduit shall be minimum 1” size, with sweep bends wherever possible

2. Outlet boxes shall be double-gang, 2-1/2 inches deep.

D. Cable Tray: Install cables in cable tray where provided. Refer to Section 26 0536.

E. Innerduct: Refer to Division 26 Section “Raceways for Communications Systems”.

2.2 UTP CABLE



1. Berk-Tek; Nexans Company

2. Belden Cable

3. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.

4. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT.

5. SYSTIMAX Solutions

6. 3M.


B. Description: Basis of Design is Mohawk GigaLan enhanced, #M57413; 100-ohm, 4-pair UTP,

22 AWG solid copper insulated with FEP, covered with a thermoplastic flame-retardant PVC

jacket; enhanced Category 6.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.

2. ETL Verified to exceed TIA/EIA-568-C.2 Category 6.

3. Listed and labeled as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 and 262 for the following

types:

a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP

C. Color: Provide color-coded cables as follows or to match facility standard, verify with

Architect/Engineer:

a. Data #1 shall be “White”


271506 - 5

b. Data #2 shall be “Yellow”

c. Voice shall be “Blue”

d. CCTV Cameras shall be “Purple”

2.3 UTP CABLE HARDWARE



1. Hubbell Premise Wiring.

2. Leviton Voice & Data Division.

3. Panduit Corp.

4. Siemon Co.


B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA-568-C.2, IDC type,

with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Connecting hardware to be of same

category or higher as the specified UTP cabling.

C. Patch Panel: Flat modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type

connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables, universal

wiring for both T568A and T568B. Siemon HD6 or equal.

1. EIA Standard 19 rack mounting. Provide with rear cable manager, icon label holders and

designation labels, cable ties, and mounting hardware.

2. Number of Jacks: One for each UTP cable indicated, plus 30 percent spares and blank

positions.

3. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Integral with connector bodies,

including plugs and jacks where indicated

D. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: RJ45 Cat 6, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-

position modular, angled, T568A and T568B wiring options. Provide rear strain relief cap,

protective rubber door, color as indicated to match cable. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1.

Siemon MAX MX-6 or equal

2.4 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE



1 Corning Cable Systems.

1. General Cable Technologies Corporation.

2. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT.

3. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc.

4. 3M.

5. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect;


B. Outdoor (underground) fiber: Multimode, 62.5/125-micrometer, tight buffer, optical fiber cable

with strands as indicated on drawings.


271506 - 6

1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 (indoor) and ICEA 87-640 (outdoor - underground) for

mechanical properties. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications.

2. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP

7. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm.

8. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.

B. Jacket:

1. Jacket Color: Orange for 62.5/125-micrometer cable.

2. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals

2.5 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE



1. ADC.

2. Corning Cable Systems.


4. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.

5. Siemon Co.


B. Fiber Patch Panels: Flat modular panels housing multiple-numbered connectors at each jack for

permanent termination of installed fiber strands. Siemon FCP3-DWR or equal.

1. EIA Standard 19 rack mounting. Provide with removable sliding drawer tray, front fiber

clips, removable label holder, fiber cable tabs and anchor points, adapter mounting plates.

Provide splice tray with sleeve splice holders and clear cover.

2. Adapters: One for each fiber strand indicated, duplex arrangement, quick connect, Type

SC or ST, universal to support single mode and multimode fiber.

C. Cable Connecting Hardware:

1. Comply with FOCIS specifications of TIA/EIA-604-2, TIA/EIA-604-3-A, and TIA/EIA-

604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC or Type ST connectors. Insertion loss not

more than 0.75 dB.

2.6 WORKSTATION OUTLETS

A. Jacks: RJ45 Cat 6, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular, angled,

T568A and T568B wiring options. Provide rear strain relief cap, protective rubber door, color as

indicated. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1. Siemon MAX MX-6 or equal

B. Outlets: Multi-port assemblies as indicated on Drawings, mounted on single-gang cover over a

double gang wallbox.


271506 - 7

1. Faceplate: High-impact plastic single-gang with 45-degree angled module mounting, for

use with snap-in jacks, accommodating up to four UTP jacks.

2. Match faceplate color with receptacles per Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices."

Provide a slide-in color coded icon insert above each jack.

a. Data #1 shall be “White”

b. Data #2 shall be “Yellow”

c. Voice shall be “Blue”

d. CCTV Camera cable shall be “Purple”

3. Identification legend: Snap-in, clear-label cover over a paper insert. Labels shall be

machine-printed, to match labeling specified protocol. Each jack shall be uniquely

identified.

2.7 EQUIPMENT FRAMES





3. Leviton Voice & Data Division.

4. Ortronics, Inc.

5. Panduit Corp.

6. Siemon Co.


B. Equipment Rack – Floor Mounted:

1. General: Two-post freestanding, extruded aluminum or welded steel units with two 3-

inch uprights and base, two top angles, 1200 pound load rating, UL-listed.

2. Dimensions: 19-inch panel width compatible with EIA 310-D standard. Overall height of

84 inches (minimum).

3. Anchors and supports: Provide (4) 3/8 inch x 3 inch long anchor bolts and wedge

anchors for base attachment to concrete floor structure. Provide a 12- inch wide

horizontal runway with stringer caps and angle bracket to stabilize top of rack to wall.

4. Cable Management: Cable management accessories shall be metal, with integral wire

retaining fingers. Provide 3-5/8 inch wide single-sided vertical cable management to

include hinged removable doors, cable straps mounts, retained bars, gates and mounting

hardware. Provide a 2U horizontal crossover cable manager above and below each patch

panel. Baked-polyester powder coat finish, black

5. Accessories: Provide (1) single-sided ventilated 15 inch deep CPU shelf per rack, 100

pound load rated. Provide (1) rack mounted copper ground bar with mounting hardware

per rack.

6. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, black baked-polyester powder coat.

C. Equipment Rack - Wall Cabinets:

1. Construction: Welded 16 gauge steel dual hinge cabinet, reversible left or right hinge

swing, lockable solid steel front door, louvered side panels, grounding lug, UL Listed,

150 pound load rating. All cabinets keyed alike.


271506 - 8

2. Dimensions: 36 inch high cabinet with 19 mounting units available, 25 inches wide x 25

inches deep.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, black baked-polyester powder coat.

2.8 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar:

1. Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire

terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum 1/4 inch thick by 6 inches wide with 9/32-inch

holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart.

3. Stand-Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or

PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

C. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

2.9 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks,

laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory test all UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-C.2.

B. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces or in areas without

ceilings.

1. Install cables in raceways where indicated

2. Use unenclosed wiring method for cables in accessible ceiling spaces, attics, and within

gypsum board partitions.

3. Install plenum-rated cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.


271506 - 9

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and

without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and

distribution spools.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends

between pull points.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems"

for installation of conduits and wireways.

C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

D. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to cable trays where cable trays are indicated

2. Install cable trays to route cables where indicated.

3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead.

4. Extend underground/underfloor conduits up 12 inches above finished floor against wall.

5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to

grounding system.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C.1.

2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."

3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.

4. Terminate conductors; no voice or data cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. Cables

may not be spliced.

5. Provide CCTV cables unterminated at both ends. Provide 20 foot coiled loops for future

connection by Owner.

6. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and not more than 6

inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

7. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent

bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

8. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's

limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

9. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Remove and discard

cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

10. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before unreeling. Heat

lamps shall not be used for heating.

11. In the communications equipment room, install a 3-foot long service loop on each end of

cable.

12. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Chapter 4.


271506 - 10

C. UTP Cable Installation:


2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain

cable geometry.

D. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:


2. Cable shall be terminated on specified connecting hardware.

E. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces

with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend UTP cable, where not in conduit or cable tray, a minimum of 8 inches above

ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with, or supported from,

pipes, ducts, or potentially damaging items.

F. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice

and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power

lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables and unshielded power conductors or

electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

b. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and

unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.


4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power

lines or electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be

as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.


5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5

kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5

inches.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection"

Chapter.


271506 - 11

B. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall

allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar

with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable

electrical building ground.

C. Bond metallic equipment racks, cable trays, cabinets, etc. to the grounding bus bar, using not

smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply

with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for


B. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List

incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with

rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive

schedules for Project.

C. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a

cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at

device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within

panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at

intervals not exceeding 15 feet.

4. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label

each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware.

Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling,

use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

D. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that

contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A.



1. Visually inspect cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling

terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for

pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-C.1.

2. Visually confirm marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels.

3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment

and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent

faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection

blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.

5. UTP Performance Tests:


271506 - 12

a. Test for each outlet. Perform all tests according to TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2.

6. Fiber Optic Tests:

a. Test each fiber cable according to TIA-568-C.3

B. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report

that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM.

C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports. Submit three (3) copies as part of O&M documentation.


FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Delanco MVC

283121 - 1

DPMC NO. T0548-00

DIVISION 28

SECTION 283121 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes furnishing, installation, and connection of a microprocessor controlled, analog

addressable, intelligent fire alarm equipment as required to form a complete coordinated fire

alarm and detection system ready for operation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.


A. Provide all permits, labor, equipment, materials and services to furnish and install a completely

new fully tested functional, UL Listed, code compliant, intelligent addressable networked fire

detection and notification system including but not limited to; fire alarm control panels

(FACP’s), all initiation and notification appliances, all raceways, fiber cable and wiring, and

connection to an off-premises central monitoring station.

B. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard 72 (2013) for

Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this

specification. The system shall be electrically supervised and shall monitor the integrity of all

conductors.

C. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under the

appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and the installation

shall be in compliance with the UL listing.

D. Provide a system to consist of a main fire alarm panel in the Agency Building and a fire alarm

sub-panel in the Road Test Field House. The panels shall be interconnected and shall

communicate across the site via fiber optic cable. The main panel shall include communications

components to initiate off-premises reporting. An alarm signal in either building shall initiate a

general alarm output in both buildings if that function is enabled by the using agency. Any

supervisory alarm in either building shall be annunciated at the main panel.


283121 - 2

E. Also included are system wiring, fiber optic cable, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets,

mounting boxes, and any accessories and miscellaneous items required for a code compliant

system. A dedicated TCP/IP fiber optic network shall be provided to connect the FACP panels

located in the two buildings

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them

to Architect/Engineer.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified in fire-alarm system design.

b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to

other work.

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of

Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.

3. Include battery-size calculations.

4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that

each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity

possible when air-handling system is operating.

5. Include plans and duct details coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and

access to them. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

6. Include single-line connection diagram.

7. Include floor plans to indicate final device locations showing address of each addressable

device. Show size, type and route of cable and wiring.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01,


1. Comply with the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72.

3. Record copy of site-specific software and device address list.

4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72

5. Manufacturer's maintenance requirements.

6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.


283121 - 3


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation

of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be supervised by personnel certified by NICET as

fire-alarm Level II technician as a minimum.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled, and marked for intended

location and application

D. Products shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) – USA listed::

No. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

No. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

No. 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications

No. 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

No. 464 Audible Signaling Appliances

No. 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes

No. 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

No. 1076 Control Units for Burglar Alarm Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems

No. 1971 Visual Notification Appliances

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Provide quantity of each

device as indicated ( x ) for each building fire alarm system:

1. Smoke Detectors: ( 3 )

2. Heat Detectors: ( 3 )

3. Pull stations: ( 2 )

4. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: ( 2 ) of each type installed.

5. Addressable Modules: ( 1 ) of each type specified

6. Keys and Tools: ( 3 ) sets for access to lockable components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Provide a fire alarm system consisting of products as provided by EST Life Safety and

Communications or approved equal. EST product numbers are used below as the Basis-of-

Design.

B. Subject to the compliance with these specifications, other listed manufacturers may provide

equivalent in quality products. If an equivalent system will require revisions or additions to the

system as designed, the Contractor must coordinate the installation and bear all costs of

revisions or additions to the work.

1. Siemens

2. FireLite/Honeywell


283121 - 4


C. All devices shall be UL-listed by the manufacturer as being compatible with the fire alarm panel

furnished for the project.


A. Provide an addressable system to consist of a main fire alarm panel in the Agency Building and

a fire alarm sub-panel in the Road Test Field House. The fire network shall utilize token ring,

peer-to-peer communications. The network shall consist of one main and one remote Fire Alarm

Control Panels (FACP). To enhance survivability, each FACP shall be an equal, active

functional member of the network, capable of making all local decisions and initiating network

tasks for other panels. In the event of an FACP failure or communications failure between units,

FACPs shall remain operational between communicating units. Master/slave system

configurations shall not be considered as equal

1. The panels shall be interconnected and shall communicate across the site via fiber optic

cable.

2. The main panel shall include communications components to initiate off-premises

reporting.

3. An alarm signal in either building shall initiate a general alarm output in both buildings if

that function is enabled by the using agency. Any supervisory alarm in either building

shall be annunciated at the main panel.

B. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:

1. Manual stations.

2. Heat detectors.

3. Smoke detectors.

4. Duct smoke detectors.

5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.

C. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.

2. Activate alarm notification system.

3. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit, and remote annunciator(s) when provided.

4. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

5. Release fire and smoke doors, if any, held open by magnetic door holders.

6. Shutoff HVAC equipment controls due to duct detection.

7. Record events in the system memory.

D. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch.

2. Sprinkler pipe heat trace failure.

E. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.


283121 - 5

2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices.

3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.

4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits.

5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.

6. Break in standby battery circuitry.

7. Failure of battery charging.

8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

F. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate

at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciator(s).

G. A dedicated fiber optic TCP/IP network utilizing UL864 listed network components shall be

supplied to interconnect the FACPs in the buildings.

2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. General Alarm: Actuation of any initiating device (manual station, smoke detector, heat detector

or water flow switch) shall cause the following operations to occur. The alarm actuation shall

occur in both buildings, or in just the building containing the alarm initiation, as determined by

the using agency :

1. Activate all programmed alarm notification circuits until silenced.

2. Activate all visual notification (strobe) units until the panel is reset.

3. Activate the exterior visual notification (strobe) unit only on the same building as is in

alarm condition.

4. Annunciate the location of the active initiating device(s) at the main panel and remote

annunciator panel(s).

5. Initiate remote communication to off-site monitoring service via telephone connection

6. Release all magnetic door holders at doors on the floor where the alarm was initiated.

B. Fire Suppression Systems:

1. Activation of any sprinkler waterflow switch shall initiate a general alarm condition.

2. Activation of any sprinkler system low pressure switch or valve tamper switch shall

initiate a system supervisory alarm indication.

C. Duct Detectors:

1. Activation of a duct type smoke detector shall initiate a general alarm and shall also

cause shutdown of the associated air distribution fan(s). This function shall be

coordinated with the temperature control installer.

2. Activation of a duct mounted smoke detector installed at a smoke damper shall initiate a

general alarm and shall also shall cause the damper to close. This function shall be

coordinated with the temperature control installer.


283121 - 6

2.4 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL PANEL

A. Manufacturer: EST Model 3X with modules, cards, power supplies as required to provide

functions specified.

B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Allow for a total system capacity of 250 addressable points (125 detectors and 125 other

addressable module devices per loop), expandable to 500 intelligent devices.

2. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with

electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.

a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable

programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through

failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and

printer.

3. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for

adjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit.

b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity

range of the device.

4. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.

5. Multi-mode fiber optic network interface transceivers and switches as required to support

two-way communication between the fire alarm panels..

C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at

fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and

supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming

and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters (4 x 20) minimum.

2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands.

D. Circuits:

1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be

encoded on NFPA Style 4 (Class B) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).

2. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style B) as part of an

addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit.

3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style Y) as part of

an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit.

4. On Style 6 or 7 (Class A) configurations a single ground fault or open circuit on the

system Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating

power or the ability to report an alarm.

5. Alarm signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure

(or outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.

E. Smoke-Alarm Verification:


283121 - 7

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm

control unit.

2. Activate an NRTL-listed and -approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm

control unit and detector.

3. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.

4. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

F. Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in an approved pattern.

G. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable

smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change

those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated

changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and

sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted

values on system printer.

H. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory,

and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

I. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-

supply module rating.

J. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic dual-rate battery charger,

and automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: 24-hour capacity, Sealed lead calcium or sealed, valve-regulated, recombinant

lead acid. The batteries are to be completely maintenance free.

2. Battery charger shall be completely automatic, with constant potential charger

maintaining the battery fully charged under all service conditions.

2.5 NAC POWER PANEL

A. Power Extender Panel shall be a stand-alone panel capable of powering a minimum of 4

notification appliance circuits. Notification appliance circuits shall be Class A, Style Z rated at 2

amps each.

B. The internal power supply & battery charger shall be capable of charging up 12.7 Amp-hour

batteries internally mounted or 18Amp-hour batteries mounted in an external cabinet.

C. Alarms from the host fire alarm control panel shall signal the NAC power extender panel to

activate. The panel shall monitor itself and each of its NACs for trouble conditions and shall

report trouble conditions to the host panel.

2.6 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR AND CELLULAR COMMUNICATOR

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter (DACT) shall be provided in the main fire alarm

control panel. A UL listed programmable 4G cellular communicator (equal to Honeywell


283121 - 8

IPGSM-4G) shal be provided adjacent to the FACP. The system shall be capable of telephone

line transmission, GSM cellular transmission, or IP/internet transmission.

B. Functional Performance: System shall initiate an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal in

Contact ID Format from fire-alarm control unit to using agency’s designated central monitoring

station. The DACT shall automatically capture a telephone line or cellular line depending on

selectable configuration and dial out to a remote central monitoring station. When contact is

made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service is lost on both outputs,

transmitter shall initiate a supervisory signal.

C. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable 24 hour battery and automatic charger.

D. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central

monitoring station.

2.7 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. Manufacturer: EST Model SIGA-278, with STI-1130 shield where indicated.

B. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be

finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show

visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as

surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with

integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal,

alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key-operated switch.

3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to

permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral

battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the

top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.8 SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Detectors shall be two-wire type.

3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for

connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to

restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-

on status.


283121 - 9

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type,

individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm

condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors (EST Model SIGA2-PS)

1. Detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke density

and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the

analog level of smoke density.

2. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to

identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type ( EST Model SIGA –SD with remote test station)

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to

identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with

the supplied detector.

3. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.

4. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific

duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

5. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

6. Remote Test Station; LED status indicators, key-operated test switch, recessed mounting

with flush cover plate, labeled to identify device controlled.

2.9 HEAT DETECTORS ( EST Model SIGA2-HRS w/ SIGA-SB base)

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

1. Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees Fahrenheit

(58 degrees Celsius) and be field-selectable with or without a rate-of-rise element rated at

15 degrees F (9.4 degrees C) per minute

2. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.

3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.10 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal

circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for semi-flush or surface mounting as indicated with Red

factory finish and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. Horns: ( EST Model G1RF-HD )

1. Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating

mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure

level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in

UL 464 test protocol.

2. Weatherproof housing for outdoor locations (EST 757 Series horn w/ weatherproof box)


283121 - 10

C. Visible Notification Appliances: ( EST Model G1RF-VM)

1. Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate

lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-

inch- high letters on the lens.

2. Rated Light Output: 15/30/75/110 candella (cd), selectable in the field.

3. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.

4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.

D. Combination Devices: ( EST Model G1RF-HDVM )

1. Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped

for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

2.11 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Magnetic Door Holders:

1. Furnish door hold magnets with multi-tap coil and remote power supplies, as required.

Units shall be listed to UL 228

2. Units are adjustable and suitable for wall or floor mounting and are complete with

matching door plate. Unit shall operate from 24 or 120VAC.

3. Material and Finish Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

2.12 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR (EST Model RLCD-C)

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm,

supervisory, and trouble indications. Alphanumeric LCD display and LED status indicating

lights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Manual switching functions shall match

those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Flush cabinet unless conditions require surface mounting, NEMA 250,

Type 1.

2.13 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES

A. Addressable interface modules shall be provided as indicated for monitoring or controlling

building components. The modules shall mount in a standard single-gang electrical box.

Provide mounting bracket and cover plate with LED status indicator.

1. Addressable monitor module (EST Model SIGA-CT1): NRTL listed for use in providing

a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open

contacts. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC

zone of conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the

fire alarm control panel SLCs.

2. Addressable control (relay) module (EST Model SIGA-CR): shall be provided to

supervise and control the operation of one fan shutdown or other auxiliary control

functions. The control module may be set to operate as a dry contract relay. Addressable


283121 - 11

Relay Modules shall be available for HVAC control and other building functions. The

relay shall be form C and rated for a minimum of 2.0 Amps resistive or 1.0 Amps

inductive. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection

requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or NACs may be energized at

the same time on the same pair of wires.

2.14 CONDUIT AND WIRE/CABLE

A. Conduit and Raceway: Refer to Part 3 for locations where conduit and surface raceway are

required.

1. Conduit; electrical metallic tubing, ¾” minimum, with fittings and boxes as specified in

other sections.

2. Surface metal raceway systems; complete with matching boxes and fittings, size as

required by application

B. Wire and Cables

1. Wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use

with a protective signaling system.

2. Wire and cable shall be NEC Type FPLP with a plenum-rated fire resistance rating.

3. Wiring shall be in accordance with applicable codes (NEC Article 760) and as

recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system.

4. All fire alarm system wiring and cables must be new and be color-coded red.

5. Number and size of conductors or cables shall be as recommended by the fire alarm

system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG for initiating device circuits and

signaling line circuits, and 14 AWG for notification appliance circuits.

C. Fiber Optic Cable: as recommended by the system manufacturer, suitable for installation in

underground (outdoor) conduit. Refer to specification 271506.

D. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets

1. All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor with tops of cabinets not

more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

C. Device Mounting: All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote

annunciators shall be installed as follows:

1. Accessible ceilings (lay-in ceilings or suspended drywall or similar construction)


283121 - 12

a. flush mounted devices with recessed box and concealed wiring/conduit

2. Inaccessible ceilings (exposed ‘open’ structure or inaccessible ceilings)

a. unfinished spaces; surface mounted devices using exposed conduit and boxes

b. finished spaces; surface mounted devices using surface raceway

3. Hollow walls (stud walls or hollow CMU)

a. flush mounted devices with recessed box and concealed wiring in conduit

b. surface devices with exposed conduit may be used only in unfinished spaces

(mechanical / electrical rooms or similar areas) or as approved by the

Architect/Engineer.

4. Solid walls (solid masonry)

a. surface mounted devices with surface raceway system

1) exposed conduit may be used only in unfinished spaces (mechanical /

electrical rooms or similar areas as defined by the Architect)).

D. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating

Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices"

Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.

4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high

ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72.

5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet where in the direction of airflow, or 5 feet

otherwise, from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.

6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting

fixture.

E. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they

extend the full width of duct. Install remote test station in public area below concealed detectors

or in accessible area within mechanical areas

F. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells

and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind

a grille.

G. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

3.2 WIRING METHODS

A. General: All fire alarm system wiring shall be installed concealed wherever possible. Fire

alarm wiring shall generally consist of open cabling run supported above accessible ceilings

1. Install wiring in cable tray where indicated or else use approved cable straps attached

directly to structure.

2. No wiring shall lie directly on ceilings. No wiring shall be strapped or tied to piping,

ductwork or conduits

3. Install wiring in conduit in open structure areas.

B. Conduit and Raceway:


283121 - 13

1. All conduit and junction boxes shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed

in unfinished areas.

2. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted

control panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the

FACP manufacturer.

3. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or

more cables are contained within a single conduit.

4. All conduit, mounting boxes, junction boxes and panels are to be securely hung and

fastened with appropriate fittings to insure positive grounding throughout the entire

system.

5. Fire alarm cable must be separated from any open conductors of Power, or Class 1

circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these

conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29. Wiring for 24 volt control, alarm notification,

emergency communication and similar power-limited auxiliary functions may be run in

the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided

with transient suppression devices and the system shall be designed to permit

simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals.

6. Conduit sleeves with fire-stopping shall be provided where open wiring penetrates floors

or fire-rated partitions.

C. Wiring:

1. Wire and cable types and minimum size shall be as recommended by the equipment

manufacturer. However, the size shall not be less than specified or shown on the

drawing/riser diagram. The contractor shall not use any wire or cable not recommended

by the equipment supplier.

2. The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit,

maximum 20 amperes. This panel circuit breaker shall be labeled as FIRE ALARM. The

control panel shall be grounded using a #10 AWG conductor.

3. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and

unshielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 12,500 feet. The design of the

system shall permit use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with the SLC

communication circuit.

4. All field wiring shall be electrically supervised for open circuit and ground fault.

5. All conductors and cables shall be installed without the use of splices unless permitted by

the manufacturer.

6. Cable lubricants shall be used only as permitted by the manufacturer.

7. Flexible connectors are to be used for all devices mounted in suspended lay-in ceiling

panels

8. No wiring other than fire alarm detection, alarm or auxiliary functions will be permitted

in fire alarm raceways.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

2. Junction boxes shall be painted fire alarm red and identified with ‘FA’ in black on cover.


283121 - 14

B. Identify location of above-ceiling detectors by applying a 1/2” diameter red vinyl ‘dot’ with

adhesive back on the ceiling grid below the device.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a

ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Architect/Engineer, Owner, and authorities having jurisdiction

(AHJ).

B. Field Service: Engage a factory-trained technician, or a trained and NICET Level II qualified

technician, to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,

including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the

"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section

of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection

and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports. Submit copies to the Architect/Engineer for review. Submit

final approved copies in Operation & Maintenance Manuals.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system. Formal

on-site training shall be provided to the Owner’s representative/maintenance personnel and shall

include instructions in the location, inspection, maintenance, testing and operation of all fire

alarm system components.

B. Provide minimum of (4) hours of general instruction. Provide a signed copy of the name of the

personnel giving the instructions and the personnel of the Owner who were instructed.


SITE CLEARING Delanco MVC

311000- 1

DPMC #T0548-00

DIVISION 31

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetated areas to remain.

2. Removing existing vegetation.

3. Clearing and grubbing.

4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.

5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.

6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place.

7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and

clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than

underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2

inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other

nonsoil materials.

B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected

during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of

groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

1.3 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared

materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings,

adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by

site clearing.

B. Record drawings, according to Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying

and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and

mechanical conditions.


311000- 2


A. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied

or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities

without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on

Owner's premises where indicated.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before

site clearing.

D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control

measures are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in

Division 31 Section “Earth Moving”.

1. Obtain approved borrow soil and topsoil materials off-site when satisfactory soil

materials are not available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during

construction.

B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.


311000- 3

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,

according to the “Standards for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control in New Jersey”, latest

edition, and in accordance with the Burlington County Soil Conservation District.

B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction

until permanent vegetation has been established.

C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during

removal.

3.3 TREE PROTECTION

A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing.

Remove fence when construction is complete.

1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area.

2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area.

3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.

B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where excavation is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and excavate to minimize

damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly

cut roots as close to excavation as possible.

1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.

2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected

and covered with soil.

3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with an emulsified

asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues.

4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible.

D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction

operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

1. Employ an arborist or Certified Tree Expert, licensed in New Jersey, to submit details of

proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs.

2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by

Architect.

3.4 UTILITIES

A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.


311000- 4

2. Notify Burlington County Health Department 72 hours prior to abandoning/ removing

subsurface sewage disposal system components.

B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others

unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide

temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed in accordance with

utility owner requirements.

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit demolition and

construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.

2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner

where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.

3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18

inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade.

4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone.

5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material

unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm),

and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with

underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots,

and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil.

Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm).

2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones.

3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal.

4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.


311000- 5

3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated in the contract documents.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length

of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces

vertically.

2. If applicable, paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent

corrosion.

3.8 DISPOSAL

A. Disposal: Remove any surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished

materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off

Owner's property.

1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable

materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them

to recycling facilities.


EARTH MOVING Delanco MVC

312000- 1

DPMC #T0548-00

DIVISION 31

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Preparing subgrades for walks, pavements, grasses, and plants.

2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.

3. Subbase course for walks and pavements.

4. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving.

5. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.

6. Aggregate course for basin maintenance access driveway.


A. The Standard Specifications of the New Jersey Department of Transportation for Road and

Bridge Construction, dated 2007 as amended and augmented by the Supplementary

Specifications (NJDOT Specifications) shall govern where reference is indicated on this project.

Where conflicts arise between the specifications contained herein or the NJDOT specifications,

the more stringent requirement shall govern.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to

support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying

pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward

capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and

dimensions indicated.


312000- 2

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond

indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Engineer. Authorized additional

excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for

changes in the Work.

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated

lines and dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as

remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical

and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below

the ground surface.

I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix

asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete

pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill

immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground

services within buildings.


A. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before

beginning earth moving operations.

B. Do not commence earth moving operations until Soil Erosion & Sediment Control Measures

specified on the Drawings are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not

available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to

ASTM D 2487 or Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3 according to AASHTO M 145, or a

combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any

dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Subbase Course: Virgin Dense Graded Aggregate per 2007 NJDOT Specifications.

Sieve Size Percent Passing

1-1/2" 100%

3/4" 55 – 90%


312000- 3

No. 4 25 – 50%

No. 50 5 – 20%

No. 200 3 – 10%

D. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch

(37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

E. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch

(25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve or as indicated

on the plans.

F. Top Soil: 6” depth, see Turf & Grasses Specification Section.

G. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of clean crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed

gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch

(37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

H. Geotextile: Typar 3151 geotextile fabric, 151” width including the following properties:

1. Mechanical Rating

a. Grab tensile strength, ASTM D4632 156 N

b. Grab elongation, ASTM D4632 60%

c. Trapezoidal tear strength, ASTM D4533 70 N

d. Puncture Strength, ASTM D4833 45 N

2. Hydraulic (MARV) ¹ Rating

a. Apparent opening size, ASTM D4751 .840 mm

b. Permittivity, ASTM D4491 1.5 sec -¹

c. Water flow rate, ASTM D4491 9635 I/min/m -¹

Geotextile shall be as described or approved equal. Provide submittal for review and approval

to Owner’s Representative.

I. Sand Base:

1. Base Sand: Base Sand shall be composed of no less than 99.7% mineral aggregates by dry

weight (as measured by organic burn test) meeting the following particle analysis grada-

tion:

SIEVE % PASSING

1/4 100%

#4 90-100%

#10 80-90%

#20 60-80%

#30 40-60%

#60 <10%

#100 <5%

#200 <2%

Base Sand compacted to 95% of maximum dry density as measured by the Modified Proctor

test (ASTM D1557) shall exhibit an infiltration rate of a minimum of 9 inches per hour.


312000- 4

Sand shall be as described or approved equal. Submit a certified report of an approved agricul-

tural chemist for sand to be furnished.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape

manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150

mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility,

with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal

detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored to comply with local

practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving

operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove

temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface

and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil

materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be

authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials

and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25

mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and

removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.

Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim

bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.


312000- 5

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and

subgrades.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or

conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher

than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 9 inches (minimum) each side of pipe or conduit or as indicated.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of

pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of

pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp

objects along trench subgrade.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other

unyielding bearing material, 4 inches (100 mm) deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding

course.

D. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-

tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed

roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with

installation of utilities.

3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree

and Plant Protection."

3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired dump truck

to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated

subgrades.

B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by Engineer, without additional compensation.

3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation

of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean

concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when

approved by Engineer.


312000- 6

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by

Engineer.

3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.

Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of

remaining trees.

3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding

course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,

fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450

mm) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of

footings.

D. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25

mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both

sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of

piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

E. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

F. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6

inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.10 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal so fill

material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.

2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.

3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.

4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.

5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.


312000- 7

3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before

compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain

frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that

exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified

dry unit weight.

3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 6 inches (200 mm) in loose depth

for material compacted by low compaction wide track dozers , and not more than 4 inches (100

mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and

uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight

according to ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12

inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95

percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and

compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below

subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85

percent.

3.13 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply

with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

B. Site Rough Grading: Grade site per plans and detail information. Grades shall be established

using laser level. . Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

3.14 SUBBASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.


312000- 8

B. Place Sand Base on subgrades free of frost, snow, ice and vegetation.

C. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades using laser

level.

2. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of

equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than

3 inches (75 mm) thick.

3. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross

sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according

to ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557.

4. Compact


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to

perform tests and inspections.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with

subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with

requirements.

C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed

to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing

subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when

approved by Engineer.

D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of

compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to

depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.16 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep

free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed

surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent

construction operations or weather conditions.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,

backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,

and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.


312000- 9

3.17 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and

debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.


ASPHALT PAVING Delanco MVC

321216- 1

DPMC #T0548-00

DIVISION 32

SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Hot-mix asphalt paving.

2. Pavement-marking paint.


1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving".

2. Refer to the NJDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction,

Section 401, for material, equipment, and construction requirements associated with

the placement of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) courses.

3. Refer to the NJDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction,

Section 610, for material, equipment, and construction requirements associated with

the placement of traffic stripes and markings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical

and performance properties.

1. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each

job mix proposed for the Work.

2. Pavement marking and striping.

B. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by the

NJDOT.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or the NJDOT for asphalt paving work.


321216- 2

1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard

specifications do not apply to this Section.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively

damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following

conditions are not met:

1. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C).

2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and rising

at time of placement.

3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) at time

of placement.

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a

minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for oil-based materials or 55

deg F (12.8 deg C) for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Refer to Section 401 of the NJDOT Standard Specifications for Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)

material requirements.

2.2 TRAFFIC STRIPES AND MARKINGS

A. Refer to Section 610.02 of the NJDOT Standard Specifications for traffic striping and marking

material requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft

pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

B. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


321216- 3

3.2 COLD MILLING

A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold

milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections

indicated.

3.3 PATCHING

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement

section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300

mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically.

Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new

subgrade.

B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat

concrete pieces firmly.

1. Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal

patches, extending into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut

excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form

new subgrade.

C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix

asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.

2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

D. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch

and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.

3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material

from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and

written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-

aggregate base before applying paving materials.

C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq.

yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.

2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.


321216- 4

3.5 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place

asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of

mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

1. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C).

2. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and

tears in asphalt-paving mat.

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide unless infill edge strips of a

lesser width are required.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools

to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent

segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.6 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct

joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix

asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.

2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm).

4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes

work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered"

method according to AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving

Operations."

3.7 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without

excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-

plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and

outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade,

and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while

hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix

asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:

1. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to

ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.


321216- 5

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still

warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to

proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled

and hardened.

G. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become

marked.

3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the

following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.

B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within

the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied

transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: 1/4 inch (6 mm)

2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm)

3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.

Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3.9 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Do not apply pavement-marking until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with

Engineer.

B. Allow paving to age for 14 days before starting pavement marking.

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

D. Apply pavement marking with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of

dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended

rates.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor to engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and

inspections.

B. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.


321216- 6

C. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements

indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

3.11 DISPOSAL

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and

legally dispose of them in an approved landfill.


CONCRETE PAVING Delanco MVC

321313- 1

DPMC #T0548-00

DIVISION 32

SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:

1. Curbs and gutters.

2. Walkways.

3. Concrete pads


1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase

course.

2. Refer to the NJDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section

606, for material, equipment, and construction requirements associated with concrete

sidewalks and islands.


607, for material, equipment, and construction requirements associated with concrete

curbing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who complies

with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless

modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.


321313- 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire

into flat sheets.

B. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.

C. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed.

D. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.

E. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496.

F. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening

reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports

according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and

source throughout the Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II gray

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide

aggregates from a single source.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, of type suitable for application, certified by

manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent

water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

2.3 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene

sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.


321313- 3

E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

dissipating.

F. White Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

2.5 CONCRETE MIXTURES

1. Concrete shall be NJDOT Class B, NJDOT Class C, or as indicated.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below walkways with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to

identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to

required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and

so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete

without damage.

3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and

supporting reinforcement.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with

faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to

centerline, unless otherwise indicated.


321313- 4

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at

locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement

terminates at isolation joints.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs,

catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as

indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete

thickness to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete.

E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with

an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface

finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed.

B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push

or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

D. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.

E. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform

surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further

disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

3.6 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and

concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven

floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true

planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform

granular texture.

1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished

concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.


321313- 5

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy

conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during

finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing,

screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete

surface.

3.8 TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch

(6 mm).

4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm).

5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.

6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.

3.9 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with

requirements in this Section.

B. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from concrete for at least 14 days after

placement.

C. Maintain concrete free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.

D. Protect all concrete work from vandalism during setting and initial stabilization through

monitoring and physical barriers. The Contractor must repair any vandalized concrete at their

cost.


TURF AND GRASSES Delanco MVC

329200- 1

DPMC #T0548-00

DIVISION 32

SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Seeding.

2. Sodding.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course.

B. Refer to the NJDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 606,

for material, equipment, and construction requirements associated with concrete sidewalks and

islands.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves,

twigs, and detritus.

B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand

with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a

pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and

molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,

defoliant, or desiccant.

E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants,

animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents

(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface

soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and

perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.


329200- 2

G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface

of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic

matter and soil organisms.

I. Surface Soil: Whatever soil is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project

site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as

urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Certification of grass seed.

1. Certification of each seed mixture.


A. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a

qualified soil-testing laboratory.

1. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling.

2. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth.

a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil

amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy,

viable plants.

b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide

additional recommendations for corrective action.


A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened

containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication

of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.

B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for

Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation"

in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting

within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying.


A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape

Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is


329200- 3

planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following

periods:

1. Seeded Turf: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion.

a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or

if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.

2. Sodded Turf: 30 days from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed

Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.

2.2 TURFGRASS SOD

A. Turfgrass Sod: Certified, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's

"Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color,

and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.

2.3 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium

carbonate equivalent and as follows:

1. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a

minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.

B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, and with a

minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent

passing through No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve.

C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10

percent sulfur.

D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent


G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.


329200- 4

2.4 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8;

moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch (19-mm)

sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert

contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings.

B. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or

of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100

to 2000 percent.

C. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of

uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.

D. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by

volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks,

soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.5 FERTILIZERS

A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of

fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea

formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent

phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble

nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by

weight.

2.6 MULCHES

A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of

wheat, rye, oats, or barley.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TURF AREA PREPARATION

A. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100 mm).

Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish,

and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening.


329200- 5

2. Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil

amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil.

3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm) but not less than required to meet

finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or

subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

a. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.

B. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating,

grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows:

1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil.

2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches (150 mm). Apply soil amendments and

fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches

(100 mm) of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture.

3. Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots,

trash, and other extraneous matter.

4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's

property.

C. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly

fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish elevation. Roll and rake,

remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can

be planted in the immediate future.

D. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry

before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

E. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded

or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.2 SEEDING

A. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Evenly distribute

seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. Do not seed

against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.

B. Sow seed at a total minimum rate of 2 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.9 kg/92.9 sq. m).

C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

D. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:4 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly

at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre (42 kg/92.9 sq. m) to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches

(38 mm) in loose thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable

equipment.

E. Provide topsoil stabilization matting for slopes exceeding1:4.


329200- 6

3.3 SODDING

A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or

muddy.

B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch

or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to

subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade,

eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor

cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.

1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3.

C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after

planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth

of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) below sod.

3.4 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and

performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and

replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials

and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

B. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain height

appropriate for species without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3

of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings.

C. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with

authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate

applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before

each application is performed.

3.5 SATISFACTORY TURF

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:

1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand

of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage

exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. (0.92 sq. m) and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5

inches (125 by 125 mm).

2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-

colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and

surface irregularities.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue

maintenance until turf is satisfactory.


PLANTS Delanco MVC

329300- 1

DPMC #T0548-00

DIVISION 32

SECTION 329300 - PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plants.

2. Planting soils.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves,

twigs, and detritus.

C. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

D. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand

with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a

pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and

molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,

defoliant, or desiccant.

F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants,

animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents

(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

G. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface

soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and

perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

H. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where

the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the

stem or trunk.

I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top

surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

PLANTS Delanco MVC

329300- 2

J. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic

matter and soil organisms.

K. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site.

In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban

environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils.

B. Samples of mineral mulch.

C. Product certificates.

D. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for

maintenance of plants during a calendar year.


A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor

on Project site when work is in progress.

1. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a

qualified soil-testing laboratory.

1. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling.

2. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth.

a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil

amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy,

viable plants.

b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide

additional recommendations for corrective action.

C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable

requirements in ANSI Z60.1.


A. Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack

root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until

planting.

B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from

sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not

bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide

PLANTS Delanco MVC

329300- 3

protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery

and handling.

C. Handle planting stock by root ball.

D. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F until planting.

E. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If

planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate

aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep

roots moist.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in

materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of

adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond

Contractor's control.

b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.

2. Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion:

a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months.

b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months.

c. Annuals: Two months.


A. Initial Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer.

Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and

continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than

maintenance period below.

1. Maintenance Period for Trees and Shrubs: Six months from date of Substantial

Completion.

2. Maintenance Period for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Six months from date of

Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form,

shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings

PLANTS Delanco MVC

329300- 4

and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or

root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated

when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald,

injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

B. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball,

which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before

planting.

C. Annuals: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed, with well-

established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with

excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to

outdoor conditions before delivery.

2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium

carbonate equivalent and as follows:

1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a


2. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a


B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a

minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent


C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10

percent sulfur.

D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent


G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.

H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water

absorption capacity by weight.

I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.

2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or granular texture,

with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

PLANTS Delanco MVC

329300- 5

B. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or

of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100

to 2000 percent.

C. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of

uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.

D. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by

volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks,

soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.4 FERTILIZERS

A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of

fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea

formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent

phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble

nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by

weight.

C. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade

planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting

nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots.

1. Size: 10-gram tablets.

2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent

potassium, by weight plus micronutrients.

2.5 PLANTING SOILS

A. Planting Soil: Existing topsoil on site may be stockpiled (under Section 312000 Earth Moving,

etc.) for reuse in landscape work. If quantity of stockpiled topsoil is insufficient, provide

additional topsoil as required to complete landscape work. If quantity of stockpiled topsoil is in

excess for spreading under this section, remove from the designated sites, when directed and

dispose of by legal means, away from the premises and owner's property and at own expense for

loading, hauling and dumping. Obtain written approval from the Owner prior to removing any

topsoil from the site.

B. Verify suitability of soil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones,

clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement,

plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix soil with

the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting

soil:

PLANTS Delanco MVC

329300- 6

1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: <10lbs/ 100 s.f>.

2. Weight of Lime and or Sulfur per 1000 Sq. Ft. (per soil test recommendations)

3. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): <4 lbs.>.

4. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): <20 lbs.>.

2.6 MULCHES

A. Organic Mulch: Shredded hardwood.

B. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8;

moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25-mm)

sieve; soluble salt content of 2 – 5 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants

and free of substances toxic to plantings.

C. Mineral Mulch: Rounded riverbed gravel or smooth-faced stone.

1. Size Range: 3/4 inch (19 mm) maximum, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum.

2. Color: Uniform tan-beige color range acceptable to Engineer.

2.7 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS

A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd.

(101g/sq. m) minimum.

B. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven

polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd. (162 g/sq. m).

2.8 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as

required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless

authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT

A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 12 inches. Remove stones larger than

1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and

legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil

amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil.

2. Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches (150 mm) but not less than required to meet

finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen,

muddy, or excessively wet.

PLANTS Delanco MVC

329300- 7

B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly

fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.2 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-

degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom

leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away

from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil

to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter.

2. Excavate at least 12 inches (300 mm) wider than root spread and deep enough to

accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock.

3. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the

bottom of the root ball.

B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil.

3.3 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING

A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1.

B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not

break.

C. Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch (25 mm) above

adjacent finish grades.

1. Use planting soil for backfill.

2. Balled and Burlapped: After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant,

carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from

sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting.

Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting

operation.

3. Container-Grown: Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball

or plant.

4. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging

root ball or plant. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or

during planting operation.

5. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air

pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before

placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

6. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in

amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside

the root ball about 1 inch (25 mm) from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the

hole.

7. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

PLANTS Delanco MVC

329300- 8

3.4 TREE PROTECTION, STAKING AND GUYING

A. Immediately after planting, stake or guy trees either 1 inch or more in caliper or more than 3

feet in height. Ensure that guy wires allow for normal sway. Ensure that trees remain plumb.

B. Install 3’ high rigid mesh tree bark protectors. Trim as necessary for individual trees

3.5 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING

A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.

B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural

and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Engineer, do not cut tree leaders;

remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural

character.

3.6 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING

A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated in

even rows with triangular spacing.

B. Use planting soil for backfill.

C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.

D. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around

plants to hold water.

E. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

F. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery

from transplanting shock.

3.7 PLANTING AREA MULCHING

A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of [6 inches (150 mm)]

[12 inches (300 mm)] and secure seams with galvanized pins.

B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.

1. Trees and Tree-like Shrubs] in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 3-inch (75-mm)

average thickness, with 36-inch (900-mm) radius around trunks or stems. Do not place

mulch within 3 inches (75 mm) of trunks or stems.

2. Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch (75-mm) average thickness of mulch

over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not

place mulch within 3 inches (75 mm) of trunks or stems.

PLANTS Delanco MVC

329300- 9

3.8 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring

planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations

as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and

shrubs free of insects and disease.

B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.

Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and

pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.

D. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with

authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate

applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before

each application is performed.

E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and

trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or

replace damaged plantings.


STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING Delanco MVC

334100- 1

DPMC #T0548-00

DIVISION 33

SECTION 334100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and fittings.

2. Manholes.

3. Stormwater inlets and drainage structures

4. Pipe outlets.

5. Riprap outlet protection.

6. Gabions.



601, for material, equipment, and construction requirements associated with drainage

piping.


602, for material, equipment, and construction requirements associated with drainage

structures, including inlets, manholes, headwalls, and end sections.


603, for material, equipment, and construction requirements associated with outlet

protection.


604, for material, equipment, and construction requirements associated with gabions.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, and covers.

2. Catch basins and stormwater inlets: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames,

covers, and grates.

3. Headwalls and End Sections: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.

4. Gabions: Include manufacturer data and cut-sheets.

C. Certifications for the following:

1. Riprap Protection: Include volume, unit weight, and D50 size. Upon request, the

Contractor shall furnish a delivery receipt of the material from the quarry.


334100- 2

2. Gabions: Include volume, unit weight, stone size, and galvanized wire basket

information. Upon request, the Contractor shall furnish a delivery receipt of the material

from the quarry or fabricator. The Contractor shall submit copies of the manufacturer’s

recommended method of installation to the Engineer.

3. Geo-textile Fabric: Include product information from the manufacturer of the geo-textile

material. Upon request, the Contractor shall furnish a delivery receipt of the material

from the manufacturer. The Contractor shall submit copies of the manufacturer’s

recommended method of installation to the Engineer.

D. Coordination Drawings (where required): Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show

other piping in same trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate

interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.


A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Engineer or Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of

service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Engineer or Owner's written

permission.


A. Protect materials from dirt and damage.

B. Handle gabions according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTILE-IRON, CULVERT PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe: ASTM A 716, for push-on joints.

B. Standard Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push-on joints.

C. Compact Fittings: AWWA C153, for push-on joints.

D. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

2.2 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Corrugated PE Drainage Pipe and Fittings NPS 3 to NPS 10 (DN 80 to DN 250):

AASHTO M 252M, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints.

1. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252M, corrugated, matching tube and fittings.


334100- 3

B. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings NPS 12 to NPS 60 (DN 300 to DN 1500): AASHTO M 294M,

Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints.

1. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294M, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings.

2.3 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M).

1. Bell-and-spigot or tongue-and-groove ends and sealant joints with ASTM C 990

(ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl-rubber sealant.

2. Class III through Class V

2.4 MANHOLES

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes:

1. Description: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth

indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

2. Diameter: 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.

3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section as

required to prevent flotation.


minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base


5. Riser Sections: 4-inch (102-mm) minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth

indicated.

6. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is

indicated, and top of cone of size that matches grade rings.


8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole

walls, for each pipe connection.

9. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder, wide enough to allow worker to place both

feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps

into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth

from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm).

10. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-mm) total thickness,

to match diameter of manhole frame and cover, and height as required to adjust manhole

frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope.

B. Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Description: Ferrous; 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7- to 9-inch (175- to 225-mm) riser with

4-inch- (102-mm-) minimum width flange and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter cover.

Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to

"STORM SEWER."

2. Material: As manufactured by Campbell Foundry Co., or otherwise approved equal.


334100- 4

2.5 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350/350R (ACI 350M/350RM),

and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.

2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.

3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.

4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum

water/cementitious materials ratio or otherwise approved.

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.

2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.

C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement

design mix, 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials

ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.

1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of

vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth,

uniform radius and slope.

a. Invert Slope: [1] percent through manhole or otherwise recommend by

manufacture.

D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with

0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio or otherwise approved.

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.

2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.

2.6 CATCH BASINS

A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins:

1. Description: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth

indicated, with provision for sealant joints.


minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base


3. Riser Sections: 4-inch (102-mm) minimum thickness, 48-inch (1200-mm) diameter, and

lengths to provide depth indicated.

4. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is

indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.


6. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape

matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring

manufacturer.


334100- 5

7. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder, wide enough to allow worker to place both

feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps

into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth

from floor of catch basin to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm).

8. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each

pipe connecting to base section.

B. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16, structural

loading. Include flat grate with small square or short-slotted drainage openings.

1. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.

2. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 PIPE OUTLETS

A. Head Walls: Cast-in-place reinforced concrete, with apron and tapered sides.

2.8 RIPRAP PROTECTION

A. Riprap protection shall be composed of a uniformly graded mixture of rock conforming to

NJDOT Subsection 901.04, such that 50 percent of the mixture by weight shall be equal to or

larger than the designated median stone (D50) size. The well-graded mixture shall be composed

primarily of the larger stone sizes, but with a sufficient mixture of other sizes to fill the

progressively smaller voids between the stones. The diameter of the largest stone size in such a

mixture shall be 1.5 times the D50 stone size. The finished surfaces of the riprap stone

protection shall be even.

B. Geo-textile Fabric: Shall conform to Section 919.06 of the NJDOT Standard Specifications.

The geotextile shall be positioned over the entire surface upon which the riprap slope protection

is to be placed and extend a minimum of 12 inches out on each side. The extended edges of the

geotextile fabric shall be buried under a minimum of 6 inches of soil. When sections of

geotextile fabric need to be joined, the sections shall be overlapped a minimum of 18 inches in

the direction of flow.

2.9 GABIONS

A. Materials for gabions shall be PVC-coated galvanized steel wire conforming to ASTM A641.

Use wire mesh that is galvanized steel wire having a minimum size of No. 12 gauge and a

tensile strength between 60,000 and 80,000 pounds per square inch. The woven wire mesh shall

be manufactured in accordance with ASTM A975-97.

B. Fabrication for gabions shall meet the following:

1. Fabricate mesh openings to be hexagonal in shape and uniform in size. For baskets less

than 24 inches in height, use openings measuring approximately 2-1/2 × 3-1/4 inches.

For baskets greater than or equal to 24 inches in height, use openings measuring

approximately 3-1/4 × 4-1/2 inches. Fabricate the wire mesh to be non-ravelling when a

single strand is cut.


334100- 6

2. Gabion mattresses shall be manufactured with all components mechanically connected at

the production facility with the exception of the mattress lid, which is produced

separately from the base. The ends and diaphragm(s) shall be factory connected to the

base. All perimeter edges of the mesh forming the basket and top, or lid, shall be

selvedged with wire having a larger diameter.

3. The mattress shall be uniformly divided into internal cells. The diaphragms shall be

secured in position to the base so that no additional lacing is necessary at the jobsite.

C. Rock for woven mesh gabion mattresses shall meet the following:

1. The rock for gabions shall be hard, angular to round, durable rock and of such quality that

they shall not disintegrate on exposure to water or weathering during the life of the

structure.

2. Gabion rocks shall range between 3 in. and 5 in. for basket heights less than 24 inches

and shall range between 4 in. and 8 in. for basket heights greater than or equal to 24

inches.

3. The range in sizes shall allow for a variation of 5% oversize and/or 5% undersize rock,

provided it is not placed on the gabion exposed surface. The size shall be such that a

minimum of two layers of rock must be achieved when filling the gabion mattresses.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and

arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout

take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where

specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken

continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,

and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements,

and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch

connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes

and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-

jacking process of microtunneling.

F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:


334100- 7

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow.

2. Install piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at

changes in direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's

proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place concrete supports or anchors.

3. Install piping with 12-inch (305-mm) minimum cover.

4. Install hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings Handbook."

5. Install hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook."

6. Install ductile-iron piping and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or

AWWA M41.

7. Install PE corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321.

8. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.

9. Install nonreinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."

10. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."

G. Install corrosion-protection piping encasement over the following underground metal piping

according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105:

1. Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.

2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.

3. Ductile-iron pipe and fittings.

4. Expansion joints.


A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join ductile-iron culvert piping according to AWWA C600 for push-on joints.

2. Join ductile-iron piping and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41.

3. Join corrugated PE piping according to ASTM D 3212 for push-on joints.

4. Join reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation

Manual" for rubber-gasketed joints.

5. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible couplings.

3.4 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C. Where specific manhole construction is not indicated, follow manhole manufacturer's written

instructions.

D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.

Set tops 3 inches (76 mm) above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.


334100- 8

3.5 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION

A. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange

for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground

structures.

1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.

2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

structures.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.

Inspect after approximately 24 inches (610 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion

of Project.

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.

2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.

b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or

cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.

c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.

d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.

e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are

within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or

repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.

2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction.

3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice.

4. Submit separate report for each test.


334100- 9

5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:

a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities having

jurisdiction.

b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417.

c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924 (ASTM C 924M).

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within

allowances specified.

E. All new piping to be flushed clean upon completion of installation.


APPENDIX A

GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION REPORT

APPENDIX B

CONSTRUCTION PROJECT SIGN